DFCM
Bid MW13039
Solicitation MW13039
SLCC RRC Rampton Tech Bldg eLearning Ctr Remodel /
13037660
Bid designation: Public
DFCM
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
p. 1
DFCM
Bid MW13039
Bid MW13039
SLCC RRC Rampton Tech Bldg eLearning Ctr Remodel / 13037660
Bid Number
MW13039
Bid Title
SLCC RRC Rampton Tech Bldg eLearning Ctr Remodel / 13037660
Bid Start Date
Apr 16, 2013 7:29:24 AM MDT
Bid End Date
Apr 29, 2013 2:00:00 PM MDT
Question & Answer
End Date
Apr 24, 2013 3:00:00 PM MDT
Bid Contact
Brian Bales
DFCM
801-230-3129
brbales@utah.gov
Bid Contact
Marla Workman
DFCM
801-538-3260
marlaworkman@utah.gov
Contract Duration
One Time Purchase
Contract Renewal
Not Applicable
Prices Good for
45 days
Pre-Bid Conference Apr 18, 2013 8:00:00 AM MDT
Attendance is mandatory
Location: MEET IN THE LOBBY
Rampton Technology Building
Salt Lake Community College
Redwood Road Campus
Taylorsville, Utah
Bid Comments
The project is comprised of building new office and resource space for the eLearning program.
The 5,130 square foot remodel of existing office space is on the second floor of the Rampton
Technology Building located on the Redwood Road Campus of the Salt Lake Community College
in Taylorsville, Utah. This project must receive a certificate of occupancy by August 15, 2013.
Item Response Form
Item
MW13039--01-01 - Base Bid
Quantity
1 lump sum
Unit Price
Subcontractors List
Due: April 30, 2013
Business Organization
Type:
Liquidated Damages:
$200/day
Completion Date:
August 15, 2013
Number of DFCM
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
p. 2
DFCM
Bid MW13039
Addenda Recd:
Contractor's License
Number:
Delivery Location
DFCM
DFCM
4110 State Office Bldg.
Salt Lake City UT 84114
Qty 1
Expected Expenditure $400,000.00
Description
Base Bid: All work per plans and specifications
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
p. 3
DFCM
Bid MW13039
STATE OF UTAH - DEPARTMENT OF ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES
Division of Facilities Construction and Management
DFCM
STANDARD LOW BID PROJECT
April 16, 2013
eLEARNING CENTER REMODEL
RAMPTON TECHNOLOGY
BUILDING
SALT LAKE COMMUNITY COLLEGE
REDWOOD ROAD CAMPUS
TAYLORSVILLE, UTAH
DFCM Project Number: 13037660
DFCM FORM 1a 010213
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
p. 4
DFCM
Bid MW13039
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page Numbers
Title Sheet
Table of Contents
Notice to Contractors
Project Description
Project Schedule
Instructions to Bidders
Bid Bond
Instructions and Subcontractors List Form
Contractor's Agreement
Performance Bond
Payment Bond
Certificate of Substantial Completion
Past Performance Rating Form
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
11
14
19
20
21
Technical Specifications:
Drawings:
Current copies of the DFCM General Conditions dated May 25, 2005 and all Supplemental General Conditions are
available upon request at the DFCM office and on the DFCM web site at http://dfcm.utah.gov - “Standard
Documents” – “Reference Documents” – “Supplemental General Conditions”, and are hereby made part of these
contract documents by reference.
The Agreement and General Conditions dated May 25, 2005 have been updated from versions that were
formally adopted and in use prior to this date. The changes made to the General Conditions are identified in a
document entitled Revisions to General Conditions that is available on DFCM’s web site at
http://dfcm.utah.gov.
DFCM FORM 1a 010213
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
2
p. 5
DFCM
Bid MW13039
NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS
Sealed bids will be received by the Division of Facilities Construction and Management (DFCM) for:
eLEARNING CENTER REMODEL – RAMPTON TECHNOLOGY BUILDING
SALT LAKE COMMUNITY COLLEGE - REDWOOD ROAD CAMPUS
TAYLORSVILLE, UTAH
DFCM PROJECT NO: 13037660
Bids will be in accordance with the Contract Documents that will be available at 10:00 AM on Tuesday,
April 16, 2013 on the DFCM web page at http://dfcm.utah.gov. For questions regarding this project,
please contact Brian Bales, DFCM, at 801-230-3129. No others are to be contacted regarding this
project. Construction estimate for this project is $ 400,000.
A mandatory pre-bid meeting will be held at 8:00 AM on Thursday, April 18, 2013 at the Rampton
Technology Building, Redwood Road Campus, Salt Lake Community College, Taylorsville, Utah.
Meet in the lobby. All bidders wishing to bid on this project are required to attend this meeting.
Bids are to be submitted electronically through a secure mailbox at BidSync www.bidsync.com until
2:00 PM on Monday, April 29, 2013. It is the sole responsibility of the contractor to ensure their bid
reaches BidSync before the closing date and time. There is no cost to the contractor to submit
electronic bids via BidSync. Electronic bids may require the uploading of electronic attachments.
The submission of attachments containing embedded documents (i.e., zip files, .mov, wmp, and mp3
files, etc.) is prohibited. All documents should be attached as separate files. Questions about using
BidSync, please call customer service at 801-765-9245 option 1, option 1.
A bid bond in the amount of five percent (5%) of the bid amount, made payable to the Division of
Facilities Construction and Management on DFCM’s bid bond, shall accompany the bid submission
and uploaded in BidSync. If the bid bond is not furnished with the bid through Bidsync, the BID
is NONRESPONSIVE.
The Division of Facilities Construction and Management reserves the right to reject any or all bids or
to waive any formality or technicality in any bid in the interest of DFCM.
DIVISION OF FACILITIES CONSTRUCTION AND MANAGEMENT
4110 State Office Building
Salt Lake City, Utah 84114
DFCM FORM 1a 010213
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
3
p. 6
DFCM
Bid MW13039
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
The project is comprised of building new office and resource space for the eLearning program. The
5,130 square foot remodel of existing office space is on the second floor of the Rampton Technology
Building located on the Redwood Road Campus of the Salt Lake Community College in Taylorsville,
Utah. This project must receive a certificate of occupancy by August 15, 2013.
Base Bid: All work per plans and specifications
Additive Alternates:
None
Liquidated Damages: $200/day.
DFCM FORM 1a 010213
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
4
p. 7
DFCM
Bid MW13039
STATE OF UTAH - DEPARTMENT OF ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES
Division of Facilities Construction and Management
DFCM
PROJECT SCHEDULE
BIDSYNC BID #MW13039
PROJECT NAME:
eLEARNING CENTER REMODEL – RAMPTON TECHNOLOGY BUILDING
SALT LAKE COMMUNITY COLLEGE – REDWOOD ROAD CAMPUS
TAYLORSVILLE, UTAH
DFCM PROJECT NO. 13037660
Event
Day
Date
Time
Place
Bidding Documents
Tuesday
April 16, 2013
10:00 AM
DFCM web site *
Available
Thursday
April 18, 2013
8:00 AM
Lobby
Mandatory Pre-bid Site
Rampton Technology Bldg
Meeting
SLCC Redwood Road Campus
Taylorsville, UT
Last Day to Submit
Wednesday
April 24,2013
3:00 PM
BidSync Web site**
Questions
Addendum Deadline
Thursday
April 25, 2013
3:00 PM
BidSync Web site**
(exception for bid delays)
Prime Contractors Turn In
Monday
April 29, 2013
2:00 PM
BidSync Web site**
Bid and Bid Bond
Sub-contractor List Due
Tuesday
April 30, 2013
2:00 PM
DFCM
4110 State Office Bldg
SLC, UT
E-Mail marlaworkman@utah.gov
Substantial Completion Date
Thursday
August 15, 2013
3:00 PM
NOTE:
*
**
DFCM FORM 1a 010213
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
DFCM’s web site address is http://dfcm.utah.gov.
BidSync web site address is www.bidsync.com.
5
p. 8
DFCM
Bid MW13039
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1.
Drawings and Specifications, Other Contract Documents
Drawings and Specifications, as well as other available Contract Documents, may be obtained as stated
in the Notice to Contractors.
2.
Bids
Before submitting a bid, each contractor shall carefully examine the Contract Documents, shall visit
the site of the Work; shall fully inform themselves as to all existing conditions and limitations; and
shall include in the bid the cost of all items required by the Contract Documents. If the bidder
observes that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance with applicable laws, building codes,
rules, regulations or contain obvious erroneous or uncoordinated information, the bidder shall
promptly notify the DFCM Representative and the necessary changes shall be accomplished by
Addendum.
Bids are to be submitted electronically through a secure mailbox at BidSync www.bidsync.com until
the date and time in this document. It is the sole responsibility of the contractor to ensure their bid
reaches BidSync before the closing date and time. There is no cost to the contractor to submit
electronic bids via BidSync. Electronic bids may require the uploading of electronic attachments. The
submission of attachments containing embedded documents (i.e., zip files, .mov, wmp, and mp3 files,
etc.) is prohibited. All documents should be attached as separate files.
A bid bond properly signed by a qualified surety, as indicated on the DFCM Bid Bond form provided
along with this Instruction to Bidders, in the amount of 5% of the bid, shall accompany the bid submission
and uploaded in BidSync. If the bid bond is not furnished with the bid through bidsync, the BID is
NONRESPONSIVE. THIS BID BOND MUST BE ON THE DFCM BID BOND FORM PROVIDED
WITH THIS INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS IN ORDER TO BE CONSIDERED AN ACCEPTABLE
BID unless only one bid is received by DFCM, or the failure to comply with the bid bond requirements is
determined by the Director of DFCM to be nonsubstantial based on the following:
A.
the bid bond is submitted on a form other than DFCM’s required Bid Bond form and the bid
bond meets all other requirements including being issued by a surety firm authorized to do
business in the State of Utah and be listed in the U.S. Department of the Treasury Circular
570, Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Securities on Federal Bonds
and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies for an amount not less than the amount of the bond
to be issued. A co-surety may be utilized to satisfy this requirement; and
B.
the contractor provides a bid bond properly signed by a qualified surety and on the required
DFCM Bid Bond form by the close of business of the next succeeding business day after the
DFCM notifies the bidder of the defective bid bond.
A CASHIER’S CHECK CANNOT BE USED AS A SUBSTITUTE FOR A BID BOND.
DFCM FORM 1b 010213
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
6
p. 9
DFCM
Bid MW13039
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
PAGE NO. 2
3.
Contract and Bond
The Contractor's Agreement will be in the form provided in this document. The Contract Time will be
as indicated in the bid. The successful bidder, simultaneously with the execution of the Contract
Agreement, will be required to furnish a performance bond and a payment bond, both bearing original
signatures, upon the forms provided in the procurement documents. The performance and payment
bonds shall be for an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract sum and secured
from a company that meets the requirements specified in the requisite forms. Any bonding
requirements for subcontractors will be specified in the Supplementary General Conditions.
4.
Listing of Subcontractors
Listing of Subcontractors shall be as summarized in the “Instructions and Subcontractor’s List Form”,
which are included as part of these Contract Documents. The Subcontractors List shall be delivered to
DFCM or e-mailed to marlaworkman@utah.gov within 24 hours of the bid opening. Requirements for
listing additional subcontractors will be listed in the Contract Documents.
DFCM retains the right to audit or take other steps necessary to confirm compliance with requirements
for the listing and changing of subcontractors. Any contractor who is found to not be in compliance
with these requirements is subject to a debarment hearing and may be debarred from consideration for
award of contracts for a period of up to three years.
5.
Interpretation of Drawings and Specifications
If any person or entity contemplating submitting a bid is in doubt as to the meaning of any part of the
drawings, specifications or other Contract Documents, such person shall submit to the DFCM Project
Manager a request for an interpretation thereof. The person or entity submitting the request will be
responsible for its prompt delivery. Any interpretation of the proposed documents will be made only
by addenda posted through BidSync at www.bidsync.com. Neither the DFCM nor A/E will be
responsible for any other explanations or interpretations of the proposed documents. A/E shall be
deemed to refer to the architect or engineer hired by DFCM as the A/E or Consultant for the Project.
6.
Addenda
Addenda will be posted through BidSync at www.bidsync.com. Contractors are responsible for
obtaining information contained in each addendum. Addenda issued prior to the submittal deadline
shall become part of the bidding process and must be acknowledged when the bid is submitted
electronically through www.bidsync.com. Failure to acknowledge addenda may result in
disqualification from bidding.
7.
Award of Contract
The Contract will be awarded as soon as possible to the lowest, responsive and responsible bidder,
based on the lowest combination of base bid and acceptable prioritized alternates, provided the bid is
DFCM FORM 1b 010213
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
7
p. 10
DFCM
Bid MW13039
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
PAGE NO. 3
reasonable, is in the interest of the State of Utah to accept and after applying the Utah Preference Laws
in U.C.A. Title 63, Chapter 56. DFCM reserves the right to waive any technicalities or formalities in
any bid or in the bidding. Alternates will be accepted on a prioritized basis with Alternate 1 being
highest priority, Alternate 2 having second priority, etc.
8.
DFCM Contractor Performance Rating
As a contractor completes each DFCM project, DFCM, the architect/engineer and the using agency will
evaluate project performance based on the enclosed “DFCM Contractor Performance Rating” form. The
ratings issued on this project will not affect this project but may affect the award on future projects.
9.
Licensure
The Contractor shall comply with and require all of its subcontractors to comply with the license laws
as required by the State of Utah.
10.
Permits
In concurrence with the requirements for permitting in the General Conditions, it is the responsibility
of the Contractor to obtain the fugitive dust plan requirements from the Utah Division of Air Quality
and the SWPPP requirements from the Utah Department of Environmental Quality and submit the
completed forms and pay any permit fee that may be required for this specific project. Failure to
obtain the required permit may result in work stoppage and/or fines from the regulating authority that
will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Any delay to the project as a result of any such failure
to obtain the permit or noncompliance with the permit shall not be eligible for any extension in the
Contract Time.
11.
Right to Reject Bids
DFCM reserves the right to reject any or all Bids.
12.
Time is of the Essence
Time is of the essence in regard to all the requirements of the Contract Documents.
13.
Withdrawal of Bids
Bids may be withdrawn on written request received from bidder prior to the time fixed for opening.
Negligence on the part of the bidder in preparing the bid confers no right for the withdrawal of the bid
after it has been opened.
DFCM FORM 1b 010213
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
8
p. 11
DFCM
Bid MW13039
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
PAGE NO. 4
14.
Product Approvals
Where reference is made to one or more proprietary products in the Contract Documents, but
restrictive descriptive materials of one or more manufacturer(s) is referred to in the Contract
Documents, the products of other manufacturers will be accepted, provided they equal or exceed the
standards set forth in the drawings and specifications and are compatible with the intent and purpose of
the design, subject to the written approval of the A/E. Such written approval must occur prior to the
deadline established for the last scheduled addenda to be issued. The A/E’s written approval will be in
an issued addendum. If the descriptive material is not restrictive, the products of other manufacturers
specified will be accepted without prior approval provided they are compatible with the intent and
purpose of the design as determined by the A/E.
15.
Financial Responsibility of Contractors, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors
Contractors shall respond promptly to any inquiry in writing by DFCM to any concern of financial
responsibility of the contractor, subcontractor or sub-subcontractor.
16.
Debarment
By submitting a bid, the Contractor certifies that neither it nor its principals, including project and site
managers, have been, or are under consideration for, debarment or suspension, or any action that
would exclude such from participation in a construction contract by any governmental department or
agency. If the Contractor cannot certify this statement, attach to the bid a detailed written explanation
which must be reviewed and approved by DFCM as part of the requirements for award of the Project.
DFCM FORM 1b 010213
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
9
p. 12
DFCM
Bid MW13039
BID BOND
(Title 63, Chapter 56, U. C. A. l953, as Amended)
KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS:
That
hereinafter referred to as
the "Principal," and
, a corporation organized and existing
under the laws of the State of
, with its principal office in the City of ______________ and authorized to transact
business in this State and U. S. Department of the Treasury Listed, (Circular 570, Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable
Securities on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies); hereinafter referred to as the "Surety," are held and firmly bound unto
the STATE OF UTAH, hereinafter referred to as the "Obligee," in the amount of $_____
(5% of the
accompanying bid), being the sum of this Bond to which payment the Principal and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors,
administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH that whereas the Principal has submitted to Obligee the accompanying
bid incorporated by reference herein, dated as shown, to enter into a contract in writing for the______________________________________
Project.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THE ABOVE OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said principal does not
execute a contract and give bond to be approved by the Obligee for the faithful performance thereof within ten (10) days after being notified
in writing of such contract to the principal, then the sum of the amount stated above will be forfeited to the State of Utah as liquidated
damages and not as a penalty; if the said principal shall execute a contract and give bond to be approved by the Obligee for the faithful
performance thereof within ten (10) days after being notified in writing of such contract to the Principal, then this obligation shall be null and
void. It is expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all defaults of the Principal hereunder shall be the full
penal sum of this Bond. The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that obligations of the Surety under this Bond shall be
for a term of sixty (60) days from actual date of the bid opening.
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this Bond is executed pursuant to provisions of Title 63, Chapter 56, Utah Code Annotated, 1953,
as amended, and all liabilities on this Bond shall be determined in accordance with said provisions to same extent as if it were copied at
length herein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the above bounden parties have executed this instrument under their several seals on the date indicated
below, the name and corporate seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed and these presents duly signed by its undersigned
representative, pursuant to authority of its governing body.
DATED this
day of
, 20
.
Principal's name and address (if other than a corporation):
Principal's name and address (if a corporation):
By:
By:
Title:
Title:
(Affix Corporate Seal)
Surety's name and address:
STATE OF
COUNTY OF
)
) ss.
)
By:
Attorney-in-Fact
(Affix Corporate Seal)
On this
day of
, 20
, personally appeared before me
,
whose identity is personally known to me or proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence, and who, being by me duly sworn, did say
that he/she is the Attorney-in-fact of the above-named Surety Company, and that he/she is duly authorized to execute the same and has
complied in all respects with the laws of Utah in reference to becoming sole surety upon bonds, undertakings and obligations, and that he/she
acknowledged to me that as Attorney-in-fact executed the same.
Subscribed and sworn to before me this
My Commission Expires:
Resides at:
day of
Agency: _______________________________________________________
Agent: _______________________________________________________
Address: _______________________________________________________
Phone: _______________________________________________________
DFCM FORM 1b 010213
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
, 20
.
NOTARY PUBLIC
Approved As To Form: May 25, 2005
By Alan S. Bachman, Asst Attorney General
10
p. 13
DFCM
Bid MW13039
STATE OF UTAH - DEPARTMENT OF ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES
Division of Facilities Construction and
DFCM
INSTRUCTIONS AND SUBCONTRACTORS LIST FORM
The three low bidders, as well as all other bidders that desire to be considered, are required by law to submit to
DFCM within 24 hours of bid opening a list of ALL first-tier subcontractors, including the subcontractor’s
name, bid amount and other information required by Building Board Rule and as stated in these Contract
Documents, based on the following:
DOLLAR AMOUNTS FOR LISTING
PROJECTS UNDER $500,000:
ALL FIRST-TIER SUBS $20,000 OR OVER MUST BE LISTED
PROJECTS $500,000 OR MORE:
ALL FIRST-TIER SUBS $35,000 OR OVER MUST BE LISTED





Any additional subcontractors identified in the bid documents shall also be listed.
The DFCM Director may not consider any bid submitted by a bidder if the bidder fails to submit a
subcontractor list meeting the requirements of State law.
List subcontractors for base bid as well as the impact on the list that the selection of any alternate may have.
Bidder may not list more than one subcontractor to perform the same work.
If there are no subcontractors for the job that are required to be reported by State law (either because there
are no subcontractors that will be used on the project or because there are no first-tier subcontractors over the
dollar amounts referred to above), then you do not need to submit a sublist. If you do not submit a sublist, it
will be deemed to be a representation by you that there are no subcontractors on the job that are required to
be reported under State law. At any time, DFCM reserves the right to inquire, for security purposes, as to
the identification of the subcontractors at any tier that will be on the worksite.
LICENSURE:
The subcontractor’s name, the type of work, the subcontractor’s bid amount, and the subcontractor's license
number as issued by DOPL, if such license is required under Utah Law, shall be listed. Bidder shall certify that
all subcontractors, required to be licensed, are licensed as required by State law. A subcontractor includes a
trade contractor or specialty contractor and does not include suppliers who provide only materials, equipment, or
supplies to a contractor or subcontractor.
‘SPECIAL EXCEPTION’:
A bidder may list ‘Special Exception’ in place of a subcontractor when the bidder intends to obtain a
subcontractor to perform the work at a later date because the bidder was unable to obtain a qualified or
reasonable bid under the provisions of U.C.A.Section 63A-5-208(4). The bidder shall insert the term ‘Special
Exception’ for that category of work, and shall provide documentation with the subcontractor list describing the
bidder’s efforts to obtain a bid of a qualified subcontractor at a reasonable cost and why the bidder was unable
to obtain a qualified subcontractor bid. The Director must find that the bidder complied in good faith with State
law requirements for any ‘Special Exception’ designation, in order for the bid to be considered. If awarded the
contract, the Director shall supervise the bidder’s efforts to obtain a qualified subcontractor bid. The amount of
the awarded contract may not be adjusted to reflect the actual amount of the subcontractor’s bid. Any listing of
‘Special Exception’ on the sublist form shall also include amount allocated for that work.
GROUNDS FOR DISQUALIFICATION:
The Director may not consider any bid submitted by a bidder if the bidder fails to submit a subcontractor list
meeting the requirements of State law. Director may withhold awarding the contract to a particular bidder if one
or more of the proposed subcontractors are considered by the Director to be unqualified to do the Work or for
DFCM FORM 1b 010213
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
11
p. 14
DFCM
Bid MW13039
INSTRUCTIONS AND SUBCONTRACTORS LIST FORM
Page No. 2
such other reason in the best interest of the State of Utah. Notwithstanding any other provision in these
instructions, if there is a good faith error on the sublist form, at the sole discretion of the Director, the Director
may provide notice to the contractor and the contractor shall have 24 hours to submit the correction to the
Director. If such correction is submitted timely, then the sublist requirements shall be considered met.
CHANGES OF SUBCONTRACTORS SPECIFICALLY IDENTIFIED ON SUBLIST FORM:
Subsequent to twenty-four hours after the bid opening, the contractor may change its listed subcontractors only
after receiving written permission from the Director based on complying with all of the following criteria.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
The contractor has established in writing that the change is in the best interest of the State and that the
contractor establishes an appropriate reason for the change, which may include, but not is not limited to,
the following reasons: the original subcontractor has failed to perform, or is not qualified or capable of
performing, and/or the subcontractor has requested in writing to be released.
The circumstances related to the request for the change do not indicate any bad faith in the original
listing of the subcontractors.
Any requirement set forth by the Director to ensure that the process used to select a new subcontractor
does not give rise to bid shopping.
Any increase in the cost of the subject subcontractor work is borne by the contractor.
Any decrease in the cost of the subject subcontractor work shall result in a deductive change order being
issued for the contract for such decreased amount.
The Director will give substantial weight to whether the subcontractor has consented in writing to being
removed unless the Contractor establishes that the subcontractor is not qualified for the work.
EXAMPLE:
Example of a list where there are only four subcontractors:
TYPE OF WORK
SUBCONTRACTOR,
“SELF” OR “SPECIAL
EXCEPTION”
SUBCONTRACTOR
BID AMOUNT
CONTRACTOR
LICENSE #
ELECTRICAL
ABCD Electric Inc.
$350,000.00
123456789000
LANDSCAPING
“Self” *
$300,000.00
123456789000
CONCRETE
(ALTERNATE #1)
XYZ Concrete Inc
$298,000.00
987654321000
MECHANICAL
“Special Exception”
(attach documentation)
Fixed at: $350,000.00
(TO BE PROVIDED
AFTER OBTAINING
SUBCONTRACTOR)
* Bidders may list “self”, but it is not required.
PURSUANT TO STATE LAW - SUBCONTRACTOR BID AMOUNTS CONTAINED IN THIS
SUBCONTRACTOR LIST SHALL NOT BE DISCLOSED UNTIL THE CONTRACT HAS BEEN AWARDED.
DFCM FORM 1b 010213
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
12
p. 15
DFCM
Bid MW13039
STATE OF UTAH - DEPARTMENT OF ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES
Division of Facilities Construction and
DFCM
SUBCONTRACTORS LIST
MARLAWORKMAN@UTAH.GOV
PROJECT TITLE:
Caution: You must read and comply fully with instructions.
TYPE OF WORK
SUBCONTRACTOR,
“SELF” OR “SPECIAL EXCEPTION”
SUBCONTRACTOR
BID AMOUNT
CONT. LICENSE #
We certify that:
l. This list includes all subcontractors as required by the instructions, including those related to the base bid as
well as any alternates.
2. We have listed “Self” or “Special Exception” in accordance with the instructions.
3. All subcontractors are appropriately licensed as required by State law.
FIRM:
DATE:
SIGNED BY:
NOTICE: FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM, PROPERLY COMPLETED AND SIGNED, AS REQUIRED IN THESE
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, SHALL BE GROUNDS FOR OWNER’S REFUSAL TO ENTER INTO A WRITTEN
CONTRACT WITH BIDDER. ACTION MAY BE TAKEN AGAINST BIDDERS BID BOND AS DEEMED
APPROPRIATE BY OWNER. ATTACH A SECOND PAGE IF NECESSARY.
4110 State Office Building, Salt Lake City, Utah 84114 - telephone 801-538-3018 –– http://dfcm.utah.gov
DFCM FORM 1b 010213
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
13
p. 16
DFCM
Bid MW13039
DFCM Project No. ________
DFCM Contract No. ______
CONTRACTOR'S AGREEMENT
FOR:
____________________________________
____________________________________
____________________________________
THIS CONTRACTOR'S AGREEMENT, made and entered into this ____ day of _________, 20__, by
and between the DIVISION OF FACILITIES CONSTRUCTION AND MANAGEMENT, hereinafter
referred to as "DFCM", and ______________________________, incorporated in the State of
___________ and authorized to do business in the State of Utah, hereinafter referred to as "Contractor",
whose address is ________________________________.
WITNESSETH: WHEREAS, DFCM intends to have Work performed at _______________________
_______________________________________________.
WHEREAS, Contractor agrees to perform the Work for the sum stated herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, DFCM and Contractor for the consideration provided in this Contractor's
Agreement, agree as follows:
ARTICLE 1. SCOPE OF WORK. The Work to be performed shall be in accordance with the
Contract Documents prepared by _______________________________________________ and entitled
“______________________________________________________________.”
The DFCM General Conditions (“General Conditions”) dated May 25, 2005 and all Supplemental
General Conditions (“also referred to as General Conditions”) on file at the office of DFCM and
available on the DFCM website (http://dfcm.utah.gov/StdDocs/index.html), are hereby incorporated by
reference as part of this Agreement and are included in the specifications for this Project. All terms used
in this Contractor's Agreement shall be as defined in the Contract Documents, and in particular, the
General Conditions.
The Contractor Agrees to furnish labor, materials and equipment to complete the Work as required in the
Contract Documents which are hereby incorporated by reference. It is understood and agreed by the
parties hereto that all Work shall be performed as required in the Contract Documents and shall be
subject to inspection and approval of DFCM or its authorized representative. The relationship of the
Contractor to the DFCM hereunder is that of an independent Contractor.
ARTICLE 2. CONTRACT SUM. The DFCM agrees to pay and the Contractor agrees to accept in
full performance of this Contractor's Agreement, the sum of _________________________________
____________________________________________ DOLLARS AND NO CENTS ($________.00),
which is the base bid, and which sum also includes the cost of a 100% Performance Bond and a 100%
DFCM FORM 1b 010213
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
14
p. 17
DFCM
Bid MW13039
CONTRACTOR'S AGREEMENT
PAGE NO. 2
Payment Bond as well as all insurance requirements of the Contractor. Said bonds have already been
posted by the Contractor pursuant to State law. The required proof of insurance certificates have been
delivered to DFCM in accordance with the General Conditions before the execution of this Contractor's
Agreement.
ARTICLE 3. TIME OF COMPLETION AND DELAY REMEDY. The Work shall be
Substantially Complete by ___________. Contractor agrees to pay liquidated damages in the amount of
$______ per day for each day after expiration of the Contract Time until the Contractor achieves
Substantial Completion in accordance with the Contract Documents, if Contractor's delay makes the
damages applicable. The provision for liquidated damages is: (a) to compensate the DFCM for delay
only; (b) is provided for herein because actual damages can not be readily ascertained at the time of
execution of this Contractor's Agreement; (c) is not a penalty; and (d) shall not prevent the DFCM from
maintaining Claims for other non-delay damages, such as costs to complete or remedy defective Work.
No action shall be maintained by the Contractor, including its or Subcontractor or suppliers at any tier,
against the DFCM or State of Utah for damages or other claims due to losses attributable to hindrances
or delays from any cause whatsoever, including acts and omissions of the DFCM or its officers,
employees or agents, except as expressly provided in the General Conditions. The Contractor may
receive a written extension of time, signed by the DFCM, in which to complete the Work under this
Contractor's Agreement in accordance with the General Conditions.
ARTICLE 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contract Documents consist of this Contractor's
Agreement, the Conditions of the Contract (DFCM General Conditions, Supplementary and other
Conditions), the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda and Modifications. The Contract Documents shall
also include the bidding documents, including the Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders/ Proposers
and the Bid/Proposal, to the extent not in conflict therewith and other documents and oral presentations
that are documented as an attachment to the contract.
All such documents are hereby incorporated by reference herein. Any reference in this Contractor's
Agreement to certain provisions of the Contract Documents shall in no way be construed as to lessen the
importance or applicability of any other provisions of the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 5. PAYMENT. The DFCM agrees to pay the Contractor from time to time as the Work
progresses, but not more than once each month after the date of Notice to Proceed, and only upon
Certificate of the A/E for Work performed during the preceding calendar month, ninety-five percent
(95%) of the value of the labor performed and ninety-five percent (95%) of the value of materials
furnished in place or on the site. The Contractor agrees to furnish to the DFCM invoices for materials
purchased and on the site but not installed, for which the Contractor requests payment and agrees to
DFCM FORM 1b 010213
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
15
p. 18
DFCM
Bid MW13039
CONTRACTOR'S AGREEMENT
PAGE NO. 3
safeguard and protect such equipment or materials and is responsible for safekeeping thereof and if such
be stolen, lost or destroyed, to replace same.
Such evidence of labor performed and materials furnished as the DFCM may reasonably require shall be
supplied by the Contractor at the time of request for Certificate of Payment on account. Materials for
which payment has been made cannot be removed from the job site without DFCM's written approval.
Five percent (5%) of the earned amount shall be retained from each monthly payment. The retainage,
including any additional retainage imposed and the release of any retainage, shall be in accordance with
UCA 13-8-5 as amended. Contractor shall also comply with the requirements of UCA 13-8-5, including
restrictions of retainage regarding subcontractors and the distribution of interest earned on the retention
proceeds. The DFCM shall not be responsible for enforcing the Contractor’s obligations under State law
in fulfilling the retention law requirements with subcontractors at any tier.
ARTICLE 6. INDEBTEDNESS. Before final payment is made, the Contractor must submit evidence
satisfactory to the DFCM that all payrolls, materials bills, subcontracts at any tier and outstanding
indebtedness in connection with the Work have been properly paid. Final Payment will be made after
receipt of said evidence, final acceptance of the Work by the DFCM as well as compliance with the
applicable provisions of the General Conditions.
Contractor shall respond immediately to any inquiry in writing by DFCM as to any concern of financial
responsibility and DFCM reserves the right to request any waivers, releases or bonds from Contractor in
regard to any rights of Subcontractors (including suppliers) at any tier or any third parties prior to any
payment by DFCM to Contractor.
ARTICLE 7. ADDITIONAL WORK. It is understood and agreed by the parties hereto that no
money will be paid to the Contractor for additional labor or materials furnished unless a new contract in
writing or a Modification hereof in accordance with the General Conditions and the Contract Documents
for such additional labor or materials has been executed. The DFCM specifically reserves the right to
modify or amend this Contractor's Agreement and the total sum due hereunder either by enlarging or
restricting the scope of the Work.
ARTICLE 8. INSPECTIONS. The Work shall be inspected for acceptance in accordance with the
General Conditions.
ARTICLE 9. DISPUTES. Any dispute, PRE or Claim between the parties shall be subject to the
provisions of Article 7 of the General Conditions. DFCM reserves all rights to pursue its rights and
remedies as provided in the General Conditions.
ARTICLE 10. TERMINATION, SUSPENSION OR ABANDONMENT. This Contractor’s
Agreement may be terminated, suspended or abandoned in accordance with the General Conditions.
DFCM FORM 1b 010213
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
16
p. 19
DFCM
Bid MW13039
CONTRACTOR'S AGREEMENT
PAGE NO. 4
ARTICLE 11. DFCM'S RIGHT TO WITHHOLD CERTAIN AMOUNT AND MAKE USE
THEREOF. The DFCM may withhold from payment to the Contractor such amount as, in DFCM's
judgment, may be necessary to pay just claims against the Contractor or Subcontractor at any tier for
labor and services rendered and materials furnished in and about the Work. The DFCM may apply such
withheld amounts for the payment of such claims in DFCM's discretion. In so doing, the DFCM shall be
deemed the agent of Contractor and payment so made by the DFCM shall be considered as payment
made under this Contractor's Agreement by the DFCM to the Contractor. DFCM shall not be liable to
the Contractor for any such payment made in good faith. Such withholdings and payments may be made
without prior approval of the Contractor and may be also be prior to any determination as a result of any
dispute, PRE, Claim or litigation.
ARTICLE 12. INDEMNIFICATION. The Contractor shall comply with the indemnification
provisions of the General Conditions.
ARTICLE 13. SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT. The DFCM and
Contractor, respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to
the other party to this Agreement, and to partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such
other party with respect to all covenants, provisions, rights and responsibilities of this Contractor’s
Agreement. The Contractor shall not assign this Contractor’s Agreement without the prior written
consent of the DFCM, nor shall the Contractor assign any moneys due or to become due as well as any
rights under this Contractor’s Agreement, without prior written consent of the DFCM.
ARTICLE 14. RELATIONSHIP OF THE PARTIES. The Contractor accepts the relationship of
trust and confidence established by this Contractor's Agreement and covenants with the DFCM to
cooperate with the DFCM and A/E and use the Contractor's best skill, efforts and judgment in furthering
the interest of the DFCM; to furnish efficient business administration and supervision; to make best
efforts to furnish at all times an adequate supply of workers and materials; and to perform the Work in
the best and most expeditious and economic manner consistent with the interests of the DFCM.
ARTICLE 15. AUTHORITY TO EXECUTE AND PERFORM AGREEMENT. Contractor
and DFCM each represent that the execution of this Contractor's Agreement and the performance
thereunder is within their respective duly authorized powers.
ARTICLE 16. ATTORNEY FEES AND COSTS. Except as otherwise provided in the dispute
resolution provisions of the General Conditions, the prevailing party shall be entitled to reasonable
attorney fees and costs incurred in any action in the District Court and/or appellate body to enforce this
Contractor's Agreement or recover damages or any other action as a result of a breach thereof.
DFCM FORM 1b 010213
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
17
p. 20
DFCM
Bid MW13039
CONTRACTOR'S AGREEMENT
PAGE NO. 5
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Contractor's Agreement on the day
and year stated hereinabove.
CONTRACTOR:
Signature
Date
Title:
State of
_____________)
)
County of _____________)
Please type/print name clearly
On this ____ day of _________, 20____, personally appeared before me, __________________,
whose identity is personally known to me (or proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence) and
who by me duly sworn (or affirmed), did say that he (she) is the ________________ (title or office) of
the firm and that said document was signed by him (her) in behalf of said firm.
_____________________________
Notary Public
(SEAL)
My Commission Expires _________
APPROVED AS TO AVAILABILITY
OF FUNDS:
DIVISION OF FACILITIES
CONSTRUCTION AND MANAGEMENT
* /S/ David D. Williams, Jr.
David D. Williams, Jr.
CBA Financial Director
* /S/ Lynn A. Hinrichs
Lynn A. Hinrichs
Assistant Director Construction Management
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
ATTORNEY GENERAL
January 2, 2013
By: Alan S. Bachman
Assistant Attorney General
APPROVED FOR EXPENDITURE:
* /S/ Division of Finance
Division of Finance
*Electronic signatures are effective when the AIM Status History page is attached to this agreement following this
signature page.
DFCM FORM 1b 010213
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
18
p. 21
DFCM
Bid MW13039
PERFORMANCE BOND
(Title 63, Chapter 56, U. C. A. 1953, as Amended)
That
hereinafter referred to as the "Principal" and
, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of
, with its principal office in the City of
and authorized to transact business in this State and U. S. Department of the Treasury
Listed (Circular 570, Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Securities on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies);
hereinafter referred to as the "Surety," are held and firmly bound unto the State of Utah, hereinafter referred to as the "Obligee, " in the amount of
DOLLARS ($
) for the payment whereof, the
said Principal and Surety bind themselves and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written Contract with the Obligee, dated the
construct
in the County of
, State of Utah, Project No.
, for the approximate sum of
day of
Dollars ($
, 20
, to
), which
Contract is hereby incorporated by reference herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the Contract in accordance with the
Contract Documents including, but not limited to, the Plans, Specifications and conditions thereof, the one year performance warranty, and the terms of the
Contract as said Contract may be subject to Modifications or changes, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect.
No right of action shall accrue on this bond to or for the use of any person or corporation other than the state named herein or the heirs, executors,
administrators or successors of the Owner.
The parties agree that the dispute provisions provided in the Contract Documents apply and shall constitute the sole dispute procedures of the parties.
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this Bond is executed pursuant to the Provisions of Title 63, Chapter 56, Utah Code Annotated, 1953, as amended,
and all liabilities on this Bond shall be determined in accordance with said provisions to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this
WITNESS OR ATTESTATION:
day of
, 20
.
PRINCIPAL:
By:
(Seal)
Title:
WITNESS OR ATTESTATION:
SURETY:
By:
Attorney-in-Fact
STATE OF
COUNTY OF
(Seal)
)
) ss.
)
On this
day of
, 20
, personally appeared before me
, whose
identity is personally known to me or proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence, and who, being by me duly sworn, did say that he/she is the Attorney
in-fact of the above-named Surety Company and that he/she is duly authorized to execute the same and has complied in all respects with the laws of Utah in
reference to becoming sole surety upon bonds, undertakings and obligations, and that he/she acknowledged to me that as Attorney-in-fact executed the same.
Subscribed and sworn to before me this
day of
My commission expires:
Resides at:
Agency: _________________________________________________
Agent: _________________________________________________
Address: _________________________________________________
Phone: _________________________________________________
DFCM FORM 1b 010213
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
, 20
.
________
NOTARY PUBLIC
Approved As To Form: May 25, 2005
By Alan S. Bachman, Asst Attorney General
19
p. 22
DFCM
Bid MW13039
PAYMENT BOND
(Title 63, Chapter 56, U. C. A. l953, as Amended)
KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS:
That
hereinafter referred to as the "Principal," and
, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of
authorized to do business in this State
and U. S. Department of the Treasury Listed (Circular 570, Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Securities on Federal Bonds and as
Acceptable Reinsuring Companies); with its principal office in the City of
, hereinafter referred to as the "Surety," are held and firmly bound unto
the State of Utah hereinafter referred to as the "Obligee," in the amount of
Dollars ($
) for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors
and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written Contract with the Obligee, dated the
to construct
in the County of
, State of Utah, Project No.
for the approximate sum of
Dollars ($
incorporated by reference herein.
day of
, 20
,
), which contract is hereby
NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor or materials to Principal
or Principal's Subcontractors in compliance with the provisions of Title 63, Chapter 56, of Utah Code Annotated, l953, as amended, and in the prosecution of the
Work provided for in said Contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect.
That said Surety to this Bond, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no changes, extensions of time, alterations or additions to the terms
of the Contract or to the Work to be performed thereunder, or the specifications or drawings accompanying same shall in any way affect its obligation on this Bond,
and does hereby waive notice of any such changes, extensions of time, alterations or additions to the terms of the Contract or to the Work or to the specifications
or drawings and agrees that they shall become part of the Contract Documents.
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this Bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Title 63, Chapter 56, Utah Code Annotated, 1953, as amended, and
all liabilities on this Bond shall be determined in accordance with said provisions to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this
WITNESS OR ATTESTATION:
day of
, 20
.
PRINCIPAL:
By:
(Seal)
Title:
WITNESS OR ATTESTATION:
SURETY:
By:
STATE OF
COUNTY OF
On this
)
) ss.
)
Attorney-in-Fact
day of
(Seal)
, personally appeared before me
, whose identity is personally known to me or proved to me on the basis of
satisfactory evidence, and who, being by me duly sworn, did say that he/she is the Attorney-in-fact of the above-named Surety Company, and that he/she is duly
authorized to execute the same and has complied in all respects with the laws of Utah in reference to becoming sole surety upon bonds, undertakings and
obligations, and that he/she acknowledged to me that as Attorney-in-fact executed the same.
Subscribed and sworn to before me this
, 20
day of
, 20
.
My commission expires:
Resides at:
NOTARY PUBLIC
Agency: ________________________________________________
Agent: ________________________________________________
Address: ________________________________________________
Phone: ________________________________________________
DFCM FORM 1b 010213
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Approved As To Form: May 25, 2005
By Alan S. Bachman, Asst Attorney General
20
p. 23
DFCM
Bid MW13039
DivisionofDivision
of -Facilities
ConstructionOF
andADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES
STATE
OF UTAH
DEPARTMENT
Management
4110 State Office Building, Salt Lake City UT 84114
Division of Facilities Construction and Management
DFCM
CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
PROJECT
PROJECT NO: ___________________________
AGENCY/INSTITUTION ______________________________________________________________________________
AREA ACCEPTED
The Work performed under the subject Contract has been reviewed on this date and found to be Substantially Completed as
defined in the General Conditions; including that the construction is sufficiently completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents, as modified by any change orders agreed to by the parties, so that the State of Utah can occupy the Project or specified
area of the Project for the use for which it is intended.
The DFCM - (Owner) accepts the Project or specified area of the Project as Substantially Complete and will assume full
possession of the Project or specified area of the Project at
(time) on
(date).
The DFCM accepts the Project for occupancy and agrees to assume full responsibility for maintenance and operation, including
utilities and insurance, of the Project subject to the itemized responsibilities and/or exceptions noted below:
The Owner acknowledges receipt of the following closeout and transition materials:
As-built Drawings
O & M Manuals
Warranty Documents
Completion of Training
Requirements
A list of items to be completed or corrected (Punch List) is attached hereto. The failure to include an item on it does not alter the
responsibility of the Contractor to complete all the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, including authorized
changes thereof. The amount of _____________(Twice the value of the punch list work) shall be retained to assure the
completion of the punch list work.
The Contractor shall complete or correct the Work on the list of (Punch List) items appended hereto within
_
calendar days from the above date of issuance of this Certificate. The amount withheld pending completion of the list of
items noted and agreed to shall be: $________________. If the list of items is not completed within the time allotted the Owner
has the right to be compensated for the delays and/or complete the work with the help of independent contractor at the expense of
the retained project funds. If the retained project funds are insufficient to cover the delay/completion damages, the Owner shall be
promptly reimbursed for the balance of the funds needed to compensate the Owner.
by:
CONTRACTOR (include name of firm)
(Signature)
DATE
(Signature)
DATE
(Signature)
DATE
(Signature)
DATE
by:
A/E (include name of firm)
by:
USING INSTITUTION OR AGENCY
by:
DFCM (Owner)
4110 State Office Building, Salt Lake City, Utah 84114 cc:
telephone 801-538-3018 • facsimile 801-538-3267 • http://dfcm.utah.gov
DFCM FORM 1b 010213
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Parties Noted
DFCM, Director
21
p. 24
DFCM
Bid MW13039
STATE OF UTAH - DEPARTMENT OF ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES
Division of Facilities Construction and Management
DFCM
PAST PERFORMANCE RATING EVALUATION
Date
Evaluator
FVN#
Name of Contractor or A/E
City
Zip
Reference checked for
Address
Phone
Fax
Corporation
Partnership
LLC
Individual or Sole Proprietorship
Other _____________
Firm Contact Name
Project referenced (Name of Project, Agency, Location)
Project Completion Date (MM/YYYY)
Contract Amount $
Reference Contact (Name/Title)
Reference Contact Phone (000-000-0000)
What did the firm do for you? (e.g. design work, construction service, cost auditing, studies, commissioning, other.)
Rating Guideline
5-Exceptional
4-Very Good
3-Satisfactory
2-Marginal
1-Unsatisfactory
Rate The Following
QUALITY OF
PRODUCT OR
SERVICES
COST CONTROL
TIMELINESS OF
PERFORMANCE
BUSINESS RELATIONS
Contractor/AE has demonstrated an exceptional performance level in any of the above four categories that justifies adding a
point to the score. Contractor performance clearly exceeds the performance levels described as “Very Good”
Contractor/AE is in
compliance with contract
requirements and/or
delivers quality
product/service
Minor inefficiencies/errors
have been identified
Contractor/AE is
effective in managing
costs and submits
current, accurate, and
complete billings
Contractor/AE is usually
effective in managing
cost
Major problems have
been encountered
Contractor/AE is having
major difficulty managing
cost effectively
Contractor/AE is not in
compliance and is
jeopardizing achievement
of contract objectives
Contractor/AE is unable
to manage costs
effectively
Rating 1-5
(5 = Highest)
Contractor/AE is effective
in meeting milestones
and delivery schedule
Response to inquiries,
technical/service/
administrative issues is effective
Contractor/AE is usually
effective in meeting
milestones and delivery
schedules
Contractor/AE is having
major difficulty meeting
milestones and delivery
schedule
Contractor/AE delays are
jeopardizing performance
of contract objectives
Response to inquires
technical/service/administrative
issues is somewhat effective
Response to inquiries,
technical/service/administrative
issues is marginally effective
Response to inquiries,
technical/service/administrative
issues is not effective
Comments
Quality of Product or
Service
Cost Control
Timeliness of Performance
Business Relations
OVERALL
RATING
Signature of Rater:____________________________________________
4110 State Office Building, Salt Lake City, Utah 84114 · telephone 801-538-3018 · facsimile 801-538-3267 · www.dfcm.utah.gov
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
p. 25
DFCM
Bid MW13039
STATE OF UTAH - DEPARTMENT OF ADMINISTRATIVE SERVICES
Division of Facilities Construction and Management
DFCM
PROJECT SCHEDULE
BIDSYNC BID #MW13039
PROJECT NAME:
eLEARNING CENTER REMODEL – RAMPTON TECHNOLOGY BUILDING
SALT LAKE COMMUNITY COLLEGE – REDWOOD ROAD CAMPUS
TAYLORSVILLE, UTAH
DFCM PROJECT NO. 13037660
Event
Day
Date
Time
Place
Bidding Documents
Tuesday
April 16, 2013
10:00 AM
DFCM web site *
Available
Thursday
April 18, 2013
8:00 AM
Lobby
Mandatory Pre-bid Site
Rampton Technology Bldg
Meeting
SLCC Redwood Road Campus
Taylorsville, UT
Last Day to Submit
Wednesday
April 24,2013
3:00 PM
BidSync Web site**
Questions
Addendum Deadline
Thursday
April 25, 2013
3:00 PM
BidSync Web site**
(exception for bid delays)
Prime Contractors Turn In
Monday
April 29, 2013
2:00 PM
BidSync Web site**
Bid and Bid Bond
Sub-contractor List Due
Tuesday
April 30, 2013
2:00 PM
DFCM
4110 State Office Bldg
SLC, UT
E-Mail marlaworkman@utah.gov
Substantial Completion Date
Thursday
August 15, 2013
3:00 PM
NOTE:
*
**
DFCM FORM 1a 010213
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
DFCM’s web site address is http://dfcm.utah.gov.
BidSync web site address is www.bidsync.com.
5
p. 26
DFCM
1
2
Bid MW13039
3
4
5
13037660
D
D
FACILITIES ARCHITECTS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
SALT LAKE CITY, UT 84123
P 801.957.4899
F 801.957.3839
CONSULTANTS:
WHW Engineering Inc.
Professional Mechanical Engineers
8619 S Sandy Parkway Suite 101
Sandy UT 84070-6404
P 801.466.4021 | F 801.466.8536
E-mail: excellence@whw-engineering.com
4600 SOUTH REDWOOD ROAD
ENVISION Engineering (Electrical)
244 W 300 N Suite 100
Salt Lake City UT 84103-1147
P 801.534.1130 | F 801.534.1080
www.envisioneng.com
C
C
PROFESSIONAl SEAL:
CAMPUS:
TAYLORSVILLE
REDWOOD CAMPUS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
TAYLORSVILLE UT
84123
FC48
GATE
FC49
BUILDING & ROOM NUMBER:
FACILITIES
COMPLEX
GFSB
TECHNOLOGY BLDG ROOM 213
PROFESSIONAL
LAB
IPB
SKYWALK
PORTABLE
CLASSROOMS
PROJECT TITLE:
TENNIS COURTS
LOT-J
LOT-I
BR
UIN
8
BL
VD
.
11
2
3
5
6
SHEET LIST
LOT-N
Sheet
Number
1
7
BUSINESS
BUILDING
LIFETIME
ACTIVITIES
CENTER
LOT-R
GI001
GI002
AD101
AE101
AE201
AE501
AE601
MG001
MD101
ME101
ME102
ME501
ME502
ME601
EG001
ED101
EL101
EL800
EP101
EP501
EP701
EP801
EY101
LOT-P
TICKET BOOTH
LIBRARY
TECHNOLOGY
BUILDING
REDWOOD ROAD
LOT-Q
VISITOR LOT
SCIENCE &
INDUSTRY
CONCRETE
RAMP
ALDER
AMPHITHEATER
ADMIN.
BUILDING
ONE WAY
LOT-G
STUDENT
CENTER
LDS
INSTITUTE
A
FUTURE
IAB
LOT-D2
CONSTRUCTION
TRADES
LOT-E
LOT-C
LOT-A
LOT-B
LOT-D
NORTH
COMMUNITY BLVD.
CHILD
DEVELOPMENT
LAB
TAYLORSVILLE REDWOOD CAMPUS
1
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
APPLIED
TECHNOLOGY
CENTER
DESCRIPTION
PORTABLE
OFFICES
LOT-M
LOT-S
LOT-K
LOT-T
ATHLETIC
RESTROOMS
COLLEGE CENTER DRIVE
COURTS
MARK DATE
LOT-L
LOT-K
REVISIONS:
VOLLEYBALL
LOT-U
9
12
SOFTBALL FIELD
SOCCER
FIELD
e-LEARNING
B SERVICES REMODEL
LOT-V
10
LOT-H
B
LOT-H2
LOT-F
L:\Files\SLCC JOBS\100 RRC Redwood Road Campus\005 TB Rampton Technology Building\005.213 eLearning Remodel\005.213 eLearning Remodel.rvt
PHYSICAL PLANT
STORAGE
RAMPTON TECHNOLOGY BUILDING - SECOND FLOOR MAIN LEVEL AREA OF CONSTRUCTION
NORTH
2
3
4
Sheet Name
COVER SHEET, VICINITY MAP, INDEX
CODE ANALYSIS, NONSTRUCT COMP CHECKLIST, EGRESS
DEMOLITION PLAN
FLOOR AND CEILING PLANS
INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
DETAILS
SCHEDULES
MECHANICAL LEGEND AND GENERAL NOTES
MECHANICAL DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN
MECHANICAL DUCTWORK PLAN
MECHANICAL GRID PLAN
MECHANICAL DETAILS
MECHANICAL DETAILS
MECHANICAL SCHEDULES
SYMBOL SCHEDULE
DEMOLITION PLAN MAIN LEVEL
LIGHTING PLAN MAIN LEVEL
COMCHECK
POWER PLAN MAIN LEVEL
ELECTRICAL DETAILS
ONE LINE DIAGRAM
ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES
SYSTEMS PLAN MAIN
5
ISSUE DATE: 15 MARCH 2013
DOC. TYPE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
CURRENT REVISION DATE: 02/15/13
SLCC PROJECT NO: F13011
BLDG&RM#: TECHNOLOGY BLDG - ROOM 213
FILE: 005.213 eLEARNING REMODEL.rvt
DRAWN BY: PMW
CHECKED BY: JAM
A
COPYRIGHT: STATE OF UTAH
SHEET TITLE:
COVER SHEET,
VICINITY MAP, INDEX
SHEET NUMBER:
GI001
p. 27
DFCM
1
2
Bid MW13039
3
4
5
13037660
D
D
FACILITIES ARCHITECTS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
SALT LAKE CITY, UT 84123
P 801.957.4899
F 801.957.3839
CONSULTANTS:
WHW Engineering Inc.
Professional Mechanical Engineers
8619 S Sandy Parkway Suite 101
Sandy UT 84070-6404
P 801.466.4021 | F 801.466.8536
E-mail: excellence@whw-engineering.com
CODE ANALYSIS
NONSTRUCTURAL COMPONENT CHECKLIST
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
NOT
REQUIRED
ON CONST
DOCUMENTS
DEFERRED
SUBMITTAL
COMMENTS
APPLICABLE CODES
Architectural Components:
Interior Nonstructural
Walls & Partitions
International Building Code
International Mechanical Code
International Plumbing Code
International Fire Code
International Energy
Conservation Code
X
Cantilever Elements
(i.e. parapets, etc.)
C
ENVISION Engineering (Electrical)
244 W 300 N Suite 100
Salt Lake City UT 84103-1147
P 801.534.1130 | F 801.534.1080
www.envisioneng.com
Exterior Nonstructural
Wall Elements
Veneers
Year
2009
2009
2009
2009
National Electrical Code
Uniform Code for
Building Conservation
ADA Accessibility
Guildelines
Year
2011
2009
2009
2009
Cabinets (i.e. storage,
equipment, etc.)
B.
B
Occupancy and Group: ________ ________
________ ________ ________
X
X
Change in Use: Yes ______ No ______
Mixed Occupancy: Yes ______ No ______
N.A.
Special Use and Occupancy (e.g. High Rise, Covered Mall): __________________
N.A.
N.A. mph
Seismic Design Category: ______
Design Wind Speed: ______
Access Floors
C.
Type of Construction (circle one): Existing
D.
A
B
A
B
A
B
HT
A
B
Fire Resistance Rating Requirements for the Exterior Walls based on the fire
separation distance (in hours):
A.
Penthouses
Ceilings (i.e. suspended
grid or hard-lid)
X
C
PROFESSIONAl SEAL:
Storage Racks
Appendages &
Ornamentations
Signs & Billboards
Other:
E.
F:
Other:
MEP Components:
L:\Files\SLCC JOBS\100 RRC Redwood Road Campus\005 TB Rampton Technology Building\005.213 eLearning Remodel\005.213 eLearning Remodel.rvt
Fire Sprinklers
N/A
G:
H:
I:
J:
Mechanical Equipment
(i.e. HVAC, fans, air
handler, boilers, tanks,
furnaces, chillers, water
heaters, evaporators,
heat exchangers,
engines, turbines,
pumps, compressors,
MFR equipment, etc.)
B
Elevator & Escalator
Components
Communication Equip.,
Computers, Controls,
and Instrumentation
Roof Mounted Chimneys,
Stacks, Cooling and
Electrical Towers
1-HR FIRE
RATED
PARTITION
X
X
Ductwork (including InLine Components)
X
K.
Exterior Bearing Walls
Interior Bearing Walls
Exterior Non-Bearing Walls
Structural Frame
Partitions - Permanent
Fire Barriers
X
L.
NOTES:
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Deferred submittals for seismic restraint of nonstructural components must be submitted to the DFCM Building
Official a minimum of two weeks prior to the planned installation in order to allow for plan review and forwarding to
inspectors. In the event that the submittal is deficient, additional time may become necessary.
If seismic restraints of non-structural components are installed prior to receiving DFCM approval they shall not be
covered or concealed until receiving both plan review and inspection approval. Further, installers are proceeding
at their own risk until plan review and inspection approval occurs.
3.
The requirements for seismic restraint of nonstructural components cannot be satisfied by a general reference to
Design Manuals. The design professional may utilize these manuals as a basis of their design, but must provide
all supporting documentation to ensure that the design conforms to the requirements of ASCE 7-05, Chapter 13.
4.
Submittals must include details of the proposed seismic restraint of nonstructural components. These details must
show specific information relating to the materials, type, size, and locations of anchorages; materials used for
bracing; attachment requirements of bracing to structure and component; and locations of transverse and
longitudinal sway bracing and rod stiffeners. Submittals may also require structural calculations, engineering
reports, test data, and/or specifications to ensure code compliance.
NORTH
2
3
Hours Assembly
Listing
NA
NA
NA
NA
0
NA
4
M.
PROJECT TITLE:
e-LEARNING
SERVICES REMODEL
REVISIONS:
Element
Hours
Floors - Ceiling Floors
Roofs - Ceiling Roofs
Exterior Doors and Windows
Shaft Enclosures
Fire Walls
Fire Partitions
Smoke Partitions
1
NA
NA
NA
NA
1
NA
MARK DATE
J942*
ISSUE DATE:15 MARCH 2013
DOC. TYPE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
CURRENT REVISION DATE: 03/18/13
U419
* Existing
Design Occupant Load: ______
5130SF/100SF per person = 51.3 persons; 51.3 x 0.3" = 15.39"
Exit Width Required: ______
Exit Width Provided: ______
108"
15.4"
Minimum Number of Required Plumbing Facilities:
0
0
0
0
a) Water Closets - Required (m) ______
(f) ______
Provided (m) ______
(f) _____
b) Lavatories - Required (m) ______
(f) ______
Provided (m) ______
0
0
0 (f) ______
0
c) Bath Tubs or Showers: ______
0
d) Drinking Fountains: ______
Service Sinks: ______
0
0
FOOTNOTES:
1) In case of conflict with the U.S. Department of Justice Federal Registers Parts - ADA Guidelines and specific reference to the International Building Code Accessibility
Chapters, the more restrictive requirement shall govern.
2) Additional Code Information shall be provided at the discretion of the Building Official for
Complex Buildings. Including, but not limited to:
a) High Rise Requirements.
e) Fire Assembly Locator Sheet.
f) Exterior and Interior Accessibility Route.
b) Atriums.
c) Performance Based Criteria. g) Fire Stopping, Including Tested Design Number.
d) Means or Egress Analysis.
5
DESCRIPTION
Assembly
Listing
SLCC PROJECT NO: F13011
X
Other:
1
B
Two Story: A a(2)______
3) Three Story: A a(3)______
X
d) Unlimited Area Building: Yes ______ No ______
Code Section: ______
Fire Resistance Rating Requirements for Building Elements (hours).
Element
Conveyors
EGRESS PLAN
1
1" = 20'-0"
Sum of the Ratio Calculations for Mixed Occupancies:
Actual Area
2)
Piping and Conduit
Systems
A
TECHNOLOGY BLDG ROOM 213
W
0.25
30
_ 1
<
X
X
2.
F
I f = 100
P
BUILDING & ROOM NUMBER:
Allowable Area
c) Total Allowable Area for:
1) One Story: ______
Vibration Isolated
Components
1.
At I f
At Is
A a= A t +
+
100
100
X
X
Fire Alarm
Existing
Actual Area per Floor (square feet): __________________________
Tabular Area: Remodel area = 5,130 SF, Second level (main) area = 28,754 SF
Area Modifications:
b)
Lighting Fixtures
Cable Trays
TAYLORSVILLE
REDWOOD CAMPUS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
TAYLORSVILLE UT
84123
N.A.
N.A. East: ______
N.A. West: ______
N.A.
North: ______
South: ______
N.A.
N.A.
Mixed Occupancies: ______
Nonseparated Uses: ______
Sprinklers: Existing automatic sprinkler system at basement level only
Existing at bsmt
Required: ______ Provided: ______ Type of Sprinkler System: ____________
level only
levels Building Height: ______
64'-0"
Number of Stories: 5
______
a)
Electrical Equipment (i.e.
generators, batteries,
inverters, transformers,
switch gear, cabinets,
MCC, panel boards, etc.)
CAMPUS:
BLDG&RM#: TECHNOLOGY BLDG - ROOM 213
FILE: 005.213 eLEARNING REMODEL.rvt
DRAWN BY: PMW
A
CHECKED BY: JAM
COPYRIGHT: STATE OF UTAH
SHEET TITLE:
CODE ANALYSIS,
NONSTRUCT COMP
CHECKLIST, EGRESS
SHEET NUMBER:
GI002
p. 28
DFCM
1
2
Bid MW13039
3
4
5
GENERAL NOTES:
SHEET KEYNOTES:
01 REMOVE EXISTING WD DOOR AND HM FRAME AND HRDW & RETAIN FOR REUSE.
1.
CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO PROVIDE DUST BARRIERS TO PREVENT DUST
FROM SPREADING TO THE BALANCE OF THE ROOM AND INTO OTHER AREAS.
2.
PROTECT EXISTING STRUCTURE, INCLUDING WALLS, WINDOWS, CARPET, ETC.
FROM DAMAGE DUE TO CONSTRUCTION.
3.
CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE TO REPAIR ANY DAMAGE TO BUILDING AS
A RESULT OF CONTRACTED WORK. REPAIRS MUST BE MADE PRIOR TO
COMPLETION OF THE JOB AND RECEIVING PAYMENT.
4.
ALL DEBRIS FROM DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION IS TO BE REMOVED FROM
THE JOB SITE AND DISPOSED OF BY THE CONTRACTOR. THE JOB SITE IS TO BE
LEFT IN A CLEAN AND ORDERLY CONDITION UPON THE COMPLETION OF THE
WORK.
5.
ALL WORK IS TO BE DONE IN A PROFESSIONAL, CRAFTSMANSHIPLIKE MANNER.
OWNER HAS THE RIGHT TO REJECT ANY AND ALL WORK THAT DOES NOT MEET
COLLEGE STANDARDS.
6.
CONTRACTOR IS TO BE RESPONSIBLE FOR MEETING ALL THE REQUIREMENTS
OF ALL APPLICABLE BUILDING AND SAFETY CODES FOR THIS PROJECT. FIELD
VERIFICATION OF THE JOB IS THE REPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR.
7.
NOTIFY OWNER IMMEDIATELY OF ANY CONFLICT WITH ELECTRICAL OR
COMMUNICATIONS WIRING.
8.
ALL PENETRATION THROUGH FIRE WALLS IS TO BE SEALED ACCORDING TO
CODE.
02 REMOVE EXISTING WD DOOR & HDW AND RETURN TO OWNER IN GOOD COND.
03 EXISTING CABINETRY TO REMAIN.
04 EXISTING UPPER CABINETS TO BE REMOVED AND RETAINED FOR REUSE.
05 REMOVE EXISTING STOREFRONT & DOORS.
06 REMOVE EXISTING GYPSUM BD WALLS.
07 EXISTING FLOOR VENTS TO REMAIN.
D
08 EXISTING FLOOR VENT TO BE MOVED TO ACCOMMODATE NEW WALL. (SEE FLOOR
PLAN)
09 CAREFULLY REMOVE EXISTING (6) FIRE-RATED WINDOWS AND RETURN TO OWNER IN
GOOD CONDITION.
10 EXISTING WALLS TO REMAIN.
13037660
D
FACILITIES ARCHITECTS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
SALT LAKE CITY, UT 84123
11 REMOVE EXISTING WALL SYSTEM.
12 REMOVE EXISTING DOOR, SIDE LITE, AND FRAME. PREP FOR INFILL. RETURN DOOR
TO OWNER IN GOOD CONDITION.
13 REMOVE ALL EXISTING CEILING GRID AND ACOUSTICAL TILE IN ALL AREAS OF
WORK.
9.
14 REMOVE ALL EXISTING GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS IN ALL AREAS OF WORK.
P 801.957.4899
F 801.957.3839
CONSULTANTS:
WHW Engineering Inc.
Professional Mechanical Engineers
8619 S Sandy Parkway Suite 101
Sandy UT 84070-6404
P 801.466.4021 | F 801.466.8536
E-mail: excellence@whw-engineering.com
PAINTING: PAINT ALL NEW GYP. BOARD (1) ONE BASECOAT, (2) TWO TOP COATS.
COLOR OF PAINT IS SLCC'S STANDARD REVUE - P&L PROHIDE SATIN AND PAINT
METAL FRAMING TO MATCH EXISTING DOOR FRAME.
15 REMOVE ALL EXISTING CEILING DIFFUSERS IN AREA OF WORK.
10. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE ANY CONDUITS, FLEX CONDUITS AND WIRING THAT
WILL NOT BE USED IN NEW REMODEL.
16 REMOVE ALL EXISTING CEILING RETURN GRILLES IN AREA OF WORK.
ENVISION Engineering (Electrical)
244 W 300 N Suite 100
Salt Lake City UT 84103-1147
P 801.534.1130 | F 801.534.1080
www.envisioneng.com
11. NEW FIXTURES ARE TO BE SEISMICALLY WIRED ON 2 OPPOSITE CORNERS &
SECURED TO THE CEILING GRID WITH FIXTURE CLIPS. (2 PER SIDE)
17 REMOVE ALL EXISTING PENDANT LIGHT FIXTURES IN AREA OF WORK.
18 REMOVE ALL EXISTING CEILING ACCESS DOORS IN AREA OF WORK.
12. CEILING GRID MUST HAVE 2" EDGE ANGLE, BERC-2 CLIPS, OR ENTIRE ROOM
MUST HAVE STRUTS AND SPLAY WIRES AT 12' ON CENTER. PERIMETER WIRES
MUST BE INSTALLED ON EVERY T-GRID. INSTALL PER ICC-ES-REPORT.
19 REMOVE ALL EXISTING RECESSED CAN LIGHT FIXTURES.
20 REMOVE ALL EXISTING RECESSED FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXT.
13. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION "APPENDIX" FOR ICC-ES REPORT ESR-1289 FOR
GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS AND ICC-ES REPORT ESR-3336 FOR SUSPENDED
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS.
21 REMOVE ALL EXISTING EXIT SIGNS.
22 REMOVE EXISTING EMERGENCY LIGHTS @ COLUMN.
23 REMOVE ALL EXISTING ACOUSTICAL SOUND PANELS. REPAIR AND CLEAN ALL BRICK.
24 REMOVE EXISTING CABINETRY, BASE, UPPER, AND COUNTERTOP.
C
C
25 EXISTING CARPET TILES TO REMAIN. PROTECT FROM DAMAGE. REPLACE CARPET
TILES IN AREAS WHERE WALLS HAVE BEEN REMOVED OR WHERE TILES ARE
STAINED OR DAMAGED.
PROFESSIONAl SEAL:
26 REMOVE ALL EXIST CHAIR RAIL AND REPAIR EXIST GYP BD AND BRICK WALLS.
K
L
N
M
P
K
L
N
M
P
CAMPUS:
4
4
TAYLORSVILLE
REDWOOD CAMPUS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
TAYLORSVILLE UT
84123
16
12
02
02
26
26
01
25
11
14
25
24
14
02
19
BUILDING & ROOM NUMBER:
13
18
11
TECHNOLOGY BLDG ROOM 213
L:\Files\SLCC JOBS\100 RRC Redwood Road Campus\005 TB Rampton Technology Building\005.213 eLearning Remodel\005.213 eLearning Remodel.rvt
213.2
21
25
B
25
B
e-LEARNING
SERVICES REMODEL
10
11
5
02
PROJECT TITLE:
5
02
REVISIONS:
04
03
02
MARK DATE
20
DESCRIPTION
10
09
11
14
6
05
6
ISSUE DATE:15 MARCH 2013
23
22
DOC. TYPE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
06
CURRENT REVISION DATE: 02/15/13
17
25
SLCC PROJECT NO: F13011
21
07
02
BLDG&RM#: TECHNOLOGY BLDG - ROOM 213
7
7
FILE: 005.213 eLEARNING REMODEL.rvt
13
15
DRAWN BY: PMW
02
26
07
06
25
A
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
A
07
07
08
CHECKED BY: JAM
COPYRIGHT: STATE OF UTAH
16
SHEET TITLE:
07
DEMOLITION PLAN
8
8
SHEET NUMBER:
1
DEMOLITION PLAN
1/8" = 1'-0"
1
2
NORTH
2
3
DEMOLITION CEILING PLAN
1/8" = 1'-0"
NORTH
4
5
AD101
p. 29
DFCM
1
2
Bid MW13039
3
4
5
GENERAL NOTES:
SHEET KEYNOTES:
01 EXISTING FLOOR VENTS TO REMAIN.
02 RELOCATE EXIST FLOOR VENT TO ALLOW FOR NEW WALL.
1.
CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO PROVIDE DUST BARRIERS TO PREVENT DUST
FROM SPREADING TO THE BALANCE OF THE ROOM AND INTO OTHER AREAS.
2.
PROTECT EXISTING STRUCTURE, INCLUDING WALLS, WINDOWS, CARPET, ETC.
FROM DAMAGE DUE TO CONSTRUCTION.
3.
CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE TO REPAIR ANY DAMAGE TO BUILDING AS
A RESULT OF CONTRACTED WORK. REPAIRS MUST BE MADE PRIOR TO
COMPLETION OF THE JOB AND RECEIVING PAYMENT.
4.
ALL DEBRIS FROM DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION IS TO BE REMOVED FROM
THE JOB SITE AND DISPOSED OF BY THE CONTRACTOR. THE JOB SITE IS TO BE
LEFT IN A CLEAN AND ORDERLY CONDITION UPON THE COMPLETION OF THE
WORK.
5.
ALL WORK IS TO BE DONE IN A PROFESSIONAL, CRAFTSMANSHIPLIKE MANNER.
OWNER HAS THE RIGHT TO REJECT ANY AND ALL WORK THAT DOES NOT MEET
COLLEGE STANDARDS.
6.
CONTRACTOR IS TO BE RESPONSIBLE FOR MEETING ALL THE REQUIREMENTS
OF ALL APPLICABLE BUILDING AND SAFETY CODES FOR THIS PROJECT. FIELD
VERIFICATION OF THE JOB IS THE REPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR.
7.
NOTIFY OWNER IMMEDIATELY OF ANY CONFLICT WITH ELECTRICAL OR
COMMUNICATIONS WIRING.
8.
ALL PENETRATION THROUGH FIRE WALLS IS TO BE SEALED ACCORDING TO
CODE.
03 EXISTING WALLS TO REMAIN.
04 EXIST FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET TO REMAIN.
05 STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARD (TYPICAL ALL GYP. BD. CORNERS)
06 3-5/8" MTL STUD 16" O.C. W/ 5/8" TYPE "X" GYPSUM BOARD EACH SIDE.
(TYP. NEW, U.N.O.)
07 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT PARTITION (TYPICAL)
D
08 2' x 4' RECESSED DIRECT-INDIRECT LIGHT (TYP.) RE: ELECT
09 2' x 2' AIR SUPPLY GRILLE (TYP.) RE: MECH
10 2' x 2' RETURN AIR GRILLE (TYP.) RE: MECH
11 FIRE PROTECTION SMOKE DETECTOR RE: ELECT
12 6' W x 4' H WHITE MARKER BOARD W/ TRAY
13 8' W x 4' H WHITE MARKER BOARD W/ TRAY
14 4' W x 4' H WHITE MARKER BOARD W/ TRAY (TYP EA OFFICE U.N.O.)
9.
15 OCCUPANCY SENSOR RE: ELECT
16 EXIT SIGN RE: ELECT
13037660
D
FACILITIES ARCHITECTS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
SALT LAKE CITY, UT 84123
P 801.957.4899
F 801.957.3839
CONSULTANTS:
WHW Engineering Inc.
Professional Mechanical Engineers
8619 S Sandy Parkway Suite 101
Sandy UT 84070-6404
P 801.466.4021 | F 801.466.8536
E-mail: excellence@whw-engineering.com
PAINTING: PAINT ALL NEW GYP. BOARD (1) ONE BASECOAT, (2) TWO TOP COATS.
COLOR OF PAINT IS SLCC'S STANDARD REVUE - P&L PROHIDE SATIN AND PAINT
METAL FRAMING TO MATCH EXISTING DOOR FRAME.
10. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE ANY CONDUITS, FLEX CONDUITS AND WIRING THAT
WILL NOT BE USED IN NEW REMODEL.
17 RECESSED CAN LIGHT RE: ELECT
ENVISION Engineering (Electrical)
244 W 300 N Suite 100
Salt Lake City UT 84103-1147
P 801.534.1130 | F 801.534.1080
www.envisioneng.com
11. NEW FIXTURES ARE TO BE SEISMICALLY WIRED ON 2 OPPOSITE CORNERS &
SECURED TO THE CEILING GRID WITH FIXTURE CLIPS. (2 PER SIDE)
12. CEILING GRID MUST HAVE 2" EDGE ANGLE, BERC-2 CLIPS, OR ENTIRE ROOM
MUST HAVE STRUTS AND SPLAY WIRES AT 12' ON CENTER. PERIMETER WIRES
MUST BE INSTALLED ON EVERY T-GRID. INSTALL PER ICC-ES-REPORT.
13. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION "APPENDIX" FOR ICC-ES REPORT ESR-1289 FOR
GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS AND ICC-ES REPORT ESR-3336 FOR SUSPENDED
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS.
C
C
K
L
N
M
EXIST MAS OPENING
B2
AE501
B3
AE501
4' - 8"
K
P
OFFICE
213H
90 SF
213H
5' - 7"
4' - 6"
213.2
1' - 6"
9' - 5 1/2"
9' - 7 1/2"
OFFICE
213K
2" 84 SF
OFFICE
213L
86 SF
9' - 6"
11"
4' - 6"
213D
CG
5' - 3"
5' - 0"
213K
CG
4' - 8"
B
5' - 0"
4' - 6"
213N
4"
CG
AE201
OFFICE
213P
175 SF
03
OFFICE
213B
111 SF
FEC
06
CG
213B
AE501
07
01
OFFICE
213R
125 SF
NOTE: EXISTING WALLS TO
REMAIN SHOWN SHADED
01
A3
SIM
5
A2
16
CG
AE201
B4
11' - 3 1/2"
B4
SIM
20' - 0"
213V
15
5
AE501
213U
CONSULTING
213V
190 SF
B4
AE501
REVISIONS:
MARK DATE
SIM
11
ISSUE DATE:15 MARCH 2013
15
DOC. TYPE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
SIM
AE501
AE201
A1
7
CONSULTING
213T
190 SF
CURRENT REVISION DATE: 02/15/13
SIM
7
AE501
SLCC PROJECT NO: F13011
BLDG&RM#: TECHNOLOGY BLDG - ROOM 213
C1
FILE: 005.213 eLEARNING REMODEL.rvt
14' - 6 1/2"
DRAWN BY: PMW
13
01
01
02
01
01
A
A
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
DESCRIPTION
AE501
16
213T
PROJECT TITLE:
e-LEARNING
SERVICES REMODEL
SIM
A2
18' - 9"
CONSULTING
213U
188 SF
B
6
SIM
B4
AE501
SIM
AE501
CG
AE501
CONFERENCE ROOM
213W
313 SF
B2
OFFICE
213Q-A
204 SF
12
213W
LIMIT OF CONTRACT WORK
TECHNOLOGY BLDG ROOM 213
6
213Q-A
5' - 10"
AE201
AE601
CONSULTATION
213
467 SF
B4
AE201
2' - 10 1/2"
B1
A4
A5
10
09
A2
213R
C1
213.1
OFFICE
213Q
174 SF
04
9' - 9"
213Q
12
RECEPTION
213
360 SF
BUILDING & ROOM NUMBER:
08
213P
2-
213.0
11
15
TYP
CG
CG
213A
SIM
AE501
11' - 4 1/2"
AE201
AE601
A1
AE501
C2
A1
-
16
OFFICE
213N
95 SF
14' - 7"
WORKROOM
213A
A2
231 SF
TAYLORSVILLE
REDWOOD CAMPUS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
TAYLORSVILLE UT
84123
213M
4' - 6"
CUBICAL AREA
213
537 SF
C2
OFFICE
213C
120 SF
14
213L
4' - 6"
1' - 0"
05
213C
CAMPUS:
17
3' - 4"
COLLABORATION
213
265 SF
2"
4' - 6"
OFFICE
213M
139 SF
LIMIT OF CONTRACT WORK
4' - 6"
5' - 5"
9' - 4"
OFFICE
213G
90 SF
213E
OFFICE B3
213D
124 SF AE201
P
4
10' - 6"
13' - 7"
10' - 1"
13' - 11"
LIMIT OF CONTRACT WORK
L:\Files\SLCC JOBS\100 RRC Redwood Road Campus\005 TB Rampton Technology Building\005.213 eLearning Remodel\005.213 eLearning Remodel.rvt
10' - 1"
4"
OFFICE
213E
84 SF
N
4
213G
213F
M
B1
AE501
LIMIT OF CONTRACT WORK
OFFICE
213F
126 SF
L
PROFESSIONAl SEAL:
CHECKED BY: JAM
COPYRIGHT: STATE OF UTAH
LIMIT OF CONTRACT WORK
SHEET TITLE:
8
1
MAIN LEVEL FLOOR PLAN
1/8" = 1'-0"
8
2
NORTH
FLOOR AND CEILING
PLANS
CEILING PLAN
1/8" = 1'-0"
NORTH
SHEET NUMBER:
1
2
3
4
5
AE101
p. 30
DFCM
1
2
Bid MW13039
3
4
5
GENERAL NOTES:
D
1.
CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO PROVIDE DUST BARRIERS TO PREVENT DUST
FROM SPREADING TO THE BALANCE OF THE ROOM AND INTO OTHER AREAS.
2.
PROTECT EXISTING STRUCTURE, INCLUDING WALLS, WINDOWS, CARPET, ETC.
FROM DAMAGE DUE TO CONSTRUCTION.
3.
CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE TO REPAIR ANY DAMAGE TO BUILDING AS
A RESULT OF CONTRACTED WORK. REPAIRS MUST BE MADE PRIOR TO
COMPLETION OF THE JOB AND RECEIVING PAYMENT.
4.
ALL DEBRIS FROM DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION IS TO BE REMOVED FROM
THE JOB SITE AND DISPOSED OF BY THE CONTRACTOR. THE JOB SITE IS TO BE
LEFT IN A CLEAN AND ORDERLY CONDITION UPON THE COMPLETION OF THE
WORK.
5.
ALL WORK IS TO BE DONE IN A PROFESSIONAL, CRAFTSMANSHIPLIKE MANNER.
OWNER HAS THE RIGHT TO REJECT ANY AND ALL WORK THAT DOES NOT MEET
COLLEGE STANDARDS.
6.
CONTRACTOR IS TO BE RESPONSIBLE FOR MEETING ALL THE REQUIREMENTS
OF ALL APPLICABLE BUILDING AND SAFETY CODES FOR THIS PROJECT. FIELD
VERIFICATION OF THE JOB IS THE REPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR.
7.
NOTIFY OWNER IMMEDIATELY OF ANY CONFLICT WITH ELECTRICAL OR
COMMUNICATIONS WIRING.
8.
ALL PENETRATION THROUGH FIRE WALLS IS TO BE SEALED ACCORDING TO
CODE.
9.
13037660
D
FACILITIES ARCHITECTS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
SALT LAKE CITY, UT 84123
P 801.957.4899
F 801.957.3839
CONSULTANTS:
WHW Engineering Inc.
Professional Mechanical Engineers
8619 S Sandy Parkway Suite 101
Sandy UT 84070-6404
P 801.466.4021 | F 801.466.8536
E-mail: excellence@whw-engineering.com
PAINTING: PAINT ALL NEW GYP. BOARD (1) ONE BASECOAT, (2) TWO TOP COATS.
COLOR OF PAINT IS SLCC'S STANDARD REVUE - P&L PROHIDE SATIN AND PAINT
METAL FRAMING TO MATCH EXISTING DOOR FRAME.
10. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE ANY CONDUITS, FLEX CONDUITS AND WIRING THAT
WILL NOT BE USED IN NEW REMODEL.
ENVISION Engineering (Electrical)
244 W 300 N Suite 100
Salt Lake City UT 84103-1147
P 801.534.1130 | F 801.534.1080
www.envisioneng.com
11. NEW FIXTURES ARE TO BE SEISMICALLY WIRED ON 2 OPPOSITE CORNERS &
SECURED TO THE CEILING GRID WITH FIXTURE CLIPS. (2 PER SIDE)
INTERACTIVE WHITE
MARKER BOARD W/
WIRELESS PROJECTOR
(TYPICAL 3) N.I.C.
GYPSUM BOARD
OVER METAL
STUD BULKHEAD
2' - 9"
C1
13. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION "APPENDIX" FOR ICC-ES REPORT ESR-1289 FOR
GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS AND ICC-ES REPORT ESR-3336 FOR SUSPENDED
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS.
5' - 0"
9' - 9"
9' - 11"
6' - 8" MINIMUM A.F.F.
ACT SYSTEM TO
WALL
7' - 2"
9' - 11"
C
12. CEILING GRID MUST HAVE 2" EDGE ANGLE, BERC-2 CLIPS, OR ENTIRE ROOM
MUST HAVE STRUTS AND SPLAY WIRES AT 12' ON CENTER. PERIMETER WIRES
MUST BE INSTALLED ON EVERY T-GRID. INSTALL PER ICC-ES-REPORT.
C
2" x 4'-0" SS
CORNER GUARD
FINISH FLOOR
NORTH INTERIOR ELEVATION BULKHEAD @ NORTH EXIT OPENING
C2
1/4" = 1'-0"
INTERACTIVE WHITE BOARD (TYP 3)
1/4" = 1'-0"
CAMPUS:
TAYLORSVILLE
REDWOOD CAMPUS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
TAYLORSVILLE UT
84123
13' - 0"
ATC
SYSTEM
SIM
2"
AE501
B2
6' - 11"
9' - 11"
FINISH FLOOR
WEST INTERIOR ELEVATION - LOBBY
STOREFRONT
B1
1/4" = 1'-0"
INTERIOR ELEVATION - WHITE MARKER
BOARD (TYPICAL U.N.O.)
B3
1/4" = 1'-0"
DIGITAL DISPLAY MONITOR
1/4" = 1'-0"
SHEET MTL BACKING
ON STUDS
B
PROJECT TITLE:
e-LEARNING
SERVICES REMODEL
WALL MOUNTED LCD
MONITOR CONNECTED TO
OCCUPANT'S COMPUTER
(NEEDS ELEC & DATA
CONNECT.) N.I.C.
3' - 0"
C4
TECHNOLOGY BLDG ROOM 213
1' - 4"
3' - 2"
AE501
2" - 4' S.S.
CORNER
GUARD (TYP)
4' - 0"
SIM
4' - 0"
7' - 2"
ALUMINUM
STOREFRONT
FIRE RATED
ASSEMBLY
4' W x 4' H WHITE
MARKER BOARD
W/ MARKER TRAY
(TYPICAL EACH
OFFICE U.N.O.)
4' - 0"
LCD VIDEO
MONITOR(S)
CONFIGURED
BY OWNER
2"
C4
2' - 9"
SHEET MTL
BACKING ON
STUDS
TEMPERED
GLASS
PANELS AND
DOORS (TYP)
AE501
BUILDING & ROOM NUMBER:
9' - 11"
2' - 7"
GYPSUM
BOARD
SOFFIT
3' - 11" 2"
C1
6' - 10"
7' - 2"
B
9' - 11"
REVISIONS:
MARK DATE
DESCRIPTION
SOUTH INTERIOR ELEVATION - LCD
MONITOR - ROOM 213Q-A
B4
1/4" = 1'-0"
ISSUE DATE:15 MARCH 2013
DOC. TYPE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
CURRENT REVISION DATE: 02/15/13
SLCC PROJECT NO: F13011
14' - 6 1/2"
2"
2"
EQ
14' - 7"
2"
EQ
EQ
2" 2" 2"
3' - 0"
2"
2"
3' - 0"
2"
18' - 9 1/2"
2"
EQ
2"
EQ
2"
EQ
2"
2"
3' - 0"
2"
EQ
2"
EQ
2"
EQ
2"
EQ
BLDG&RM#: TECHNOLOGY BLDG - ROOM 213
2"
AE501
C4
3' - 0"
2" x 4'-0" S.S.
CORNER GUARD
6' - 10"
SIM
ALUMINUM
STOREFRONT
DRAWN BY: PMW
AE501
2' - 0"
AE501
SIM
2' - 0"
FINISH FLOOR
B4
2"
EXISTING BOOK
SHELF TO BE
RELOCATED AND
ANCHORED TO
EAST WALL OF
WORKROOM
C3
2"
ACT SYSTEM
9' - 11"
A
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
RELOCATE EXIST
UPPER CABINETS
FROM EAST WALL
2' - 6"
4' - 6"
EXIST CAB
TO REMAIN.
2"
2' - 7"
FILE: 005.213 eLEARNING REMODEL.rvt
4' - 6"
L:\Files\SLCC JOBS\100 RRC Redwood Road Campus\005 TB Rampton Technology Building\005.213 eLearning Remodel\005.213 eLearning Remodel.rvt
2"
6' - 7"
2"
2"
2" 3' - 0" 2"
2' - 2 1/2"
3' - 1"
PROFESSIONAl SEAL:
A
TEMPERED
GLASS PANELS
& DOORS (TYP.
ALL)
COPYRIGHT: STATE OF UTAH
SHEET TITLE:
3' AREA OF
FRITTED SCREEN
(TYP. ALL LOWER
PANELS & DOORS)
PATTERN TBD BY
ARCHITECT
INTERIOR
ELEVATIONS
3' - 0"
A1
CHECKED BY: JAM
SHEET NUMBER:
NORTH INTERIOR ELEV - WORKROOM
1/4" = 1'-0"
1
A2
EAST INTERIOR ELEV - WORKROOM
1/4" = 1'-0"
2
SOUTH INTERIOR ELEVATION STOREFRONT PARTITION
A3
1/4" = 1'-0"
3
4
5
AE201
p. 31
DFCM
1
2
Bid MW13039
3
4
5
GENERAL NOTES:
D
1.
CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO PROVIDE DUST BARRIERS TO PREVENT DUST
FROM SPREADING TO THE BALANCE OF THE ROOM AND INTO OTHER AREAS.
2.
PROTECT EXISTING STRUCTURE, INCLUDING WALLS, WINDOWS, CARPET, ETC.
FROM DAMAGE DUE TO CONSTRUCTION.
3.
CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE TO REPAIR ANY DAMAGE TO BUILDING AS
A RESULT OF CONTRACTED WORK. REPAIRS MUST BE MADE PRIOR TO
COMPLETION OF THE JOB AND RECEIVING PAYMENT.
4.
ALL DEBRIS FROM DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION IS TO BE REMOVED FROM
THE JOB SITE AND DISPOSED OF BY THE CONTRACTOR. THE JOB SITE IS TO BE
LEFT IN A CLEAN AND ORDERLY CONDITION UPON THE COMPLETION OF THE
WORK.
5.
ALL WORK IS TO BE DONE IN A PROFESSIONAL, CRAFTSMANSHIPLIKE MANNER.
OWNER HAS THE RIGHT TO REJECT ANY AND ALL WORK THAT DOES NOT MEET
COLLEGE STANDARDS.
6.
CONTRACTOR IS TO BE RESPONSIBLE FOR MEETING ALL THE REQUIREMENTS
OF ALL APPLICABLE BUILDING AND SAFETY CODES FOR THIS PROJECT. FIELD
VERIFICATION OF THE JOB IS THE REPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR.
7.
NOTIFY OWNER IMMEDIATELY OF ANY CONFLICT WITH ELECTRICAL OR
COMMUNICATIONS WIRING.
8.
9.
13037660
D
FACILITIES ARCHITECTS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
SALT LAKE CITY, UT 84123
P 801.957.4899
F 801.957.3839
CONSULTANTS:
ALL PENETRATION THROUGH FIRE WALLS IS TO BE SEALED ACCORDING TO
CODE.
WHW Engineering Inc.
Professional Mechanical Engineers
8619 S Sandy Parkway Suite 101
Sandy UT 84070-6404
P 801.466.4021 | F 801.466.8536
E-mail: excellence@whw-engineering.com
PAINTING: PAINT ALL NEW GYP. BOARD (1) ONE BASECOAT, (2) TWO TOP COATS.
COLOR OF PAINT IS SLCC'S STANDARD REVUE - P&L PROHIDE SATIN AND PAINT
METAL FRAMING TO MATCH EXISTING DOOR FRAME.
10. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE ANY CONDUITS, FLEX CONDUITS AND WIRING THAT
WILL NOT BE USED IN NEW REMODEL.
ENVISION Engineering (Electrical)
244 W 300 N Suite 100
Salt Lake City UT 84103-1147
P 801.534.1130 | F 801.534.1080
www.envisioneng.com
11. NEW FIXTURES ARE TO BE SEISMICALLY WIRED ON 2 OPPOSITE CORNERS &
SECURED TO THE CEILING GRID WITH FIXTURE CLIPS. (2 PER SIDE)
12. CEILING GRID MUST HAVE 2" EDGE ANGLE, BERC-2 CLIPS, OR ENTIRE ROOM
MUST HAVE STRUTS AND SPLAY WIRES AT 12' ON CENTER. PERIMETER WIRES
MUST BE INSTALLED ON EVERY T-GRID. INSTALL PER ICC-ES-REPORT.
13. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION "APPENDIX" FOR ICC-ES REPORT ESR-1289 FOR
GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS AND ICC-ES REPORT ESR-3336 FOR SUSPENDED
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS.
C
C
PROFESSIONAl SEAL:
SEISMIC DETAIL NOTES:
WALL SEC LOBBY STOREFRONT
C1
1 1/2" = 1'-0"
WALL SECT TYPICAL GYPSUM BD
PARTITION
C2
1 1/2" = 1'-0"
STOREFRONT JAMB DTL @ GYPSUM BD
WALL
C3
3" = 1'-0"
JAMB DTL @ 1-HR STOREFRONT
C4
3" = 1'-0"
1.
CONDUIT COMPRESSION BRACE, FULL TY.,TYP.
2.
BRACING WIRES TO BE ATTACHED A MAXIMUM OF 45° TO THE PLANE OF THE CEILING
AND PARALLEL TO THE COMPONENTS AT THE BRACING POINT.
3.
BRACE WIRES TO BE TAUT AND TIED BOTH ENDS WITH THREE TIGHT WRAPS.
4.
THE UNATTACHED PERIMETER SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM OF 1/2" CLEARANCE AT ENDS
OF COMPONENTS.
5.
CONTINUOUS SPACER BAR TO BE LOCKED TO COMPONENTS ON UNATTACHED WALL.
6.
COMPONENT TERMINAL ENDS MUST BE SUPPORTED BY A 12 GA. HANGER WIRE ON
ALL WALLS. INSTALL PER ICC-ES-REPORT.
CAMPUS:
TAYLORSVILLE
REDWOOD CAMPUS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
TAYLORSVILLE, UT
84123
L:\Files\SLCC JOBS\100 RRC Redwood Road Campus\005 TB Rampton Technology Building\005.213 eLearning Remodel\005.213 eLearning Remodel.rvt
BUILDING & ROOM NUMBER:
TECHNOLOGY BLDG ROOM 213
B
B
PROJECT TITLE:
e-LEARNING
SERVICES REMODEL
REVISIONS:
MARK DATE
B1
JAMB DTL @ EXIST CORRIDOR WINDOW
3" = 1'-0"
JAMB DTL @ EXIST CORRIDOR DOOR
INFILL
B2
3" = 1'-0"
JAMB DTL @ EXIST CORRIDOR WD
CASED OPENING
B3
3" = 1'-0"
DESCRIPTION
ISSUE DATE:15 MARCH 2013
WALL SECT TYPICAL STOREFRONT
PARTITION
B4
1 1/2" = 1'-0"
DOC. TYPE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
CURRENT REVISION DATE: 02/26/13
SLCC PROJECT NO: F13011
BLDG&RM#: TECHNOLOGY BLDG - ROOM 213
FILE: 005.213 eLEARNING REMODEL.rvt
DRAWN BY: Author
A
A
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
CHECKED BY: Checker
COPYRIGHT: STATE OF UTAH
SHEET TITLE:
DETAILS
SHEET NUMBER:
A1
GYPSUM BD BULKHEAD DTL
1 1/2" = 1'-0"
A2
1
GYPSUM BD SOFFIT DTL
1 1/2" = 1'-0"
A3
2
SEISMIC WALL CLIP DETAIL
6" = 1'-0"
A4
3
GRID SUPPORT DETAIL
6" = 1'-0"
4
5
AE501
p. 32
DFCM
1
2
Door Door
Door
Door
Number Width Height Thickness
D
213.0
213.1
213.2
213.3
213A
213B
213C
213D
213E
213F
213G
213H
213K
213L
213M
213N
213P
213Q
213Q-A
213R
213T
213U
213V
213W
3' - 0"
3' - 0"
3' - 0"
0' - 0"
3' - 0"
3' - 0"
3' - 0"
3' - 0"
3' - 0"
3' - 0"
3' - 0"
3' - 0"
3' - 0"
3' - 0"
3' - 0"
3' - 0"
3' - 0"
3' - 0"
3' - 0"
3' - 0"
3' - 0"
3' - 0"
3' - 0"
3' - 0"
7' - 0"
7' - 0"
7' - 0"
0' - 0"
7' - 0"
7' - 0"
7' - 0"
7' - 0"
7' - 0"
7' - 0"
7' - 0"
7' - 0"
7' - 0"
7' - 0"
7' - 0"
7' - 0"
7' - 0"
7' - 0"
7' - 0"
7' - 0"
7' - 0"
7' - 0"
7' - 0"
7' - 0"
0' - 1 3/4"
0' - 1 3/4"
0' - 1 3/4"
0' - 1 3/4"
0' - 1 3/4"
0' - 1 3/4"
0' - 1 3/4"
0' - 1 3/4"
0' - 1 3/4"
0' - 1 3/4"
0' - 1 3/4"
0' - 1 3/4"
0' - 1 3/4"
0' - 1 3/4"
0' - 1 3/4"
0' - 1 3/4"
0' - 1 3/4"
0' - 1 3/4"
GLASS STOREFRONT
GLASS STOREFRONT
RELOCATED EXISTING
ALUM / GLASS
ALUM / GLASS
CLEAR COAT
EXISTING TO REMAIN
SOLID CORE WOOD
SOLID CORE WOOD
SOLID CORE WOOD
SOLID CORE WOOD
SOLID CORE WOOD
SOLID CORE WOOD
SOLID CORE WOOD
SOLID CORE WOOD
SOLID CORE WOOD
SOLID CORE WOOD
SOLID CORE WOOD
SOLID CORE WOOD
SOLID CORE WOOD
SOLID CORE WOOD
SOLID CORE WOOD
SOLID CORE WOOD
GLASS STOREFRONT
GLASS STOREFRONT
GLASS STOREFRONT
CLEAR COAT
CLEAR COAT
CLEAR COAT
CLEAR COAT
CLEAR COAT
CLEAR COAT
CLEAR COAT
CLEAR COAT
CLEAR COAT
CLEAR COAT
CLEAR COAT
CLEAR COAT
CLEAR COAT
CLEAR COAT
CLEAR COAT
CLEAR COAT
CLEAR COAT
ALUM / GLASS
ALUM / GLASS
ALUM / GLASS
3
4
5
GENERAL NOTES:
DOOR SCHEDULE
Door
DR FIRE
RATING
Finish
Door
Material
Bid MW13039
Frame
Type
MIN
2020
MIN
2020
MIN
MIN
MIN
2020
MIN
FRM FIRE
RATING
ALUM
ALUM
HM
20 MIN
20 MIN
20 MIN
HM
HM W/ SIDELITE
HM W/ SIDELITE
HM W/ SIDELITE
HM W/ SIDELITE
HM
HM W/ SIDELITE
HM W/ SIDELITE
HM W/ SIDELITE
HM W/ SIDELITE
HM W/ SIDELITE
HM W/ SIDELITE
HM W/ SIDELITE
HM W/ SIDELITE
HM W/ SIDELITE
HM W/ SIDELITE
HM W/ SIDELITE
ALUM
ALUM
ALUM
Comments
TEMPERED GLASS
TEMPERED GLASS
RE-USE IN NEW LOCATION
EXISTING TO REMAIN
TEMPRD GLASS @ SIDELITE
TEMPRD GLASS @ SIDELITE
TEMPRD GLASS @ SIDELITE
TEMPRD GLASS @ SIDELITE
TEMPRD GLASS @ SIDELITE
TEMPRD GLASS @ SIDELITE
TEMPRD GLASS @ SIDELITE
TEMPRD GLASS @ SIDELITE
TEMPRD GLASS @ SIDELITE
TEMPRD GLASS @ SIDELITE
TEMPRD GLASS @ SIDELITE
TEMPRD GLASS @ SIDELITE
TEMPRD GLASS @ SIDELITE
TEMPRD GLASS @ SIDELITE
TEMPRD GLASS @ SIDELITE
TEMPERED GLASS
TEMPERED GLASS
TEMPERED GLASS
1.
CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO PROVIDE DUST BARRIERS TO PREVENT DUST
FROM SPREADING TO THE BALANCE OF THE ROOM AND INTO OTHER AREAS.
2.
PROTECT EXISTING STRUCTURE, INCLUDING WALLS, WINDOWS, CARPET, ETC.
FROM DAMAGE DUE TO CONSTRUCTION.
3.
CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE TO REPAIR ANY DAMAGE TO BUILDING AS
A RESULT OF CONTRACTED WORK. REPAIRS MUST BE MADE PRIOR TO
COMPLETION OF THE JOB AND RECEIVING PAYMENT.
4.
ALL DEBRIS FROM DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION IS TO BE REMOVED FROM
THE JOB SITE AND DISPOSED OF BY THE CONTRACTOR. THE JOB SITE IS TO BE
LEFT IN A CLEAN AND ORDERLY CONDITION UPON THE COMPLETION OF THE
WORK.
5.
ALL WORK IS TO BE DONE IN A PROFESSIONAL, CRAFTSMANSHIPLIKE MANNER.
OWNER HAS THE RIGHT TO REJECT ANY AND ALL WORK THAT DOES NOT MEET
COLLEGE STANDARDS.
6.
CONTRACTOR IS TO BE RESPONSIBLE FOR MEETING ALL THE REQUIREMENTS
OF ALL APPLICABLE BUILDING AND SAFETY CODES FOR THIS PROJECT. FIELD
VERIFICATION OF THE JOB IS THE REPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR.
7.
NOTIFY OWNER IMMEDIATELY OF ANY CONFLICT WITH ELECTRICAL OR
COMMUNICATIONS WIRING.
8.
9.
FACILITIES ARCHITECTS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
SALT LAKE CITY, UT 84123
P 801.957.4899
F 801.957.3839
CONSULTANTS:
ALL PENETRATION THROUGH FIRE WALLS IS TO BE SEALED ACCORDING TO
CODE.
WHW Engineering Inc.
Professional Mechanical Engineers
8619 S Sandy Parkway Suite 101
Sandy UT 84070-6404
P 801.466.4021 | F 801.466.8536
E-mail: excellence@whw-engineering.com
PAINTING: PAINT ALL NEW GYP. BOARD (1) ONE BASECOAT, (2) TWO TOP COATS.
COLOR OF PAINT IS SLCC'S STANDARD REVUE - P&L PROHIDE SATIN AND PAINT
METAL FRAMING TO MATCH EXISTING DOOR FRAME.
ENVISION Engineering (Electrical)
244 W 300 N Suite 100
Salt Lake City UT 84103-1147
P 801.534.1130 | F 801.534.1080
www.envisioneng.com
11. NEW FIXTURES ARE TO BE SEISMICALLY WIRED ON 2 OPPOSITE CORNERS &
SECURED TO THE CEILING GRID WITH FIXTURE CLIPS. (2 PER SIDE)
12. CEILING GRID MUST HAVE 2" EDGE ANGLE, BERC-2 CLIPS, OR ENTIRE ROOM
MUST HAVE STRUTS AND SPLAY WIRES AT 12' ON CENTER. PERIMETER WIRES
MUST BE INSTALLED ON EVERY T-GRID. INSTALL PER ICC-ES-REPORT.
13. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION "APPENDIX" FOR ICC-ES REPORT ESR-1289 FOR
GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS AND ICC-ES REPORT ESR-3336 FOR SUSPENDED
ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS.
WALL
ROOM
NUMBE
R
N
E
S
W
FLOOR
BASE
CEILING
COMMENTS
C
C
213
213
213
213
213A
213B
213C
213D
213E
213F
213G
213H
213K
213L
213M
213N
213P
213Q
213Q-A
213R
213T
213U
213V
213W
PNT
PNT
PNT
BRICK
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
BRICK
BRICK/ PNT GYP
BRICK
BRICK
BRICK/ PNT GYP
BRICK/ PNT GYP
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
BR COL/ PNT GYP
PNT
STOREFRONT
STOREFRONT
STOREFRONT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
BRICK
BRICK
BRICK
BRICK
BRICK
BR COL/ PNT GYP
BRICK
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
BRICK
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
WND
WND
WND
WND
PNT
BRICK
PNT
BRICK
BRICK
PNT
PNT
BRICK
BRICK
BRICK
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
PNT
WND
CARPET TILES
CARPET TILES
CARPET TILES
CARPET TILES
CARPET TILES
CARPET TILES
CARPET TILES
CARPET TILES
CARPET TILES
CARPET TILES
CARPET TILES
CARPET TILES
CARPET TILES
CARPET TILES
CARPET TILES
CARPET TILES
CARPET TILES
CARPET TILES
CARPET TILES
CARPET TILES
CARPET TILES
CARPET TILES
CARPET TILES
CARPET TILES
RUBBER BASE
RUBBER BASE
RUBBER BASE
RUBBER BASE
RUBBER BASE
RUBBER BASE
RUBBER BASE
RUBBER BASE
RUBBER BASE
RUBBER BASE
RUBBER BASE
RUBBER BASE
RUBBER BASE
RUBBER BASE
RUBBER BASE
RUBBER BASE
RUBBER BASE
RUBBER BASE
RUBBER BASE
RUBBER BASE
RUBBER BASE
RUBBER BASE
RUBBER BASE
RUBBER BASE
ATC SYS
ATC SYS & GYP BD
ATC SYS & GYP BD
ATC SYS
ATC SYS
ATC SYS
ATC SYS
ATC SYS
ATC SYS
ATC SYS
ATC SYS
ATC SYS
ATC SYS
ATC SYS
ATC SYS
ATC SYS
ATC SYS
ATC SYS
ATC SYS
ATC SYS
ATC SYS
ATC SYS
ATC SYS
ATC SYS
PROFESSIONAl SEAL:
PATCH, REPAIR, & CLEAN BRICK
PATCH, REPAIR, & CLEAN BRICK
PATCH, REPAIR, & CLEAN BRICK
PATCH, REPAIR, & CLEAN BRICK
PATCH, REPAIR, & CLEAN BRICK
PATCH, REPAIR, & CLEAN BRICK
PATCH, REPAIR, & CLEAN BRICK
PATCH, REPAIR, & CLEAN BRICK
PATCH, REPAIR, & CLEAN BRICK
PATCH, REPAIR, & CLEAN BRICK
PATCH, REPAIR, & CLEAN BRICK
PATCH, REPAIR, & CLEAN BRICK
PATCH, REPAIR, & CLEAN BRICK
PATCH, REPAIR, & CLEAN BRICK
PATCH, REPAIR, & CLEAN BRICK
PATCH, REPAIR, & CLEAN BRICK
PATCH, REPAIR, & CLEAN BRICK
PATCH, REPAIR, & CLEAN BRICK
PATCH, REPAIR, & CLEAN BRICK
PATCH, REPAIR, & CLEAN BRICK
CAMPUS:
TAYLORSVILLE
REDWOOD CAMPUS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
TAYLORSVILLE UT
84123
BUILDING & ROOM NUMBER:
TECHNOLOGY BLDG ROOM 213
B
PROJECT TITLE:
e-LEARNING
SERVICES REMODEL
REVISIONS:
MARK DATE
DESCRIPTION
ISSUE DATE:15 MARCH 2013
DOC. TYPE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
3' - 4"
3' - 0"
2"
3 1/2"
2' - 5"
3 1/2"
3 1/2"
2' - 5"
3 1/2"
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
TEMPERED
GLASS DOOR
PANEL
6' - 0 1/2"
7' - 0"
7' - 0"
7' - 2"
6' - 8"
2' - 5"
3 1/2"
SLCC PROJECT NO: F13011
BLDG&RM#: TECHNOLOGY BLDG - ROOM 213
3'-0" x 7'-0"
SOLID CORE
WD DOOR
TEMPERED
GLASS DOOR
PANEL
PANIC HDW
AREA OF
FRITTED
SCREEN
2' - 0"
3' - 3"
ALUMINUM
STOREFRONT
FRAMING
8"
1
HM FRAME W/ SIDELITE
1/2" = 1'-0"
1
2
HM FRAME
1/2" = 1'-0"
D4
2
SOLID CORE WD DOOR
1/2" = 1'-0"
A4
3
ALUMINUM
STOREFRONT
DOOR
ASSEMBLY
8"
FINISH FLOOR
FINISH FLOOR
FIRE RATED STOREFRONT DOOR ASSY
1/2" = 1'-0"
4
FILE: 005.213 eLEARNING REMODEL.rvt
DRAWN BY: Author
DOOR HDW
4"
A
3 1/2"
2" HOLLOW
METAL FRAME
2"
HM FRAME
3' - 0"
2' - 0"
2"
CURRENT REVISION DATE: 02/15/13
6' - 0"
2"
3' - 0"
1' - 0"
3' - 0"
2"
2"
2"
6' - 0 1/2"
4' - 6"
7' - 2"
L:\Files\SLCC JOBS\100 RRC Redwood Road Campus\005 TB Rampton Technology Building\005.213 eLearning Remodel\005.213 eLearning Remodel.rvt
D
10. DISCONNECT AND REMOVE ANY CONDUITS, FLEX CONDUITS AND WIRING THAT
WILL NOT BE USED IN NEW REMODEL.
FINISH SCHEDULE
B
13037660
A5
A
CHECKED BY: Checker
COPYRIGHT: STATE OF UTAH
SHEET TITLE:
SCHEDULES
SHEET NUMBER:
STOREFRONT DOOR ASSY
1/2" = 1'-0"
5
AE601
p. 33
DFCM
2
3
4
MECHANICAL LEGEND
SYMBOL
ABR,
DESCRIPTION
SYMBOL
ABR,
GENERAL TERMINOLOGY
SYMBOL
ABR,
DESCRIPTION
EXISTING AIR DUCT TO BE REMOVED
PUMP
PITCH DOWN
SECTION DRAWN ON THIS SHEET
EXISTING AIR DUCT TO REMAIN
REGULATOR
ELBOW UP/DN
DETAIL NUMBER DESIGNATION
CORRESPONDING WITH GRID
LOCATION
NEW AIR DUCT
UNION
TEE UP/DN
RECT TO RECT AIR DUCT TAKE-OFF
MANUAL ACTUATOR
EXISTING PIPING TO BE REMOVED
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION
RECT TO RND AIR DUCT TAKE-OFF
PNUEMATIC DIAPHRAM ACTUATOR
EXISTING PIPING TO REMAIN
EQUIPMENT ITEM DESIGNATION
RND TO RND AIR DUCT TAKE-OFF
M
ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATOR
NEW PIPING
MEDIUM PRESSURE TAKE-OFF
S
SOLENOID ACTUATOR
PIPE CAP OR PLUG
CFM
REGISTER, GRILLE OR DIFFUSER
DESIGNATION WITH BALANCING CFM
LISTED BELOW
FLEXIBLE AIR DUCT
BUTTERFLY VALVE
REDUCER - CONCENTRIC / ECCENTRIC
LINED DUCT
GATE VALVE
EXPANSION JOINT
R-1
GRILLE OR LOUVER DESIGNATION
WHERE BALANCING NOT REQUIRED
RADIUS ELBOW
GLOBE VALVE - STRAIGHT PATTERN
FLEXIBLE CONNECTION
1
REVISION DESIGNATOR AND NUMBER
ECCENTRIC DUCT TRANSITION
GLOBE VALVE - ANGLE PATTERN
ANCHOR POINT
1
KEY NOTE DESIGNATOR AND NUMBER
CONCENTRIC DUCT TRANSITION
POC
POINT OF CONNECTION
VOLUME DAMPER
POR
POINT OF REMOVAL
SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER
AFF
ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR
AP
A2
1
D-1
R
M
WET SIDE
CD
CONDENSATE DRAIN
MOTORIZED 3-WAY CONTROL VALVE
G
NATURAL GAS PIPING
PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE
CF
CHEMICAL FEED LINE
RETURN & TRANSFER AIR GRILLE
CHECK VALVE
GF
GLYCOL FILL LINE
ACCESS PANEL
EXHAUST GRILLE OR CEILING EXH. FAN
CIRCUIT BALANCING VALVE
MU
MAKE-UP WATER LINE
C EL.
CENTERLINE ELEVATION
RETURN & OUTSIDE AIR DUCT UP/DN
BALL VALVE
CW
CULINARY COLD WATER
GC
GENERAL CONTRACTOR
RETURN & OA ROUND DUCT UP/DN
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
HW
CULINARY HOT WATER
MC
MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR
SUPPLY AIR DUCT UP/DN
ATC
CONTROLS CONTRACTOR
SUPPLY AIR ROUND DUCT UP/DN
ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR
FPC
FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTOR
NIC
NOT IN CONTRACT
NTS
VCP
C
M
PRV
P
T
THERMAL RELIEF VALVE
HWREC
CULINARY HOT WATER RECIRC
G-1 - MECHANICAL INFORMATION IS NOT LIMITED TO THE MECHANICAL
DRAWINGS. CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR INFORMATION
OF THE EXISTING BUILDING AND SITE CONDITIONS, EXISTING PIPING,
EXISTING ELECTRICAL, AND EXISTING SUPPORTS.
A - EACH DRAWING SHEET AND THE SPECIFICATIONS HAVE BEEN
PREPARED TO SUPPLEMENT EACH OTHER AND THEY SHALL BE
INTERPRETED AS AN INTEGRAL UNIT WITH ITEMS SHOWN AND NOTED ON
ONE AND NOT THE OTHER BEING FURNISHED AND INSTALLED AS THOUGH
SHOWN AND CALLED OUT IN ALL PLACES. ITEMS IN SPECIFICATIONS OR
DRAWINGS LISTED WHICH ARE DIFFERING IN EFFICIENCY OR QUALITY
SHALL BE HELD TO THE GREATEST OF: EFFICIENCY, QUALITY OR
GOVERNING CODE.
G-2 - ANY AND ALL ALTERATIONS TO THE SYSTEM SHOWN SHALL BE
SUBMITTED TO THE ENGINEER PRIOR TO CHANGES FOR APPROVAL.
CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT START ANY CHANGES UNTIL NOTIFIED IN
WRITING. IF CHANGES ARE MADE PRIOR TO APPROVAL CONTRACTOR
SHALL TAKE ALL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE CHANGES MADE AND ALL
COSTS RELATING TO FAILURE OR REPLACEMENT OF ALTERATIONS.
HWR
HEATING WATER RETURN
EXHAUST AIR ROUND DUCT UP/DN
NEEDLE VALVE
CHWS
CHILLED WATER SUPPLY
ACCESS PANEL
TRIPLE DUTY VALVE
CHWR
CHILLED WATER RETURN
NOT TO SCALE
EXISTING EQUIPMENT TO BE REMOVED
AUTOMATIC AIR VENT
HTWS
HIGH TEMP HEATING WATER SUPPLY
G-4 - THE WORKING DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC. THEY DO NOT SHOW
EVERY OFFSET, BEND, OR ELBOW NECESSARY FOR THE COMPLETE
INSTALLATION IN THE SPACE PROVIDED. ALL LOCATIONS FOR
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SHALL BE FIELD VERIFIED AND COORDINATED
WITH ALL DRAWINGS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE OR
COORDINATE WITH THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR PROVISIONS FOR
BLOCKOUTS OR CORE DRILLS THROUGH STRUCTURE.
VITRIFIED CLAY PIPE
EXISTING EQUIPMENT TO REMAIN
MANUAL AIR VENT
HTWR
HIGH TEMP HEATING WATER RETURN
G-5 - THE INSTRUCTION TO "PROVIDE" ALSO INCLUDES INSTALLATION.
COMMON
NEW EQUIPMENT
STRAINER
LPS
LOW PRESSURE STEAM
G-6 - MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL SMOKE
AND FIRE DAMPERS AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODES AND AUTHORITIES.
SUPPLY AIR
STRAINER W/ PLUG BLOW OFF
LPR
LOW PRESSURE STEAM RETURN
NO
NORMALLY OPEN
RA
RETURN AIR
VENTURI
HPS
HIGH PRESSURE STEAM
EA
EXHAUST AIR
PRESSURE GUAGE W/ COCK - WATER
HPR
HIGH PRESSURE STEAM RETURN
OA
OUTSIDE AIR
PRESSURE GUAGE W/ COCK - STEAM
CS
B
MA
MIXED AIR
RF
RELIEF AIR
FO
THERMOMETER & THERMOWELL
S
FLAT OVAL
F
CONDENSER RETURN
PC
PUMPED CONDENSATE
WATER TEMP SENSOR & THERMOWELL
L
REFRIGERENT LIQUID
FLOW SWITCH
S
REFRIGERENT SUCTION
PRESSURE SWITCH
HG
REFRIGERENT HOT GAS
BD
BACKDRAFT DAMPER
F
FD
FIRE DAMPER
THERMOWELL
FOS
FUEL OIL SUPPLY
S
SD
SMOKE DAMPER
PRESSURE & TEMP TAP
FOR
FUEL OIL RETURN
G-12 - THE MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY MOTOR VOLTAGES
WITH THE ELECTRICAL DRAWING BEFORE ORDERING MOTORIZED
EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS.
FS
FS
FIRE & SMOKE DAMPER
DIRECTION OF FLOW
FOV
FUEL OIL VENT
G-13 - C.F.M. LISTED IS ACTUAL AIR.
WALL MOUNTED THERMOSTAT
BACKFLOW PREVENTING VALVE
T
S
T-STAT
DESIGN INTENT:
THE INTENT OF THIS PROJECT IS TO REMOVE THE EXISTING DUAL DUCT
BOXES SERVING THIS SPACE AND REPLACING THEM WITH NEW DDC
CONTROLLED DUAL DUCT BOXES. THE OFFICE LAYOUT HAS ALSO
CHANGED SO NEW ZONING WILL BE ADDRESSED IN THESE DOCUMENTS.
THE DUAL DUCT BOXES SERVING THE FLOOR GRILLES AROUND THE
PERIMETER ARE LOCATED IN THE BASEMENT AND THESE ARE TO BE
REPLACED IN PLACE WITH DDC DDB AND PROGRAMMED TO AVERAGE
THE THERMOSTATS OF THE ZONES THAT THE BOX IS SERVING.
1
2
3
BUILDING & ROOM NUMBER:
TECHNOLOGY BLDG ROOM 213
B
4
G-15 - CONTRACTOR SHALL THOROUGHLY REVIEW AND SIGN
SUBMITTALS FOR COMPLETENESS AND COMPLIANCE TO THE
SPECIFICATIONS PRIOR TO ENGINEERS REVIEW. SUPPLIERS SHALL
HIGHLIGHT OR MARK ALL INFORMATION REQUIRED TO SHOW
COMPLIANCE TO THE SPECIFICATIONS. ALL REQUESTED EXCEPTIONS TO
THE SPECIFICATIONS, OR SCHEDULES SHALL BE CLEARLY NOTED AND
EXPLAINED. SUBMITTAL REVIEW AND ACCEPTANCE IS FOR DESIGN
CONCEPT ONLY, AND DOES NOT AT ANY TIME RELIEVE THE
CONTRACTOR OF RESPONSIBILITY TO MEET SPECIFICATIONS,
CAPACITIES, OR DESIGN INTENT.
G-16 - ALL MECHANICAL SHALL BE INSTALLED AND CONFORM TO THE 2009
EDITION OF THE IMC AND IPC WITH UTAH ANNOTATIONS AND LOCAL
AUTHORITY REQUIREMENTS.
PROJECT TITLE:
e-LEARNING
SERVICES REMODEL
REVISIONS:
MARK DATE
G-14 - SUPPLIERS SHALL REVIEW ALL DRAWINGS AND THE
SPECIFICATIONS PRIOR TO SUBMITTING PRICES TO THE CONTRACTOR.
ALL QUESTIONS AND DISCREPANCIES SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE
ENGINEERS ATTENTION PRIOR TO BIDDING.
WALL MOUNTED TEMP. SENSOR
A
TAYLORSVILLE
REDWOOD CAMPUS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
TAYLORSVILLE UT
84123
G-11 - THE CONTRACTOR SHALL ASSUME ALL RESPONSIBILITY IN
HANDLING AND DISPOSING OF REFRIGERANTS, OILS, ETC. ALL SUCH
MATERIALS SHALL BE HANDLED, DISPOSED, AND USED IN ACCORDANCE
WITH ALL LOCAL, STATE, AND FEDERAL LAWS.
BD
03/15/13
CAMPUS:
G-9 - SEE ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR EXACT
LOCATION OF DIFFUSERS AND GRILLES.
G-10 - PROVIDE TURNING VANES IN ALL ELBOWS OF RECTANGULAR
DUCT.
NAL EN
S IO
GI
ES
ST
H
AT
E OF UTA
CONDENSER SUPPLY
CR
PROFESSIONAl SEAL:
WINWARD M.
PACKER
No. 375080
G-8 - PROVIDE AND INSTALL BALANCING DAMPERS IN ALL SUPPLY AND
EXHAUST AIR BRANCH DUCTS. BALANCE TO CFM SHOWN ON PLAN.
MVD
PS
C
G-7 - SHEET METAL DUCT SIZES SHOWN ON DRAWINGS ARE FREE AREA
DIMENSIONS.
M
MOTORIZED VOLUME DAMPER
ENVISION Engineering (Electrical)
244 W 300 N Suite 100
Salt Lake City UT 84103-1147
P 801.534.1130 | F 801.534.1080
www.envisioneng.com
G-3 - CONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND
LOCATIONS.
PLUG VALVE
SA
CONSULTANTS:
E - ANYTHING NOT CLEAR OR IN CONFLICT WILL BE EXPLAINED BY MAKING
APPLICATION TO THE ENGINEER IN WRITING.
EXHAUST AIR DUCT UP/DN
NORMALLY CLOSED
P 801.957.4899
F 801.957.3839
D - THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONSULT MANUFACTURERS INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS FOR SIZES, METHODS, ACCESSORIES, AND CLEARANCES
IN SPACE AVAILABLE PRIOR TO BIDDING PROJECT.
HEATING WATER SUPPLY
NC
FACILITIES ARCHITECTS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
SALT LAKE CITY, UT 84123
C - THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL ALL EQUIPMENT WITH PROPER
SERVICE ACCESS AND CLEARANCES ACCORDING TO MANUFACTURERS
RECOMMENDATIONS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REVIEW SUPPLIERS BID
PACKAGES FOR COMPLETENESS AND COMPLIANCE TO THE
SPECIFICATIONS, SCHEDULES, AND DESIGN INTENT (ALL EQUIPMENT AND
METHODS). THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE AND REINSTALL
CORRECTLY AT HIS OWN EXPENSE ANY EQUIPMENT NOT IN COMPLIANCE.
HWS
AP
D
B - THE CONTRACTOR WILL BE HELD RESPONSIBLE FOR THE
INSTALLATION OF THE SYSTEMS ACCORDING TO THE TRUE INTENT AND
MEANING OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.
SAFETY RELIEF VALVE
S
13037660
ER
NE
MOTORIZED 2-WAY CONTROL VALVE
EC
P:\~WHW Projects\2013\13012 SLCC eLearning\Drawings\13012 SLCC eLearning Mech.rvt
DESCRIPTION
SECTION LETTER DESIGNATION
AH
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
ABR,
WET SIDE
ME101
C
SYMBOL
GENERAL NOTES
AIR SIDE
A
D
DESCRIPTION
5
PRO
F
1
Bid MW13039
DESCRIPTION
ISSUE DATE:15 MARCH 2013
DOC. TYPE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
CURRENT REVISION DATE: 02/20/13
SLCC PROJECT NO: F13011
BLDG&RM#: TECHNOLOGY BLDG - ROOM 213
FILE: 005.213 eLEARNING REMODEL.rvt
DRAWN BY: BL
A
CHECKED BY: WP
COPYRIGHT: STATE OF UTAH
SHEET TITLE:
G-17 - THIS CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE DRAINING
DOWN AND RE-FILLING OF ALL SYSTEMS NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE
WORK OUTLINED BY THIS PROJECT. THIS INCLUDES PROVIDING THE
REQUIRED CHEMICAL TREATMENT WHEN RE-FILLING THE SYSTEM.
MECHANICAL LEGEND
AND GENERAL NOTES
G-18 - ALL PIPING, MATERIALS, ETC. SHALL BE NEW AND DOMESTIC MADE
UNLESS SPECIFICALLY AUTHORIZED IN WRITING PRIOR TO BID.
SHEET NUMBER:
5
MG001
p. 34
DFCM
1
2
Bid MW13039
3
4
5
SHEET NOTES
1
J
K
L
M
N
2
P
3
5
1
D
1
1
4
1
2
4
4
5
4
2
4
2
5
4
2
3
3
6
3
4
4
6
4
4
1
7
4
DN
4
5
7
4
2
1
3
10
1
4
4
8
4
1
4
9
4
3
5
2
4
5
9
4
UP
4
10
4
1
5
2
2
6
10
4
4
4
1
4
FACILITIES ARCHITECTS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
SALT LAKE CITY, UT 84123
P 801.957.4899
F 801.957.3839
CONSULTANTS:
BLANK OFF 16X12 LOUVER AND INSULATE. FIELD
VERIFY.
REMOVE EXISTING DUAL DUCT BOX IN BASEMENT
SERVING PERIMETER FLOOR GRILLES.
COORDINATE WORK IN THE BASEMENT WITH
OWNER MINIMUM OF 48 HOURS PRIOR TO WORK.
CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO CLEAN UP
EVERY DAY AFTER WORK IN THE BASEMENT.
REMOVE ALL ASSOCIATED ITEMS. REMOVE
PNUEMATIC BRANCH LINES BACK TO MAINS AND
CAP. FIELD VERIFY.
5
4
REMOVE EXISTING BASEBOARD HEATERS AND ALL
ASSOCIATED IN THIS APPROXIMATE LOCATION.
FIELD VERIFY. PATCH AND REPAIR WALL AND
FLOOR COORDINATE WITH ARCHITECTURAL PLANS.
10 EXISTING LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK SHALL
REMAIN.
11 RELOCATE EXISTING FLOOR GRILLE TO
ACCOMODATE NEW WALL. SEE ME101 FOR NEW
LOCATION.
ENVISION Engineering (Electrical)
244 W 300 N Suite 100
Salt Lake City UT 84103-1147
P 801.534.1130 | F 801.534.1080
www.envisioneng.com
C
PROFESSIONAl SEAL:
2
03/15/13
WINWARD M.
PACKER
No. 375080
5
4
NAL EN
S IO
GI
ES
ER
NE
3
D
9
4
1
C
13037660
PRO
F
H
REMOVE EXISTING DUCT IN THIS APPROXIMATE
LOCATION. FIELD VERIFY.
REMOVE EXISTING DUAL DUCT BOX IN THIS
APPROXIMATE LOCATION. REMOVE ALL
ASSOCIATED ITEMS. REMOVE PNUEMATIC BRANCH
LINES BACK TO MAINS AND CAP. FIELD VERIFY.
REMOVE EXISTING LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK IN
THIS APPROXIMATE LOCATION AND CAP. FIELD
VERIFY.
REMOVE EXISTING DIFFUSER OR GRILLE IN THIS
APPROXIMATE LOCATION. FIELD VERIFY.
EXISTING MEDIUM PRESSURE DUCTWORK SHALL
REMAIN.
REMOVE EXISTING COMPUTER ROOM UNIT IN THIS
APPROXIMATE LOCATION. REMOVE ALL
ASSOCIATED ITEMS INCLUDING OUTDOOR
CONDENSING UNIT, ALL DUCTWORK AND
DIFFUSERS, CONDENSATE DRAIN, REFRIGERANT
PIPING, CONTROLS, ETC. FIELD VERIFY.
4
10
ST
H
AT
E OF UTA
1
1
7
3
CAMPUS:
3
4
2
4
2
10
10
4
TAYLORSVILLE
REDWOOD CAMPUS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
TAYLORSVILLE UT
84123
1
11
BUILDING & ROOM NUMBER:
8
1
B
TECHNOLOGY BLDG ROOM 213
MECHANICAL DEMO FLOOR PLAN
1/8" = 1'-0"
B
PROJECT TITLE:
e-LEARNING
SERVICES REMODEL
K
L
M
N
REVISIONS:
P
MARK DATE
DESCRIPTION
P:\~WHW Projects\2013\13012 SLCC eLearning\Drawings\13012 SLCC eLearning Mech.rvt
ISSUE DATE:15 MARCH 2013
10
8
DOC. TYPE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
7
CURRENT REVISION DATE: 02/21/13
8
SLCC PROJECT NO: F13011
BLDG&RM#: TECHNOLOGY BLDG - ROOM 213
FILE: 005.213 eLEARNING REMODEL.rvt
10
10
DRAWN BY: BL
A
A
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
CHECKED BY: WP
COPYRIGHT: STATE OF UTAH
SHEET TITLE:
MECHANICAL DEMO
FLOOR PLAN
MECHANICAL DEMO BASEMENT PLAN
2
1/8" = 1'-0"
SHEET NUMBER:
1
2
3
4
5
MD101
p. 35
DFCM
1
2
Bid MW13039
3
4
5
SHEET NOTES
1
2
3
D
4
5
6
CONNECT TO EXISTING MEDIUM PRESSURE
DUCTWORK IN THE MAIN CORRIDOR IN THIS
APPROXIMATE LOCATION. FIELD VERIFY.
CONNECT TO EXISTING MEDIUM PRESSURE
DUCTWORK IN THIS APPROXIMATE LOCATION.
FIELD VERIFY.
PROVIDE COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER AT
WALL PENETRATION.
EXISTING DUCT SERVING THE 3RD LEVEL FLOOR
GRILLES SHALL REMAIN.
RELOCATE FLOOR GRILLE TO THIS APPROXIMATE
LOCATION. MODIFY DUCTWORK BELOW AS
NEEDED.
FIELD VERIFY BEST ROUTING WITH EXISTING
STRUCTURE.
13037660
D
FACILITIES ARCHITECTS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
SALT LAKE CITY, UT 84123
P 801.957.4899
F 801.957.3839
CONSULTANTS:
J
K
L
M
N
2
14"ø
14"ø
1
3
3
1
FS
P
1
1
FS FS
3
1
16"ø
FS
3
12"x8" SA
12"x8" SA
6"ø SA
6"ø SA
12"x8" SA
6"ø SA
6"ø SA
12"ø SA
12"ø SA
10"ø SA
GENERAL NOTES:
1. PROVIDE VOLUME DAMPERS ON ALL SUPPLY
BRANCHES WHERE MULTIPLE GRILLES ARE SERVED BY
THE SAME DUAL DUCT BOX.
2. THIS SYSTEM IS DESIGNED TO BE A PLENUM RETURN.
PROVIDE SOUND BOOT ON ALL NEW RETURN GRILLES
PER DETAIL.
DN
12"x10" SA
1
C
ENVISION Engineering (Electrical)
244 W 300 N Suite 100
Salt Lake City UT 84103-1147
P 801.534.1130 | F 801.534.1080
www.envisioneng.com
6"ø SA
10"ø SA
14"x8" SA
10"ø SA
8"ø SA
18"x14" SA
10"ø SA
14"x12" SA
1
1
12"x10" SA
ST
H
AT
E OF UTA
8"ø SA
CAMPUS:
1
TAYLORSVILLE
REDWOOD CAMPUS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
TAYLORSVILLE UT
84123
1
10"ø
10"ø
6
1
12"ø
12"ø
8"ø
8"ø
4
1
10"ø SA
6
10"ø SA
10"ø SA
10"ø SA
6
12"ø SA
8"ø
8"ø
6
12"x10" SA
10"ø SA
8"ø
8"ø
12"x10" SA
10"ø SA
B
4
4
TECHNOLOGY BLDG ROOM 213
7
10"ø SA
1
B
1
BUILDING & ROOM NUMBER:
10"ø SA
12"x10" SA
10"ø
10"ø
14"x12" SA
4
03/15/13
ER
NE
10"ø
10"ø
UP
NAL EN
S IO
GI
ES
WINWARD M.
PACKER
No. 375080
5
1
20"x18" SA
10"ø SA
PROFESSIONAl SEAL:
8"ø SA
10"ø SA
10"ø SA
C
PRO
F
H
PROJECT TITLE:
e-LEARNING
SERVICES REMODEL
12"ø
12"ø
REVISIONS:
5
MARK DATE
DESCRIPTION
8
ISSUE DATE:15 MARCH 2013
P:\~WHW Projects\2013\13012 SLCC eLearning\Drawings\13012 SLCC eLearning Mech.rvt
DOC. TYPE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
1
MECHANICAL DUCTWORK PLAN
1/8" = 1'-0"
CURRENT REVISION DATE: 02/21/13
SLCC PROJECT NO: F13011
BLDG&RM#: TECHNOLOGY BLDG - ROOM 213
FILE: 005.213 eLEARNING REMODEL.rvt
DRAWN BY: BL
A
A
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
CHECKED BY: WP
COPYRIGHT: STATE OF UTAH
SHEET TITLE:
MECHANICAL
DUCTWORK PLAN
SHEET NUMBER:
1
2
3
4
5
ME101
p. 36
DFCM
1
2
Bid MW13039
3
4
5
SHEET NOTES
1
H
J
K
L
M
1
D
OFFICE
213F
213G
DDB
1
OFFICE
D-1
213H
105
D-1
D-2
COLLABORATION
1
1
213
D-1
D-2
D-2
OFFICE
185
R-1
EXIST
213M
DDB
5
R-2
D-2
D-2
265
265
R-1
OFFICE
DDB
11
D-2
213C
C
R-5
165
213A
DDB
14
R-5
CONSULTANTS:
130
1
D-2
D-2
5
OFFICE
265
213B
1
R-1
EXIST
DDB
6
GENERAL NOTES:
1. PROVIDE RETURN AIR BOOT ON ALL NEW
RETURN GRILLES. SEE DETAIL.
R-3
230
OFFICE
R-5
EXIST
REF.
D-2
R-2
165
213Q
130
R-1
6
OFFICE
RECEPTION
CONSULTATION
D-2
213
500
D-3
OFFICE
300
D-3
D-3
300
300
1
R-3
DDB
7
213R
DDB
10
DDB
9
213W
DDB
8
CONSULTING
7
D-3
DDB
3E
CAMPUS:
3
TAYLORSVILLE
REDWOOD CAMPUS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
TAYLORSVILLE UT
84123
CONSULTING
525
D-3
213U
D-3
320
CONSULTING
213T
325
3
03/15/13
ST
H
AT
E OF UTA
330
1
NAL EN
S IO
GI
ES
WINWARD M.
PACKER
No. 375080
R-3
213V
D-4
1
R-3
R-3
R-4
PROFESSIONAl SEAL:
500
1
CONFERENCE ROOM
C
D-2
213Q-A
ER
NE
D-3
ENVISION Engineering (Electrical)
244 W 300 N Suite 100
Salt Lake City UT 84103-1147
P 801.534.1130 | F 801.534.1080
www.envisioneng.com
230
213P
213
300
P 801.957.4899
F 801.957.3839
DN
OFFICE
WORKROOM
FACILITIES ARCHITECTS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
SALT LAKE CITY, UT 84123
R-2
265
145
EXIST
DDB
3W
1
1
PROVIDE NEW DUAL DUCT BOX SERVING THE
FLOOR GRILLES ON THE 3RD LEVEL. PROVIDE DDC
CONTROLS. CONNECT TO EXISTING DUCTWORK.
PROVIDE TRANSITIONS AS NECESSARY. REPLACE
EXISTING THERMOSTAT IN PLACE. FIELD VERIFY.
PRO
F
3
DDB
4
D-1
213D
UP
3
1
D
213N
EXIST
OFFICE
OFFICE
13037660
CUBICAL AREA
OFFICE
150
105
213
213E
R-1
D-2
DDB
13
265
265
R-1
D-1
R-1 R-1
R-1
105
1
213L
R-1
110
DDB
12
OFFICE
213K
D-1
R-1
2
OFFICE
110
150
P
DDB
3
DDB
2
1
OFFICE
N
PROVIDE NEW DUAL DUCT BOX WITH DDC
CONTROLS IN THIS APPROXIMATE LOCATION. FIELD
VERIFY.
PROVIDE NEW DUAL DUCT BOX WITH DDC
CONTROLS IN THE BASEMENT. CONNECT TO
EXISTING DUCTWORK. PROVIDE TRANSITIONS AS
NECESSARY. THIS BOX SHALL BE CONTROLLED OFF
OF AND AVERAGE OF THE NEW THERMOSTATS IN
THE SPACES THAT THEY ARE SERVING. FIELD
VERIFY.
DDB
3C
BUILDING & ROOM NUMBER:
8
TECHNOLOGY BLDG ROOM 213
B
1
MECHANICAL GRD PLAN
1/8" = 1'-0"
K
B
e-LEARNING
SERVICES REMODEL
L
M
DDB
1W
P:\~WHW Projects\2013\13012 SLCC eLearning\Drawings\13012 SLCC eLearning Mech.rvt
PROJECT TITLE:
N
REVISIONS:
P
MARK DATE
DESCRIPTION
ISSUE DATE:15 MARCH 2013
2
DOC. TYPE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
2
DDB
1E
7
CURRENT REVISION DATE: 02/26/13
SLCC PROJECT NO: F13011
BLDG&RM#: TECHNOLOGY BLDG - ROOM 213
FILE: 005.213 eLEARNING REMODEL.rvt
DRAWN BY: BL
A
A
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
CHECKED BY: WP
COPYRIGHT: STATE OF UTAH
SHEET TITLE:
2
MECHANICAL GRD
PLAN
MECHANICAL BASEMENT PLAN
1/8" = 1'-0"
SHEET NUMBER:
1
2
3
4
5
ME102
p. 37
DFCM
1
2
Bid MW13039
3
4
5
E
ID
W R
2" NE
/
1 N
4 RU
PROVIDE HANGER STRAP TO
STABILIZE AND BALANCE BOOT.
CONNECT TO EXISTING OVERHEAD
STRUCTURE.
16x22 RETURN AIR BOOT
W/ 1" LINER
SOUND SHALL NOT HAVE A
DIRECT PATH TO PLENUM
13037660
1" LONG MINIMUM
TRAILING EDGE
SCREW SHEET METAL STRAPS
TO DUCT TOP AND BOTTOM. TWO
18"
PLACES BOTH SIDES OF BOOT.
D
D
.
SINGLE THICKNESS
TURNING VANES
45°
FACILITIES ARCHITECTS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
SALT LAKE CITY, UT 84123
6"
P 801.957.4899
F 801.957.3839
CEILING
C1
C3
SCALE: NONE
RETURN AIR BOOT DETAIL
SCALE: NONE
C4
SCALE: NONE
C
HIGH EFFICIENCY TYPE PRE-MANUFACTURED
TAKE-OFF WITH DAMPER.
A
4 5
°
SEE DETAIL G
B
AIR
INSULATED FLEX DUCT.
MAX LENGTH 6'-0".
FLOW
24 GA.
HANGER SIZES FOR
DOUBLE HUNG RECTANGULAR DUCTS
RIGID ROUND
DUCT OR
DIFFUSER
COLLAR
MAXIMUM
HALF OF
DUCT
PERIMETER
P/2 =
30"
72"
96"
120"
168"
192"
PAIR AT
10 FT. SPACING
STRAP
WIRE/ROD
1" x 22 ga.
1" x 18 ga.
1" x 16 ga.
1-1/2" x 16 ga.
1-1/2" x 16 ga.
----
10 ga.
3/8"
3/8"
1/2"
1/2"
1/2"
B3
NYLON CLAMP OVER INSULATION
STRAP
PAIR AT
4 FT. SPACING
STRAP
WIRE/ROD
1" x 22 ga.
1" x 20 ga.
1" x 18 ga.
1" x 16 ga.
1-1/2" x 16 ga.
1-1/2" x 16 ga.
10 ga.
1/4"
3/8"
3/8"
1/2"
1/2"
1" x 22 ga.
1" x 22 ga.
1" x 22 ga.
1" x 20 ga.
1" x 18 ga.
1" x 16 ga.
WIRE/ROD
12 ga.
1/4"
1/4"
1/4"
3/8"
3/8"
TAYLORSVILLE
REDWOOD CAMPUS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
TAYLORSVILLE UT
84123
DUCT HANGER SIZING
LOW PRESSURE ROUND DUCT
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
SQUARE-TO-ROUND TAKE-OFF DETAIL
SCALE: NONE
3 thru 8
9 thru 14
15 thru 26
27 thru 36
37 thru 50
1" x 18 GAUGE STRAP
HANGERS AT 8'-0"
SPACING.
MAXIMUM 2" W.G.
MAXIMUM 2" W.G.
STATIC POSITIVE
STATIC NEGATIVE
SPIRAL
LONGITUDINAL SPIRAL
LONGITUDINAL
SEAM GAUGE SEAM GAUGE SEAM GAUGE SEAM GAUGE
28
28
28
24
28
26
24
22
26
24
22
20
26
24
22
20
B
REVISIONS:
MARK DATE
A
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
DESCRIPTION
NO POP RIVETS
ALLOWED
ISSUE DATE:15 MARCH 2013
DOC. TYPE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
24
22
20
18
CURRENT REVISION DATE: 03/08/13
SLCC PROJECT NO: F13011
BLDG&RM#: TECHNOLOGY BLDG - ROOM 213
1"
A3
PROJECT TITLE:
e-LEARNING
SERVICES REMODEL
#10 x 3/4" SELF
TAPPING CADMIUM PLATED
SHEET METAL SCREWS TO
ANCHOR STRAPS TO DUCT.
ALL STRAPS TO BE TIGHT
AGAINST DUCT AND SUPPORT
MEMBERS. (TYPICAL)
CEILING DIFFUSER
SCALE: NONE
TECHNOLOGY BLDG ROOM 213
SCALE: NONE
1" x 18 GAUGE STRAP
HANGERS AT 8'-0"
SPACING.
DUCT
DIAMETER
IN INCHES
BUILDING & ROOM NUMBER:
ATTACH SECURELY TO
STRUCTURE.
FLEX DUCT
A1
CAMPUS:
2. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR
SEISMIC RESTRAINT
REQUIREMENTS.
INSULATION
DETAIL G
03/15/13
ST
H
AT
E OF UTA
NOTES:
1. DUCT OUTSIDE OF BUILDING
ENVELOPE SHALL BE WRAPPED
EXTERNALLY AS PER THE
SPECIFICATIONS.
SEE DETAIL G
NYLON CLAMP OVER FLEX DUCT
B
PAIR AT
8 FT. SPACING
NAL EN
S IO
GI
ES
WINWARD M.
PACKER
No. 375080
193" AND UP REQUIRE SPECIAL ANALYSIS
LOCKING QUADRANT HANDLE OR
REMOTE CEILING OPERATOR WHERE
DAMPER IS INACCESSIBLE.
PROFESSIONAl SEAL:
ER
NE
MANUAL VOLUME DAMPER W/
LOCKING QUADRANT ON ALL
SUPPLY AND EXHAUST AIR DUCTS,
AND WHERE SHOWN FOR RETURN
AIR DUCTS.
ENVISION Engineering (Electrical)
244 W 300 N Suite 100
Salt Lake City UT 84103-1147
P 801.534.1130 | F 801.534.1080
www.envisioneng.com
SINGLE THICKNESS TURNING VANE DETAIL
NOTE: TAKE-OFFS SHOULD NOT BE INSTALLED CLOSER
THAN TWO WIDTHS TO ELBOWS OR INTERSECTIONS
NOTE: AREA OF A x B SHALL
BE EQUAL TO 1.5 x AREA BRANCH DUCT
P:\~WHW Projects\2013\13012 SLCC eLearning\Drawings\13012 SLCC eLearning Mech.rvt
CONSULTANTS:
LEADING AND TRAILING
EDGE TO BE PARALLEL
WITH SIDE OF DUCT.
PRO
F
C
TYPICAL HIGH PRESSURE DUCT CONN.
AIR
3'-0"
FLOW
RETURN GRILLE
FILE: 005.213 eLEARNING REMODEL.rvt
LOW PRESSURE ROUND
DUCT CONSTRUCTION DETAIL
DRAWN BY: BL
SCALE: NONE
A4
DUCT STRAP HANGER DETAIL
SCALE: NONE
A
CHECKED BY: WP
COPYRIGHT: STATE OF UTAH
SHEET TITLE:
MECHANICAL DETAILS
SHEET NUMBER:
1
2
3
4
5
ME501
p. 38
DFCM
1
2
Bid MW13039
3
4
5
FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER
COOLING WITH PROPORTIONAL
HOT WATER REHEAT
D
AIRFLOW
WATER
VALVE
OPEN
MODULATING
HEAT
AIRFLOW
CFM INCREASE
AN INCREASE IN ROOM
TEMPERATURE OVER COOLING
SETPOINT CAUSES AIRFLOW
TO MODULATE FROM MINIMUM
TO COOLING MAXIMUM, WHICH
IS REACHED AT TWO DEGREES
OVER THE COOLING SETPOINT.
BETWEEN HEATING SETPOINT
AND COOLING SETPOINT,
AIRFLOW WILL BE AT MINIMUM.
A DECREASE IN ROOM
TEMPERATURE BELOW
HEATING SETPOINT CAUSES
AIRFLOW TO MODULATE TO
HEATING MAXIMUM TO MATCH
THE WATER VALVE ACTION, AS
HOT WATER VALVE
MODULATES OPEN.
ANCHOR FIRE DAMPER ONTO
WALL W/2"x2"x1/8" ANGLE IRON.
ANCHOR WITH EXPANSION BOLTS.
COOLING
MAX.
DUCT
DAMPER SECTION
OUT OF AIR STREAM
13037660
22 GA STEEL
SLEEVE(TYP.)
HEATING
MAX
D
FACILITIES ARCHITECTS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
SALT LAKE CITY, UT 84123
MIN.
VALVE
CLOSED
P 801.957.4899
F 801.957.3839
HSP-2°F
CSP CSP-2°F
HSP
CONSULTANTS:
ACCESS DOOR ON
ACCESSIBLE SIDE
WALL MOUNTED
VERTICAL FIRE
DAMPER
ROOM TEMPERATURE INCREASE
TEMPERATURE SETPOINTS
CAN BE DIFFERENT FOR
OCCUPIED, UNOCCUPIED, AND
NIGHT SETBACK STATES.
C2
FUSIBLE LINK
SQUARE DAMPER
SECTION
ENVISION Engineering (Electrical)
244 W 300 N Suite 100
Salt Lake City UT 84103-1147
P 801.534.1130 | F 801.534.1080
www.envisioneng.com
WALL
WALL
DDB BOX W/ REHEAT COIL SEQUENCE DETAIL
SEAL TIGHT
ALL AROUND
SCALE: NONE
C
C
SCALE: NONE
PROFESSIONAl SEAL:
NAL EN
S IO
GI
ES
03/15/13
ER
NE
PRO
F
C3
HIGH VELOCITY ROUND DUCT FIRE DAMPER DETAIL
WINWARD M.
PACKER
No. 375080
ST
H
AT
E OF UTA
CAMPUS:
NOTE:
SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR
SEISMIC RESTRAINT
REQUIREMENTS.
ATTACH HANGER STRAPS
TO STRUCTURE
TAYLORSVILLE
REDWOOD CAMPUS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
TAYLORSVILLE UT
84123
NOTE: MAXIMUM
SPACING OF 10'-0"
BUILDING & ROOM NUMBER:
HANGERS MUST NOT DEFORM DUCT SHAPE
3/8" BOLT
SIZE PER
SMACNA
B
TECHNOLOGY BLDG ROOM 213
SHEET METAL SCREW
1" x 16 GA.
HANGER STRAP
1" x 18 GA.
HANGER STRAP
B
PROJECT TITLE:
e-LEARNING
SERVICES REMODEL
REVISIONS:
DUCT
P:\~WHW Projects\2013\13012 SLCC eLearning\Drawings\13012 SLCC eLearning Mech.rvt
DESCRIPTION
DUCTS < 20"
20" DIA TO 36" DIA.
DUCTS > 36"
A4
MARK DATE
ROUND DUCT SUPPORT DETAIL
ISSUE DATE:15 MARCH 2013
SCALE: NONE
DOC. TYPE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
CURRENT REVISION DATE: 03/08/13
SLCC PROJECT NO: F13011
BLDG&RM#: TECHNOLOGY BLDG - ROOM 213
FILE: 005.213 eLEARNING REMODEL.rvt
DRAWN BY: BL
A
A
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
CHECKED BY: WP
COPYRIGHT: STATE OF UTAH
SHEET TITLE:
MECHANICAL DETAILS
SHEET NUMBER:
1
2
3
4
5
ME502
p. 39
DFCM
2
3
4
5
DIFFUSER AND GRILLE SCHEDULE
D
MARK
D-1
COUNT
6
MAX
FLOW
150 CFM
D-2
12
300 CFM
24X24
8"
D-3
7
500 CFM
24X24
D-4
1
750 CFM
R-1
11
R-2
FACE SIZE NECK SIZE CEILING TYPE
24X24
6"
LAY-IN
BLOW
4 WAY
MAX NC
25
LAY-IN
4 WAY
25
10"
LAY-IN
4 WAY
25
24X24
14"
LAY-IN
4 WAY
25
180 CFM
24X24
8X8
LAY-IN
N/A
25
3
250 CFM
24X24
10X10
LAY-IN
N/A
25
R-3
5
375 CFM
24X24
12X12
LAY-IN
N/A
25
R-4
1
600 CFM
24X24
16X16
LAY-IN
N/A
25
R-5
3
1200 CFM
24X24
22X22
LAY-IN
N/A
25
1. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR OTHER APPROVED MANUFACTURERS.
2. SHALL BE STANDARD WHITE FINISH.
C
MAKE &
MODEL
PRICE
SMD
PRICE
SMD
PRICE
SMD
PRICE
SMD
PRICE
535
PRICE
535
PRICE
535
PRICE
535
PRICE
535
TAG
DUAL DUCT BOX SCHEDULE
COOLING
HEATING
INLET
DIAMETER MAX CFM MIN CFM MAX CFM MIN CFM
6"
255 CFM
85 CFM
255 CFM
85 CFM
TYPE
DDB
#
1
COUNT
1
1,2
DDB
1E
1
8"
330 CFM
110 CFM
330 CFM
110 CFM
25
1,2
DDB
1W
1
8"
330 CFM
110 CFM
330 CFM
110 CFM
25
1,2
DDB
2
1
6"
220 CFM
75 CFM
220 CFM
75 CFM
25
1,2
DDB
3
1
6"
210 CFM
70 CFM
210 CFM
70 CFM
25
1,2
DDB
3C
1
12"
750 CFM
250 CFM
750 CFM
250 CFM
25
1,2
DDB
3E
1
12"
750 CFM
250 CFM
750 CFM
250 CFM
25
1,2
DDB
3W
1
12"
750 CFM
250 CFM
750 CFM
250 CFM
25
1,2
DDB
4
1
8"
290 CFM
100 CFM
290 CFM
100 CFM
25
DDB
5
1
10"
420 CFM
140 CFM
420 CFM
140 CFM
25
DDB
6
1
10"
410 CFM
140 CFM
410 CFM
140 CFM
25
DDB
7
1
8"
330 CFM
110 CFM
330 CFM
110 CFM
25
DDB
8
1
8"
320 CFM
110 CFM
320 CFM
110 CFM
25
DDB
9
1
8"
325 CFM
110 CFM
325 CFM
110 CFM
25
DDB
10
1
10"
525 CFM
175 CFM
525 CFM
175 CFM
25
DDB
11
1
10"
460 CFM
155 CFM
460 CFM
155 CFM
25
DDB
12
1
8"
295 CFM
100 CFM
295 CFM
100 CFM
25
DDB
13
1
14"
1600 CFM
535 CFM
1600 CFM
535 CFM
25
DDB
14
1
14"
1050 CFM
350 CFM
1050 CFM
350 CFM
25
MAX NC
25
MANUF. &
MODEL
PRICE
DDS
PRICE
DDS
PRICE
DDS
PRICE
DDS
PRICE
DDS
PRICE
DDS
PRICE
DDS
PRICE
DDS
PRICE
DDS
PRICE
DDS
PRICE
DDS
PRICE
DDS
PRICE
DDS
PRICE
DDS
PRICE
DDS
PRICE
DDS
PRICE
DDS
PRICE
DDS
PRICE
DDS
SCHEDUL
E NOTES
1,2
1,4
1,4
13037660
1,2
1,2
D
1,2,3
FACILITIES ARCHITECTS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
SALT LAKE CITY, UT 84123
1,2,3
P 801.957.4899
F 801.957.3839
1,2,3
CONSULTANTS:
1,2
1,2
1,2
ENVISION Engineering (Electrical)
244 W 300 N Suite 100
Salt Lake City UT 84103-1147
P 801.534.1130 | F 801.534.1080
www.envisioneng.com
1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2
1,2
C
PROFESSIONAl SEAL:
1,2
1,2
NAL EN
S IO
GI
ES
03/15/13
ER
NE
SCHEDULE
NOTES
1,2
PRO
F
1
Bid MW13039
WINWARD M.
PACKER
No. 375080
1. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR OTHER APPROVED MANUFACTURERS.
2. PROVIDE THERMOSTAT AND DDC CONTROLS.
3. REPLACE EXISTING THERMOSTAT IN PLACE ON THE 3RD LEVEL. FIELD VERIFY.
4. DDC CONTROLLER SHALL BE CONTROLLED OFF OF AVERAGE TEMPERATURE OF NEW THERMOSTATS IN SPACES THAT
THIS UNIT IS SERVING. FIELD VERIFY WHICH THERMOSTATS NEED TO BE AVERAGED.
ST
H
AT
E OF UTA
CAMPUS:
TAYLORSVILLE
REDWOOD CAMPUS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
TAYLORSVILLE UT
84123
BUILDING & ROOM NUMBER:
TECHNOLOGY BLDG ROOM 213
B
B
PROJECT TITLE:
e-LEARNING
SERVICES REMODEL
REVISIONS:
MARK DATE
DESCRIPTION
ISSUE DATE:15 MARCH 2013
P:\~WHW Projects\2013\13012 SLCC eLearning\Drawings\13012 SLCC eLearning Mech.rvt
DOC. TYPE: CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
CURRENT REVISION DATE: 02/21/13
SLCC PROJECT NO: F13011
BLDG&RM#: TECHNOLOGY BLDG - ROOM 213
FILE: 005.213 eLEARNING REMODEL.rvt
DRAWN BY: BL
A
A
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
CHECKED BY: WP
COPYRIGHT: STATE OF UTAH
SHEET TITLE:
MECHANICAL
SCHEDULES
SHEET NUMBER:
1
2
3
4
5
ME601
p. 40
DFCM
1
2
3
MOUNT ALL OUTLETS, DEVICES, AND EQUIPMENT AT HEIGHTS INDICATED BELOW, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE ON THE
DRAWINGS. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, HEIGHTS ARE GIVEN FROM FINISHED FLOOR TO CENTER OF OUTLET BOX.
1.
LIGHT FIXTURE SYMBOLS ARE GENERAL IN NATURE AND MAY BE SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS IN VARIOUS SIZES AND SHAPES. REFER TO THE
LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE FOR SPECIFICATION INFORMATION.
2.
ARROWS INDICATE AIMING DIRECTION.
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
WHERE OUTLETS, DEVICES AND EQUIPMENT ARE NOTED BY THE SUBSCRIPT 'A', MOUNT AT 4" ABOVE COUNTER. IF
COUNTER HAS A BACK SPLASH, MOUNT AT 4" ABOVE BACK SPLASH. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL INTERIOR ELEVATIONS
AND COORDINATE WITH CASEWORK SUPPLIER.
3.
MOUNTING
RECESSED INDIRECT FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES
FIRE ALARM SYMBOLS
SYMBOL
DESCRIPTION
MOUNTING
T
TAMPER SWITCH
AT VALVE
W
WATER FLOW INDICATOR
CEILING
SMOKE DETECTOR
CEILING
DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR
FIRE ALARM MANUAL STATION
Z
CONTROL MODULE
AT DEVICE(S) TO BE
CONTROLLED
I
MONITOR MODULE
AT DEVICE(S) TO
MONITOR
D
MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDER
H
AUDIO HORN
M
MINI AUDIO HORN
COORDINATE WITH
DOOR INSTALLER
FIRE ALARM AUDIO SPEAKER
AS SPECIFIED
OR DETAILED
WALL ABOVE
DOOR
WALL-MOUNTED EXIT SIGN W/ EMERGENCY LIGHT FIXTURE
MOUNT AT LESSOR
OF EITHER 80" AFF
OR 6" BELOW
CEILING.
WALL ABOVE
DOOR
DESCRIPTION
C
+90"
FIRE PROTECTION SPRINKLER RISER BELL
FURNISHED BY FIRE PROTECTION CONTRACTOR
AND INSTALLED AND CONNECTED BY DIV. 16000
ST
DESCRIPTION
MOUNTING
MANUAL STARTER WITH THERMAL OVERLOAD(S)
ELECTRIC MOTOR
F
+60"
FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH
+60"
CIRCUIT BREAKER AND ENCLOSURE
+60"
MAGNETIC STARTER
+60"
COMBINATION MAGNETIC STARTER / NON-FUSED DISCONNECT
+60"
COMBINATION MAGNETIC STARTER / FUSED DISCONNECT
+60"
COMB. MAGNETIC STARTER / MOTOR CIRCUIT PROTECTOR (MCP)
3 CIRCUIT, 4 WIRE BRANCH CIRCUIT HOME RUN TO PANEL
MULTIPLE WIRE BRANCH CIRCUITING BETWEEN FIXTURES,
SWITCHES, DEVICES, ETC.
EQUIPMENT GROUND AND ISOLATED
GROUND CONDUCTORS: EQUIPMENT
GROUND AND ISOLATED GROUND
CONDUCTORS ARE NOT SHOWN, BUT ARE
REQUIRED AS NOTED ON THE DRAWINGS OR
IN THE SPECIFICATIONS.
VFD
RVS
TOP AT +72" IF
WALL MOUNTED
LOAD CENTER (SURFACE-MOUNTED)
TOP AT +72"
14"W X 3"D
LOAD CENTER (FLUSH-MOUNTED)
TOP AT +72"
14"W X 3"D
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARD (SURFACE-MOUNTED)
TOP AT +72"
20"W X 6"D
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARD (FLUSH-MOUNTED)
TOP AT +72"
20"W X 6"D
REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTER
WALL
B
SWITCHBOARD
FLOOR
METER BASE
C:\Users\mcartwright.ENVISION\Documents\13-022 SLCC eLearning Remodel_13-Central_mcartwright.rvt
CONDUIT STUB-IN
+60"
HVAC THERMOSTAT
+60"
HAND - OFF - AUTO SWITCH
+60"
J
REX
S
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
MOUNT AS NOTED.
SUBSCRIPT 'F' INDICATES TO PROVIDE A
FLOOR BOX WITH BLANK COVERPLATE
JUNCTION BOX
SYMBOL
THESE SYMBOLS ARE
GENERAL IN NATURE AND
MAY VARY IN SIZE AND
SHAPE TO SUIT APPLICATION.
CROSS HATCHING INDICATES
"MAIN PANELBOARD OR
SWITCHBOARD"
NAME IS INDICATED IN
SEMI-QUOTES (I.E. 'L2A', 'MDP')
DESCRIPTION
SINGLE-POLE TOGGLE SWITCH
+48"
SINGLE-POLE TOGGLE SWITCH
+48"
2
DOUBLE-POLE TOGGLE SWITCH
+48"
3
THREE-WAY TOGGLE SWITCH
+48"
4
FOUR-WAY TOGGLE SWITCH
+48"
K
KEY-OPERATED SINGLE-POLE TOGGLE SWITCH
+48"
SINGLE-POLE TOGGLE SWITCH WITH PILOT LIGHT
+48"
D
DIMMER SWITCH
+48"
TIM
TIMER SWITCH
+48"
(2) SINGLE-POLE TOGGLE SWITCH
+48"
a
FURNISH SWITCH UNLESS
FURNISHED BY ANOTHER
DIVISION. INSTALL AND
CONNECT COMPLETE. REFER
TO RELATED SPECIFICATION
SECTIONS.
P
PROVIDED BY DIVISION
15000 U.N.O.
MOUNTING
SECTION REFERENCE
AHU
ED101
DEMOLITION PLAN MAIN LEVEL
EL101
EL800
LIGHTING PLAN MAIN LEVEL
COMCHECK
EP101
EP501
EP701
EP801
POWER PLAN MAIN LEVEL
ELECTRICAL DETAILS
ONE LINE DIAGRAM
ELECTRICAL SCHEDULES
EY101
SYSTEMS PLAN MAIN LEVEL
ARCHITECTURAL ROOM NUMBER
TOP NUMBER ABBREVIATES EQUIPMENT NAME OR TYPE;
BOTTOM NUMBER INDICATES EQUIPMENT NUMBER. REFER
TO EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE.
EQUIPMENT NAME / NUMBER
USED TO DENOTE CHANGES EITHER ISSUED BY ADDENDUM
OR DURING CONSTRUCTION AND TO DENOTE RECORD
DRAWING CHANGES.
REVISION NUMBER
GENERAL PROJECT NOTES:
ABBREVIATION SCHEDULE
NOTE: NOT ALL ABBREVIATIONS MAY BE USED.
ISO
KVA
KW
LFMC
LFNC
MCA
MLO
N.C.
N.I.C.
N.L.
N.O.
O.C.
OCP
QTY
R
REQ.
RMC
RNC
RR
SS
SCP
TR
TYP
TVSS
UF
UG
U.N.O.
W/
WP
XFMR
ISOLATED
KILO VOLT AMPERES
KILOWATTS
LIQUID-TIGHT METAL CONDUIT
LIQUID-TIGHT NONMETAL CONDUIT
MINIMUM CIRCUIT AMPS
MAIN LUGS ONLY
NORMALLY CLOSED
NOT IN CONTRACT
NIGHT LIGHT
NORMALLY OPEN
ON CENTER(S)
OVER CURRENT PROTECTION
QUANTITY
REMOVE
REQUIREMENTS
RIGID METAL CONDUIT
RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT
REMOVE AND RELOCATE
SURGE SUPPRESSION
SECURITY CONTROL PANEL
TAMPER RESISTANT
TYPICAL
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSOR
UNDER FLOOR
UNDERGROUND
UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE
WITH
WEATHER PROOF
TRANSFORMER
FACILITIES ARCHITECTS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
SALT LAKE CITY, UT 84123
P 801.957.4899
F 801.957.3839
2. THE CONTRACTOR MAY SCHEDULE A PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING , AT THEIR DISCRETION, WITH
THE ELECTRICAL ENGINEER TO REVIEW THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. THE MEETING
SHALL BE A MAXIMUM OF ONE HOUR AND SHALL TAKE PLACE AT THE ENGINEER'S OFFICE.
CONSULTANTS:
THE FOLLOWING ITEMS ARE SOME OF THE REQUIREMENTS THAT ARE LISTED IN THE
3. SPECIFICATIONS. THESE ITEMS ARE NOT ALL INCLUSIVE, AND THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE
FOR COMPLIANCE TO ALL REQUIREMENTS OF THE SPECIFICATIONS:
A.
INSULATED THROAT CONNECTORS OR PLASTIC BUSHINGS SHALL BE
UTILIZED FOR ALL CONDUIT SIZES USED ON THIS PROJECT.
B.
THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR UPSIZING CONDUCTORS FOR
VOLTAGE DROP PER THE NEC REGARDLESS OF WHETHER IT IS SHOWN ON
THE PLANS OR NOT.
C.
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL LABEL ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AS IT IS
CALLED OUT IN THE SPECIFICATIONS.
D.
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE SEISMIC SUPPORT AND BRACING FOR
ALL LIGHT FIXTURES AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AS REQUIRED BY
APPLICABLE LOCAL AND NATIONAL CODES.
USED TO BREAK DRAWINGS.
ABOVE COUNTER
AMP OR AMPS
ADJACENT
ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR
AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION
ALUMINUM
CONDUIT
CIRCUIT BREAKER
CIRCUIT
CONVENIENCE OUTLETS
COPPER
EACH
ELECTRICAL
EMERGENCY
ELECTRIC METALLIC TUBING
ELECTRIC NONMETALLIC TUBING
EQUIPMENT
ELECTRIC WATER COOLER
EXISTING
EXPLOSION PROOF
FIRE ALARM
FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL
FULL LOAD AMPS
FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
FREIGHT ON BOARD
GROUND CONDUCTOR
HAND-OFF-AUTO
HORSE POWER
ISOLATED GROUND
INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT
INSULATED
D
1. DIVISION 26000 CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR READING AND APPLYING WHAT IS IN THE
SPECIFICATIONS TO THIS PROJECT. ANYTHING THAT IS NOT INCLUDED ON THE PROJECT THAT IS
CALLED OUT IN THE SPECIFICATION SHALL BE LISTED ON THE SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
PUNCHLIST. THE CONTRACTOR WILL BE REQUIRED TO REMEDY THESE DEFICIENCIES WITHOUT
ADDITIONAL COSTS TO OWNER. THERE WILL BE NO EXCEPTIONS.
1
A
A
ADJ
AFF
AHJ
AL
C
CB
CKT
C.O.'S
CU
EA
ELEC
EM
EMT
ENT
EQUIP
EWC
E, EX
EXP
FA
FACP
FLA
FMC
FOB
GND
HOA
HP
IG
IMC
INS
13037660
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL FOLLOW THE PANELBOARD SCHEDULES AS INDICATED IN THE
4. DRAWINGS. EACH CIRCUIT BREAKER HAS BEEN ASSIGNED TO A SPECIFIC AREA OF THE BUILDING.
NO DEVIATION WILL BE ALLOWED WITHOUT WRITTEN APPROVAL FROM THE ELECTRICAL ENGINEER.
AT A MINIMUM THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL THE WIRE SIZE AS CALLED OUT ON THE
PANELBOARD SCHEDULES. HOWEVER, THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO ENSURE THE WIRE
5. IS SIZED LARGE ENOUGH TO ALLOW FOR VOLTAGE DROP.
C
DESCRIPTION
MOUNTING
REQUEST-TO-EXIT MOTION DETECTOR
REMARKS
CEILING
DOOR
ELECTROMAGNETIC DOOR STRIKE
OCCUPANCY SENSOR
CEILING
LIGHT LEVEL SENSOR
CEILING
SPLIT-WIRED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE
+18"
SIMPLEX RECEPTACLE
+18"
DUPLEX RECEPTACLE
+18"
FOURPLEX RECEPTACLE
+18"
MAGNETIC DOOR CONTACT SWITCH
DOOR
125/250V RECEPTACLE
+18"
M
MAGNETIC LOCK
DOOR
GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER DUPLEX RECEPTACLE
+18"
PK
PROXIMITY CARD READER / KEYPAD
+48"
GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER FOURPLEX RECEPTACLE
+18"
MK
MAGNETIC STRIP CARD READER / KEYPAD
+48"
EMERGENCY DUPLEX RECEPTACLE
+18"
PR
PROXIMITY CARD READER
+48"
EMERGENCY FOURPLEX RECEPTACLE
+18"
MR
MAGNETIC STRIP CARD READER
+48"
J
CLOCK SYMBOLS
DESCRIPTION
C
CLOCK
C
WALL-MOUNTED CLOCK
(5-20R)
MOUNTING
CEILING
MULTI-OUTLET ASSEMBLY
4" ABOVE
BACKSPLASH
SPECIAL PURPOSE OUTLET
+18"
PROFESSIONAL SEAL:
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY ALL MECHANICAL OVERCURRENT DEVICES FOR THE ACTUAL
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED ON THE JOB, PRIOR TO RELEASE OF ANY ELECTRICAL
6. DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT. CONTACT THE ELECTRICAL ENGINEER WITH ANY DISCREPANCIES.
THE CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE SITE BEFORE SUBMITTING THE BID, AND SHALL EXAMINE ALL
PHYSICAL CONDITIONS WHICH MAY BE MATERIAL TO THE PERFORMANCE OF HIS WORK. NO
7. ADDITIONAL PAYMENTS WILL BE ALLOWED TO THE CONTRACTOR AS A RESULT OF EXTRA WORK
MADE NECESSARY BY HIS FAILURE TO DO SO. ANY CASE OF DISCREPANCY OR LACK OF CLARITY
SHALL BE PROMPTLY IDENTIFIED TO THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE AND THE ENGINEER FOR
CLARIFICATION.
CAMPUS:
TAYLORSVILLE
REDWOOD CAMPUS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
TAYLORSVILLE UT
84123
SALT LAKE COMMUNITY COLLEGE
IT DEPARTMENT:
BOBBIE EDWARDS
PHONE: (801) 957-5156
FIRE ALARM VENDOR:
NELSON FIRE:
DONNY SCHULTZ
PHONE: (801) 468-8300
BUILDING & ROOM NUMBER:
TECHNOLOGY BLDG ROOM 213
PROJECT LOCATION
REMARKS
SUBSCRIPT KEYS SWITCH TO
FIXTURES CONTROLLED.
B
PROJECT TITLE:
eLEARNING SERVICES
REMODEL
REVISIONS:
MARK DATE
DESCRIPTION
RATE DIMMER SWITCH FOR
MAXIMUM POSSIBLE WATTAGE
DUAL LEVEL SWITCH OUTBOARD LAMPS
SEPARATELY FROM INBOARD LAMPS.
ISSUE DATE:18 MARCH 2013
GROUND FAULT PROTECTION
D
SYMBOL
TOP NUMBER INDICATES SECTION NUMBER; BOTTOM LETTER
NUMBER INDICATES WHERE SECTION IS SHOWN.
WIRING DEVICE SYMBOLS
ACCESS CONTROL SYMBOLS
SYMBOL
CAP AND MARK
INCOMING SERVICE
TOP AT +72"
OPEN - STOP - CLOSE SWITCH
GF
BRANCH CIRCUITING (U.N.O.) CONTINUATION
FLOOR OR WALL
AS SPECIFIED
COMB. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE / MOTOR CIRCUIT PROTECTOR (MCP)
POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD
T
BRANCH CIRCUITING (U.N.O.) TURNED DOWN OR
AWAY FROM OBSERVER.
TOP AT +72" IF
WALL MOUNTED
ELEVATION REFERENCE
SYMBOL SCHEDULE
WIRELESS ROUTER
BRANCH CIRCUITING (U.N.O.) TURNED UP OR TOWARDS OBSERVER.
+60"
FLOOR OR WALL
AS SPECIFIED
100
1
LONG CROSS LINES: NUMBER OF LONG
CROSS LINES INDICATES NUMBER OF
NEUTRAL CONDUCTORS REQUIRED FOR
MULTI-WIRE HOME RUNS.
REMARKS
AT EQUIPMENT
NON-FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH
DARKENED PORTION OF SIGN INDICATES
FACE(S); ARROW(S) INDICATE CHEVRON
DIRECTION(S)
SHORT CROSS LINES: NUMBER OF SHORT
CROSS LINES INDICATES NUMBER OF PHASE,
TRAVELER, AND/OR SWITCHED
CONDUCTORS REQUIRED IF GREATER THAN 1
(ONE).
GEAR AND CONTROL SYMBOLS
SYMBOL
IF SHOWN, ARROW INDICATES
AIMING DIRECTION
ARROWS: NUMBER OF ARROWS INDICATES
NUMBER OF CIRCUITS REQUIRED.
2 CIRCUIT, 3 WIRE BRANCH CIRCUIT HOME RUN TO PANEL
+48"
FIRE FIGHTERS TELEPHONE JACK
TOP NUMBER INDICATES ELEVATION NUMBER; BOTTOM
LETTER-NUMBER INDICATES WHERE ELEVATION IS
SHOWN.
REMARKS
1 CIRCUIT, 2 WIRE BRANCH CIRCUIT HOME RUN TO PANEL
NUMERIC SUBSCRIPT INDICATES CANDELLA
RATING OF STROBE (I.E. - 15, 75, 110)
DETAIL REFERENCE
BREAKLINE
FIRE ALARM AUDIO/VISUAL SPEAKER/STROBE
F
3
E-3
LIGHT FIXTURE CALLOUT (LETTER DENOTES FIXTURE TYPE)
SYMBOL
TOP NUMBER INDICATES DETAIL NUMBER; BOTTOM
LETTER-NUMBER INDICATES DRAWING SHEET WHERE
DETAIL IS SHOWN; WHERE NOT SPECIFICALLY
REFERENCED, DETAIL IS GENERAL IN NATURE AND SHALL
APPLY WHERE APPLICABLE.
THIS IS AN EXAMPLE OF AN EGRESS
LIGHT FIXTURE. EGRESS LIGHT FIXTURES
ARE HALF-SHADED DIAGONALLY.
BRANCH CIRCUITING SYMBOLS
SUBSCRIPT 'C' INDICATES
CEILING MOUNTING.
KEYED NOTE
EG001
AS NOTED
EMERGENCY LIGHT FIXTURE
COORDINATE WITH DOOR INSTALLER; SUBSCRIPT
'F' INDICATES TO MOUNT AT FLOOR LEVEL
REMARKS
CEILING
WALL-MOUNTED EXIT SIGN
SUBSCRIPT 'WP' INDICATES THAT A
WEATHER PROOF BACK BOX IS REQ.
FIRE ALARM AUDIO/VISUAL HORN/STROBE
S
RECESSED WALL-WASHER OR DIRECTIONAL DOWNLIGHT
+48"
FIRE ALARM VISUAL STROBE
MINI AUDIO/VISUAL HORN/STROBE
AS SPECIFIED
OR DETAILED
CEILING MOUNTED EXIT SIGN
SIDE OF DUCT
F
AS SPECIFIED
OR DETAILED
RECESSED DOWN LIGHT
TOP AT 72"
HEAT DETECTOR
M
1
E-1
SHEET INDEX
DESCRIPTION
AS SPECIFIED
OR DETAILED
REMARKS
XX
D
EGRESS RECESSED INDIRECT FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES
ON FIRE RISER
FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER
FSD
SYMBOL
2
E-2
D
A
REMARKS
NOT ALL ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS MAY BE USED.
4.
5
GENERAL SYMBOLS
XX
WHERE OUTLETS, DEVICES, AND EQUIPMENT ARE NOTED BY SUBSCRIPTS, REFER TO ABBREVIATION SCHEDULE FOR
DEFINED REQUIREMENTS.
2.
4
LIGHTING SYMBOLS
ELECTRICAL SYMBOL SCHEDULE GENERAL NOTES
1.
Bid MW13039
DOC. TYPE: PERMIT SET
CURRENT REVISION DATE: 07/09/12
SLCC PROJECT NO: F13011
BLDG&RM#: TECHNOLOGY BLDG - ROOM 213
RANGE -- NEMA 14-50R
DRYER -- NEMA 14-30R
FILE: 005.213 eLEARNING REMODEL.rvt
DRAWN BY: EE
A
CHECKED BY: JO
COPYRIGHT: STATE OF UTAH
SHEET TITLE:
REMARKS
SYMBOL SCHEDULE
IF SHOWN, SUBSCRIPT
INDICATES TYPE.
+90"
SHEET NUMBER:
1
2
3
4
5
EG001
p. 41
DFCM
1
2
Bid MW13039
3
4
5
GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES:
1. UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE, REMOVE ALL ELECTRICAL ITEMS SHOWN IN DARK &
DASHED LINES. LIGHT & SOLID ITEMS ARE TO REMAIN. DEMOLITION ITEMS ARE SHOWN TO
GIVE A BASIC DESCRIPTION OF THE EXTENT OF DEMOLITION WORK, BUT MAY NOT BE
INCLUSIVE. PROVIDE DEMOLITION WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING
REQUIREMENTS:
A.
DISCONNECT AND REMOVE ANY/ALL FIXTURES, DEVICES, EQUIPMENT, ETC.
REQUIRED FOR PROPER COMPLETION OF THE WORK WHETHER SHOWN OR
NOT.
B.
RELOCATE, REWIRE, AND/OR RECONNECT ANY/ALL FIXTURES, DEVICES,
EQUIPMENT, ETC. THAT FOR ANY REASON OBSTRUCTS CONSTRUCTION.
C.
D
D.
E.
LEAVE ALL EXITING FIXTURES, DEVICES, EQUIPMENT, ETC. IN PORTIONS OF THE
BUILDING NOT BEING REMODELED, IN WORKING CONDITION. RESTORE ALL
INTERRUPTED BRANCH CIRCUITS, FEEDERS, ETC.
13037660
D
REMOVE AND DISPOSE OF ALL RACEWAYS, CONDUCTORS, BOXES, DEVICES,
EQUIPMENT, ETC. THAT ARE NOT TO BE REUSED. TERMINATE AT ACCESSIBLE
JUNCTION BOX BY PROVIDING PROPER KNOCK-OUT CLOSURE, TAPE
CONDUCTORS, LABEL AS "SPARE" WITH CIRCUIT NO., ZONE NO, OR OTHER
CHARACTERISTIC IDENTIFYING SOURCE.
FACILITIES ARCHITECTS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
SALT LAKE CITY, UT 84123
EXISTING RACEWAYS MAY BE REUSED, IF IN PLACE, WHERE POSSIBLE, AND
WHERE IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE SPECIFICATIONS AND THE INTENT OF THE
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. UPGRADE AND OR PROVIDE NEW CONDUIT
SUPPORTS WHERE NECESSARY FOR ALL RACEWAYS BEING REUSED. INSURE
INTEGRITY OF EXISTING RACEWAYS BEFORE REUSE.
P 801.957.4899
F 801.957.3839
CONSULTANTS:
F. DO NOT PENETRATE STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS OF FLOORS, WALLS, CEILINGS,
ROOFS, ETC.
G.
COORDINATE WITH OWNER WHAT EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE DISPOSED OF AND
WHAT EQUIPMENT IS TO BE RETURNED TO OWNER.
H. REMOVE ALL DATA CABLING BACK TO SOURCE COMPLETE.
I.
H
J
K
L
M
N
KEYED NOTES:
P
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C
7.
#
REMOVE AND RETURN THE CLOCK TO THE OWNER.
REMOVE AND RETURN WIRELESS ACCESS DEVICE TO OWNER.
EMERGENCY POWER FROM PANEL 'EL' IN BASEMENT. MAINTAIN
POWER FOR NEW EMERGENCY LIGHTING ON EL101.
REMOVE AND DISPOSE OF POWER/DATA SURFACE RACEWAY.
EXISTING TO REMAIN.
SALVAGE MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS FOR RE-USE/RETURN TO OWNER.
MAINTAIN EXISTING CIRCUITING IN AREA FOR RE-CONNECTION TO
RELOCATED DEVICES, SEE EP101.
SALVAGE FIRE ALARM MANUAL PULL STATION FOR RE-USE/RETURN TO
OWNER.
C
PROFESSIONAL SEAL:
4
7
5
REMOVE ALL BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING NOT TO REMAIN BACK TO SOURCE COMPLETE.
CONDUITS FROM PANEL TO SPACE MAY BE RE-USED IF FOUND TO BE IN GOOD CONDITION.
6
5
1
1
5
CAMPUS:
6
TAYLORSVILLE
REDWOOD CAMPUS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
TAYLORSVILLE UT
84123
6
4
4
4
5
1
CLG
2
5
3
5
5
5
5
5
4
TECHNOLOGY BLDG ROOM 213
5
5
1
5
1
5
5
B
BUILDING & ROOM NUMBER:
5
B
5
4
eLEARNING SERVICES
REMODEL
5
6
5
C:\Users\mcartwright.ENVISION\Documents\13-022 SLCC eLearning Remodel_13-Central_mcartwright.rvt
3
6
5
REVISIONS:
5
5
PROJECT TITLE:
3
3
MARK DATE
7
5
DESCRIPTION
ISSUE DATE:18 MARCH 2013
2
DOC. TYPE: PERMIT SET
CURRENT REVISION DATE: 03/06/13
5
SLCC PROJECT NO: F13011
BLDG&RM#: TECHNOLOGY BLDG - ROOM 213
5
FILE: 005.213 eLEARNING REMODEL.rvt
DRAWN BY: EE
8
A
A
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
CHECKED BY: JO
COPYRIGHT: STATE OF UTAH
SHEET TITLE:
DEMOLITION PLAN
MAIN LEVEL
1
1
2
DEMOLITION PLAN MAIN LEVEL
1/8" = 1'-0"
3
SHEET NUMBER:
4
5
ED101
p. 42
DFCM
1
2
Bid MW13039
3
4
5
KEYED NOTES:
1.
2.
#
OCCUPANCY SENSORS SHALL BE WIRED IN PARALLEL SUCH THAT ANY SENSOR CAN
SWITCH THE LIGHTS ON IN THE COMMON SPACE. PROGRAM SENSORS FOR 1 HOUR
DELAY.
RE-USE CIRCUIT SALVAGED DURING DEMOLITION WORK. EXACT CIRCUIT NUMBER FROM
PANELS ARE UNKNOWN. INCLUDE ALL LABOR REQUIRED TO VERIFY CIRCUIT AND
MAINTAIN FOR RE-USE.
13037660
D
D
FACILITIES ARCHITECTS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
SALT LAKE CITY, UT 84123
P 801.957.4899
F 801.957.3839
CONSULTANTS:
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
C
C
PROFESSIONAL SEAL:
4
A2
A3
A2
A2
2
A2
A3
CAMPUS:
Space
213X
OFFICE
213F
OFFICE
OFFICE
213G
OFFICE
213H
OFFICE
213K
TAYLORSVILLE
REDWOOD CAMPUS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
TAYLORSVILLE UT
84123
OFFICE
213L
213M
'BL' (E)
2
(E) 'B'
X1
2
OFFICE
BL-1
213N
A2
A2
OFFICE
A2
COLLABORATION
CUBICAL AREA
213
213E
A2
213
BUILDING & ROOM NUMBER:
OFFICE
A2
213P
A2
TECHNOLOGY BLDG ROOM 213
A3
OFFICE
OFFICE
A2
213C
213D
5
A3
B
A2
B
eLEARNING SERVICES
REMODEL
X1
A2
A2
A2
OFFICE
WORKROOM
213B
213A
PROJECT TITLE:
REVISIONS:
OFFICE
213Q
MARK DATE
DESCRIPTION
6
OFFICE
213R
RECEPTION
C:\Users\mcartwright.ENVISION\Documents\13-022 SLCC eLearning Remodel_13-Central_mcartwright.rvt
213
1
X1
3
EP501
CONSULTATION
213
A2
OFFICE
213Q-A
A2
A2
ISSUE DATE:18 MARCH 2013
A2
DOC. TYPE: PERMIT SET
CURRENT REVISION DATE: 02/15/13
7
A2
SLCC PROJECT NO: F13011
CONSULTING
213T
BLDG&RM#: TECHNOLOGY BLDG - ROOM 213
CONFERENCE ROOM
FILE: 005.213 eLEARNING REMODEL.rvt
213W
A3D
DRAWN BY: EE
A3D
A2D
CONSULTING
213V
A2D
CONSULTING
213U
A
A
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
CHECKED BY: JO
COPYRIGHT: STATE OF UTAH
SHEET TITLE:
8
LIGHTING PLAN MAIN
LEVEL
SHEET NUMBER:
LIGHTING PLAN MAIN LEVEL
1
1/8" = 1'-0"
1
2
3
4
5
EL101
p. 43
DFCM
1
2
3
Bid MW13039
4
5
13037660
D
D
FACILITIES ARCHITECTS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
SALT LAKE CITY, UT 84123
P 801.957.4899
F 801.957.3839
CONSULTANTS:
C
C
PROFESSIONAL SEAL:
CAMPUS:
TAYLORSVILLE
REDWOOD CAMPUS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
TAYLORSVILLE UT
84123
BUILDING & ROOM NUMBER:
TECHNOLOGY BLDG ROOM 213
B
B
PROJECT TITLE:
eLEARNING SERVICES
REMODEL
REVISIONS:
C:\Users\mcartwright.ENVISION\Documents\13-022 SLCC eLearning Remodel_13-Central_mcartwright.rvt
MARK DATE
DESCRIPTION
ISSUE DATE:18 MARCH 2013
DOC. TYPE: PERMIT SET
CURRENT REVISION DATE: 03/14/13
SLCC PROJECT NO: F13011
BLDG&RM#: TECHNOLOGY BLDG - ROOM 213
FILE: 005.213 eLEARNING REMODEL.rvt
DRAWN BY: EE
A
A
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
CHECKED BY: JO
COPYRIGHT: STATE OF UTAH
SHEET TITLE:
COMCHECK
SHEET NUMBER:
1
2
3
4
5
EL800
p. 44
DFCM
1
2
Bid MW13039
3
4
5
KEYED NOTES:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D
5.
#
EXISTING (8) SPARE 3/4" CONDUITS STUBBED FROM PANEL 'B' INTO
CEILING SPACE OF THIS ROOM, APPROXIAMTELY 8' FROM WALL. UTILIZE
CONDUITS FOR CONVEYANCE FROM PANEL TO PROJECT AREA.
PROVIDE COMBINATION RECESSED BOX FOR POWER AND
COMMUNICATION OUTLETS FOR USE WITH FLATSCREEN MONITOR, EQUAL
TO ARLINGTION # TVB613. VERIFY EXACT MOUNTING HEIGHT AND
LOCATION WITH ARCHITECT TO MATCH MONITOR PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN.
PROVIDE WIREMOLD TWO COMPARTMENT SURFACE RACEWAY DOWN TO
DEVICES. COORDINATE EXACT MOUNTING HEIGHT AND LOCATION WITH
ARCHTIECT PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN.
PROVIDE WIREMOLD TWO COMPARTMENT FIRE RATED POKE-THRU TO
CONNECT WITH SYSTEMS FURNITURE. PROVIDE ALL PARTS AND PIECES
AS NECESSARY TO CONNECT POWER AND COMMUNICATIONS CABLES TO
FURNITURE. COORDINATE CORE LOCATION WITH SPACE BELOW.
INCLUDE ALL LABOR AND MATERIALS TO EXTEND RACEWAY IN
ACCESSIBLE LOCATIONS BELOW IN LEVEL 1 CEILING.
VERIFY EXACT MOUNTING HEIGHT AND LOCATION WITH ARCHITECT TO
MATCH WALL MOUNTED PROJECTOR PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN.
13037660
D
FACILITIES ARCHITECTS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
SALT LAKE CITY, UT 84123
P 801.957.4899
F 801.957.3839
CONSULTANTS:
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
C
C
PROFESSIONAL SEAL:
4
B-26
OFFICE
B-27 213G
B-29
B-27
B-27
B-27
B-26
OFFICE
OFFICE
213H
B-28
B-25
B-26
213K
OFFICE B-26
CAMPUS:
OFFICE
213L
213M
TAYLORSVILLE
REDWOOD CAMPUS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
TAYLORSVILLE UT
84123
OFFICE
213F
B-27
B-27
B-26
B-25
B-26
B-39
'BL' (E)
(E) 'B'
1
B-34
B-18
B-25
B-29
CUBICAL AREA
4
COLLABORATION
B-29
213
213
OFFICE
213N
B-25
OFFICE
213E
B-25
B-37
B-36
B-34
B-29
B-24
BUILDING & ROOM NUMBER:
B-28
TECHNOLOGY BLDG ROOM 213
B-17
B-32
B-32
OFFICE
OFFICE
B-32
B-32
B-11
B
B-28
B-11
A
A
A
B-8
213A
OFFICE
B-3
B-8
B-34
B-34
B-17
B-23
B-30
+44"
B-7
213Q
MARK DATE
B-8
6
B-34
B-5
C:\Users\mcartwright.ENVISION\Documents\13-022 SLCC eLearning Remodel_13-Central_mcartwright.rvt
B-5
B-5
2
OFFICE
OFFICE
213R
3
CONSULTATION
B-34
213
213Q-A
B-31
B-31
RECEPTION
2
B-31
213
ISSUE DATE:18 MARCH 2013
B-31
B-31
B-2 B-1
DOC. TYPE: PERMIT SET
B-4
B-6
B-22
B-3
B-33
5
CONFERENCE ROOM
213W
CURRENT REVISION DATE: 02/15/13
7
SLCC PROJECT NO: F13011
BLDG&RM#: TECHNOLOGY BLDG - ROOM 213
5
B-9
B-9
B-9
B-13
CONSULTING
B-13
CONSULTING
213V
213U
B-15
B-15
CONSULTING
B-22 213T
FILE: 005.213 eLEARNING REMODEL.rvt
B-13
DRAWN BY: EE
B-15
B-22
B-3
A
A
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
DESCRIPTION
B-3
B-31
B-10
REVISIONS:
B-3
OFFICE
B-34
PROJECT TITLE:
eLEARNING SERVICES
REMODEL
4
213B
B-19
B
B-24
B-8
WORKROOM
5
B-35
B-17
B-21
213P
B-24
213C
213D
OFFICE
B-17
CHECKED BY: JO
COPYRIGHT: STATE OF UTAH
SHEET TITLE:
8
POWER PLAN MAIN
LEVEL
SHEET NUMBER:
1
1
2
POWER PLAN MAIN LEVEL
1/8" = 1'-0"
3
4
5
EP101
p. 45
DFCM
1
2
Bid MW13039
3
4
5
TYPICAL WALL
OUTLET
PROVIDE CONDUIT SUPPORTS IN
ACCORDANCE WITH NEC SPACING
REQUIREMENTS FOR TYPE OF
RACEWAY REQUIRED.
BAR
STRAPS
AS REQUIRED FOR TYPE
OF CONSTRUCTION
POWER PACK
NEUTRAL
13037660
D
BLU
RED
D
BLK
PP
HOT
LOCAL
OVERRIDE
SWITCH
STEEL CITY
NO. 7501
BOX SUPPORT
LIGHTING
LOAD
CONT. OUTPUT
COMMON
+24VDC
FACILITIES ARCHITECTS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
SALT LAKE CITY, UT 84123
BAR
STRAPS
24VDC
OCCUPANCY
SENSOR
BAR
STRAPS
P 801.957.4899
F 801.957.3839
CONSULTANTS:
TYPICAL
OUTLET BOX
TYPICAL
OUTLET BOX
NOTES:
6
1.
TYPICAL FOR WOOD AND METAL STUD ROUGH-IN.
2.
PLASTER RINGS NOT SHOWN.
3.
LOCATE ALL OUTLET BOXES IN ACCORDANCE WITH ARCHITECTURAL AND MECHANICAL DRAWINGS, AND
WITH ALL APPLICABLE SHOP DRAWINGS.
4.
IN ACCORDANCE WITH UBC 4303 OUTLETS ON OPPOSITE SIDES OF WALLS OR PARTITIONS IN THE SAME
STUD SPACE MUST BE SEPARATED BY A MINIMUM OF 24" HORIZONTAL DISTANCE.
LIGHTING CONTROL WIRING DIAGRAM - MAIN AREA/CORRIDOR
7
SCALE:
STRUCTURAL
JOIST OR
BEAM
CEILING
DECK
C
TYPICAL ROUGH-IN REQUIREMENTS
SCALE: NONE
SMOKE, HEAT,
& FLAME
DETECTORS
LETTER DESIGNATES
FIXTURE TYPE.
A2
a
STROBE LIGHT
OR HORN & STROBE
DROPPED
CEILING
LOWERCASE LETTER DESIGNATES
SWITCHING OR CIRCUIT ASSIGNMENT.
ASSIGNMENTS, SUCH AS a/b, INDICATE
DUAL LEVEL SWITCHING.
STANDARD HEIGHTS
FOR AREAS WITH
CEILING DECK OR
DROPPED CEILINGS
C
ELECTRICAL PANELBOARD,
FACP PANEL OR SECURITY PANEL (TYP)
LIGHT SWITCHES
CAMPUS:
OUTLETS ABOVE COUNTER
WHICHEVER IS GREATER
NL
TAYLORSVILLE
REDWOOD CAMPUS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
TAYLORSVILLE UT
84123
FIRE
EMERGENCY FIXTURES WILL BE
UNSWITCHED NIGHT LIGHTS.
CONNECT TO UNSWITCHED HOT OF
EMERGENCY LIGHTING CIRCUIT.
PULL
BACKSPLASH
FIRE ALARM PULL STATION
10"
80"
5"
72" MAX
SHADING INDICATES EGRESS LIGHT
FIXTURE.
PUSH BUTTONS
COUNTERTOP
DATA/PHONE
OUTLETS
48" MAX.
EXIT SIGNS. CONNECT TO
UNSWITCHED HOT OF
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
CIRCUIT.
BUILDING & ROOM NUMBER:
34" MAX.
ELECTRICAL
OUTLETS
TECHNOLOGY BLDG ROOM 213
16" MIN.
B
4
PROFESSIONAL SEAL:
DISCONNECT SWITCH (TYP)
FA ANNUNCIATOR,
GENERATOR ANNUNCIATOR,
SECURITY KEYPAD (TYP)
LETTER DESIGNATES
FIXTURE TYPE.
A2
SURFACE MOUNT CONDUITS
ON CEILING. DO NOT
PENDANT MOUNT CONDUITS
TYPICAL LIGHTING CONVENTION
ADA ELEVATION DETAIL
5
SCALE: NONE
B
SCALE: NONE
PROJECT TITLE:
eLEARNING SERVICES
REMODEL
REVISIONS:
DESCRIPTION
ISSUE DATE:18 MARCH 2013
A1-40
POWER PACK
DOC. TYPE: PERMIT SET
PP
HOT
DESIGNATION OF CIRCUIT. WIRE COMPLETE.
BLU
CURRENT REVISION DATE: 03/05/13
BLK
NEUTRAL
PROVIDE 4"x4"x2-1/8" DEEP JUNCTION BOX
WITH SINGLE GANG PLASTER RING AND
EXTEND 3/4" CONDUIT WITH NYLON PULL
ROPE TO ACCESSIBLE CEILING. TERMINATE
CONDUIT IN CEILING SPACE WITH A NYLON
BUSHING. CABLE TO BE PROVIDED BY
OWNER.
RED
C:\Users\mcartwright.ENVISION\Documents\13-022 SLCC eLearning Remodel_13-Central_mcartwright.rvt
MARK DATE
LOCAL
OVERRIDE
3-WAY SWITCH
LOCAL
OVERRIDE
3-WAY SWITCH
SLCC PROJECT NO: F13011
LIGHTING
LOAD
BLDG&RM#: TECHNOLOGY BLDG - ROOM 213
FILE: 005.213 eLEARNING REMODEL.rvt
CONT. OUTPUT
COMMON
+24VDC
24VDC
OCCUPANCY
SENSOR
DRAWN BY: EE
A
A
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
COPYRIGHT: STATE OF UTAH
CONT. OUTPUT
COMMON
NONE
+24VDC
CHECKED BY: JO
24VDC
OCCUPANCY
SENSOR
SHEET TITLE:
ELECTRICAL DETAILS
2
1
2
TYPICAL OUTLET CONVENTION
3
SCALE: NONE
3
4
LIGHTING CONTROL WIRING DIAGRAM - MAIN AREA/CORRIDOR
SCALE:
SHEET NUMBER:
5
EP501
p. 46
DFCM
1
2
Bid MW13039
3
4
5
KEYNOTES:
1.
#
PANEL USED IN PROJECT, ALL OTHER ITEMS SHOWN FOR
INFORMATIONAL PURPOSES ONLY.
13037660
D
D
FACILITIES ARCHITECTS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
SALT LAKE CITY, UT 84123
P 801.957.4899
F 801.957.3839
CONSULTANTS:
EXISTING CHILLER
F
5TH LEVEL
C
C
F
EXISTING 100A
480/277V BUS
PROFESSIONAL SEAL:
EXISTING 120/208V PANEL
PANEL
'FJ'
PANEL
??
5TH LEVEL
EXISTING 100A
480/277V BUS
CAMPUS:
PANEL
'DD'
TAYLORSVILLE
REDWOOD CAMPUS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
TAYLORSVILLE UT
84123
4TH LEVEL
EXISTING 100A
480/277V BUS
PANEL
'CL'
B
PANEL
'CH'
XFMR
75 KVA
480:120/208V
PANEL
'CJ'
PANEL
'CD'
PANEL
'CPD'
BUILDING & ROOM NUMBER:
XFMR
112.5 KVA
480:120/208V
K13 RATED
PANEL
'C'
PANEL
'C1'
TECHNOLOGY BLDG ROOM 213
TVSS
B
PROJECT TITLE:
eLEARNING SERVICES
REMODEL
GUTTER EXTENSION
WITH DOOR
REVISIONS:
3RD LEVEL
C:\Users\mcartwright.ENVISION\Documents\13-022 SLCC eLearning Remodel_13-Central_mcartwright.rvt
EXISTING 100A
480/277V BUS
MARK DATE
DESCRIPTION
XFMR
150 KVA
480:120/208V
ISSUE DATE:18 MARCH 2013
1
PANEL
'BL'
PANEL
'BH'
PANEL
'BJ'
PANEL
'BD'
PANEL
1
PANEL
'B'
DOC. TYPE: PERMIT SET
CURRENT REVISION DATE: 03/06/13
SLCC PROJECT NO: F13011
2ND LEVEL
BLDG&RM#: TECHNOLOGY BLDG - ROOM 213
EXISTING 100A
480/277V BUS
FILE: 005.213 eLEARNING REMODEL.rvt
DRAWN BY: EE
1ST LEVEL
A
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
A
CHECKED BY: JO
COPYRIGHT: STATE OF UTAH
SHEET TITLE:
1
PANEL
'EL'
ONE LINE DIAGRAM
SHEET NUMBER:
1
1
2
3
EXISTING ONE LINE DIAGRAM
SCALE: NONE
4
5
EP701
p. 47
DFCM
1
2
Bid MW13039
3
4
5
GENERAL NOTES:
1.
PANEL 'B' IS EXISTING AND APPEARS ONLY TO FEED LOADS INSIDE THE PROJECT
BOUNDARY. THE INTENT IS TO REMOVE ALL CIRCUITS FEEDING DEVICES CALLED
TO BE REMOVED ON THE DEMOLITION PLAN ED101 BACK TO THE PANEL.CONDUIT
TO SPACE MAY BE RE-USED IF FOUND TO BE IN GOOD CONDITION.
VERIFY ALL EXISTING LOADS FROM PANEL 'B'. SHOULD CIRCUIT BREAKERS FEED
LOADS BEYOND THE PROJECT BOUNDARY, MAINTAIN THESE AND LABEL AS
EXISTING LOAD.
CIRCUITING NUMBERING SHOWN MAY BE REVISED AS NEEDED TO
ACCOMMODATE EXISTING LOADS AND ALLOW FOR 3 CIRCUIT HOMERUNS.
2.
3.
13037660
PANELBOARD SCHEDULE
PANEL NAME: B
D
(EXISTING)
MOUNTING: SURFACE
ENCLOSURE: TYPE 1
Min. A.I.C. RATING 10k
KEYED
NOTE
C
LOCATION:
MAIN TYPE:
BUS RATING:
MCB RATING:
VOLTAGE: 120/208 Wye
PHASE: 3
WIRES: 4
CKT
#
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
AMPS POLE
PRINTER RECPT
20 A
1
1
OFFICE 213Q
20 A
1
3
RECEPTION 213
20 A
1
5
COPIER
20 A
1
7
CONFERENCE ROOM 213W
20 A
1
9
EXISTING LOAD
20 A
1
11
CONSULTING 213V, 213U
20 A
1
13
CONSULTING 213U
20 A
1
15
EXISTING LOAD
20 A
1
17
WORKROOM 213A RECPT
20 A
1
19
WORKROOM 213A RECPT
20 A
1
21
WORKROOM 213A RECPT
20 A
1
23
OFFICE 213M, 213N
20 A
1
25
OFFICE 213G, 213H
20 A
1
27
OFFICE 213F, 213E
20 A
1
29
OFFICE 213R, 213Q-A
20 A
1
31
PRINTER
20 A
1
33
SYS FURNITURE POKETHRU
20 A
1
35
PRINTER
20 A
1
37
EXISTING LOAD
20 A
1
39
SPARE
0A
1
41
TOTAL CONNECTED LOAD PER PHASE (VA)
TOTAL CONNECTED CURRENT PER PHASE (AMPS)
LOAD CLASSIFICATION
Power
Receptacle
A
1200
B
1000
900
180
1000
540
1000
360
0
720
1000
1500
540
720
1200
800
1600
720
540
1160
360
0
1160
1200
0
0
1200
900
C
540
1080
1080
1260
720
1000
1000
1260
0
540
10420 VA
87 A
CONNECTED LOAD
26680 VA
3480 VA
540
0
10120 VA
85 A
DEMAND FACTOR
100.00%
100.00%
0
0
9980 VA
83 A
CKT
#
POLE
2
1
4
1
6
1
8
1
10
1
12
1
14
1
16
1
18
1
20
1
22
1
24
1
26
1
28
1
30
1
32
1
34
1
36
1
38
3
40
-42
--
ESTIMATED DEMAND
26680 VA
3480 VA
D
FEED FROM:
TVSS: NONE
NEUTRAL RATING: 225
ISOLATED GROUND: No
Space 213X
MLO
225 A
NONE
AMPS
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
---
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
SM REFRIGERATOR RECPT
SM REFRIGERATOR RECPT
SM REFRIGERATOR RECPT
EXISTING LOAD
RECEPTION SYS FURNITURE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
PRINTER
SPARE
CONSULTING 213T
OFFICE 213P
OFFICE 213K, 213L
OFFICE 213P
REFRIGERATOR
OFFICE 213D, 213C
CUBICLE AREA/HALLWAYS
SYSTEMS FURN POKETHRU
SPARE
---
FACILITIES ARCHITECTS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
SALT LAKE CITY, UT 84123
KEYED
NOTE
P 801.957.4899
F 801.957.3839
CONSULTANTS:
---
C
PROFESSIONAL SEAL:
PANEL TOTALS
Total Conn. Load:
25% OF LARGEST MOTOR:
Total Est. Demand:
Total Conn. Current:
Total Est. Demand Current:
30160 VA
30160 VA
84 A
84 A
CAMPUS:
TAYLORSVILLE
REDWOOD CAMPUS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
TAYLORSVILLE UT
84123
PANELBOARD SCHEDULE NOTES:
1. PROVIDE CLASS A GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKER.
2. PROVIDE ARC FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKER.
3. PROVIDE 30 MILLIAMPERE EQUIPMENT GROUND FAULT PROTECTOR TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKER.
4. PROVIDE SHUNT-TRIP TYPE CIRCUIT BREAKER WITH 120V COIL.
5. PROVIDE HACR RATED CIRCUIT BREAKER.
6. PROVIDE HANDLE CLAMP FOR HOLDING CIRCUIT BREAKER IN THE "ON" OR "OFF" POSITION.
7. PROVIDE SWITCHING RATED CIRCUIT BREAKER.
8. UTILIZE EXISTING SPARE CIRCUIT BREAKER IN PANEL.
9. EXISTING LOAD.
BUILDING & ROOM NUMBER:
TECHNOLOGY BLDG ROOM 213
B
LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE
TYPE
A2
A3
C:\Users\mcartwright.ENVISION\Documents\13-022 SLCC eLearning Remodel_13-Central_mcartwright.rvt
B
A2D
A3D
MANUFACTURER
PINNACLE
SERIES
AD24R-2T8
LITHONIA
2AB8-2-32-MDR
CORELITE
R3-WD-2T8
PINNACLE
AD24R-3T8
LITHONIA
2AB8-3-32-MDR
CORELITE
R3-WD-3T8
PINNACLE
AD24R-2T8
LITHONIA
2AB8-2-32-MDR
CORELITE
R3-WD-2T8
PINNACLE
AD24R-3T8
LITHONIA
2AB8-3-32-MDR
CORELITE
R3-WD-3T8
LOAD (VA)
58
MOUNTING
RECESSED
NO.
2
LAMPS
TYPE
F32 T8
WATTS
32
COLOR (KELVIN)
3500K
DESCRIPTION
RECESSED INDIRECT CENTER BASKET
24" W X 48" L X 4.75" H
ELECTRONIC PROGRAM START BALLAST
BALLAST FACTOR 0.87 THD<10
ROUND PERF LENS FINISH
VOLTAGE
120/277
CRI
-
RECESSED INDIRECT CENTER BASKET
24" W X 48" L X 4.75" H
ELECTRONIC PROGRAM START BALLAST
BALLAST FACTOR 0.87 THD<10
ROUND PERF LENS FINISH
SEALED LAMP COMPARTMENT WITH HINGED ACCESS TO LAMPS
120/277
84
RECESSED
3
F32 T8
32
3500K
-
RECESSED INDIRECT CENTER BASKET
24" W X 48" L X 4.75" H
ELECTRONIC 0-10V DIMMING BALLAST
ROUND PERF LENS FINISH
SEALED LAMP COMPARTMENT WITH HINGED ACCESS TO LAMPS
120/277
64
RECESSED
2
F32 T8
32
3500K
-
RECESSED INDIRECT CENTER BASKET
24" W X 48" L X 4.75" H
ELECTRONIC 0-10V DIMMING BALLAST
ROUND PERF LENS FINISH
SEALED LAMP COMPARTMENT WITH HINGED ACCESS TO LAMPS
120/277
PROJECT TITLE:
eLEARNING SERVICES
REMODEL
REMARKS
REVISIONS:
MARK DATE
DESCRIPTION
ISSUE DATE:18 MARCH 2013
VERIFY DIMMER COMPATIBILITY
WITH BALLAST PROVIDED
DOC. TYPE: PERMIT SET
91
RECESSED
3
F32 T8
32
3500K
CURRENT REVISION DATE: 03/08/13
VERIFY DIMMER COMPATIBILITY
WITH BALLAST PROVIDED
SLCC PROJECT NO: F13011
BLDG&RM#: TECHNOLOGY BLDG - ROOM 213
X1EL
DUAL-LITE
ISOLITE
EVENLITE
EXITRONIX
LE-X-SG-X-WA
ELT-AC-G-1C-CBA-RC-AL
SOV-AC-G-1C-CBA-XX-AL
902-U-LB-GC-CL-CBA
ALUMINUM HOUSING/MOUNT, CLEAR ACRYLIC EDGE LIT EXIT SIGN
AC ONLY, LETTER COLOR:GREEN
HOUSING COLOR: CBA ; NUMBER OF FACES: 1
120/277
5
REFER
TO
PLANS
5
LED
-
-
-
COORDINATE CHEVRON
REQUIREMNTS WITH DRAWINGS
FILE: 005.213 eLEARNING REMODEL.rvt
DRAWN BY: EE
FIXTURE ABBREVIATIONS, GENERAL NOTES AND REQUIREMENTS
ABBREVIATION SCHEDULE
A
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
A
LIGHT FIXTURE GENERAL NOTES
CHECKED BY: JO
COPYRIGHT: STATE OF UTAH
A.F.F.
WALL@CLG.
CCBA
SCBA
CFBA
SFBA
MOD
1
2
ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR
WALL MOUNT AT CORNER OF WALL AND CEILING
CUSTOM PAINTED COLOR AS SELECTED BY THE ARCHITECT
STANDARD PAINTED COLOR AS SELECTED BY THE ARCHTECT
CUSTOM FINISH AS SELECTED BY THE ARCHITECT
STANDARD FINISH AS SELECTED BY THE ARCHITECT
MODIFY STANDARD LIGHT FIXTURE AS INDICATED
3
1.
4
REFER TO THE ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING PLANS FOR LOCATIONS OF LIGHT FIXUTURES. BRING
ALL DISCREPANCIES OF LOCATIONS AND QUANTITIES TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO
BIDDING.
2.
REFER TO THE ARCHITECTURAL ELEVATIONS FOR MOUNTING HEIGHTS AND LOCATIONS OF LIGHT
FIXTURES. BRING ALL DISCREPANCIES TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ARCHITECT PRIOR TO BIDDING.
3.
REFER TO THE SPECIFICATIONS FOR OTHER LIGHT FIXTURE, BALLAST, AND LAMP REQUIREMENTS AND
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS.
4.
REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR LOUVER REQUIREMENTS (IF ANY).
5.
CONFIRM AVAILABLE MOUNTING DEPTHS OF ALL LIGHT FIXTURES AND COMPARE WITH DEPTHS SHOWN
ON SHOP DRAWING. BRING ALL POTENTIAL CONFLICT AREAS TO THE ATTENDTION OF THE ARCHITECT
AND ELECTRICAL ENGINEER PRIOR TO RELEASE.
5
SHEET TITLE:
ELECTRICAL
SCHEDULES
SHEET NUMBER:
EP801
p. 48
DFCM
1
2
Bid MW13039
3
4
5
KEYED NOTES:
1.
2.
3.
#
RE-INSTALL MANUAL FIRE ALARM PULL BOX SALVAGED DURING
DEMOLITION WORK.
RE-INSTALL EXISTING MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDER SALVEGED DURING
DEMOLITION WORK. EXTEND BRANCH CIRCUIT AS NECESSARY.
NEW MANUAL FIRE ALARM PULLSTATION.
GENERAL FIRE ALARM NOTES:
1.
2.
D
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
CONFIRM ALL WIRING REQUIREMENTS WITH FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
SUPPLIER, NELSON FIRE, AND PROVIDE IN ACCORDANCE THEREWITH.
THE SYSTEM SHALL BE PROGRAMMED SO THAT IF ANY INITIATION
DEVICE IS ACTUATED, AN ALARM SIGNAL WHICH IS AUDIBLE
THROUGHOUT THE BUILDING WILL BE ACTIVATED.
WIRING SHALL BE CONTINUOUS FROM ONE DEVICE TO ANOTHER. NO
SPLICING IS ALLOWED.
ALL FIRE ALARM CABLING SHALL BE RUN IN CONDUIT. MINIMUM
CONDUIT SIZE SHALL BE 3/4". CONTRACTOR SHALL SPRAY PAINT ALL
JUNCTION BOXES ASSOCIATED WITH THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM "FIRE
ENGINE RED".
THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SUPPLIER SHALL PROVIDE A COMPUTER
DRAFTED PLAN OF THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PER ALL REQUIREMENTS
OF THE SPECIFICATIONS. REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION.
ALL NOTIFICATION DEVICE CIRCUIT VOLTAGE DROP CALCULATIONS
SHALL BE DONE IN COMPLIANCE WITH NFPA 72 2007 SECTION 4.4.4.1.
THE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SUPPLIER TO DETERMINE THE AMOUNT
NOTIFICATION DEVICE CIRCUITS THAT ARE REQUIRED BASED ON THE
NUMBER OF NOTIFICATION DEVICES SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS.
SUBMIT THE FIRE ALARM INSTALLATION DRAWINGS AND
MANUFACTURERS CUTSHEETS TO THE LOCAL AUTHORITY HAVING
JURISDICTION FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL PRIOR TO THE ROUGH-IN OF
THE SYSTEM.
VERIFY AND COMPLY WITH ALL LOCAL AND NATIONAL CODES.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SUPPLIER TO PROVIDE A COPY OF PROGRAMMING
CODES AND OPERATION MANUALS IN A SLEEVED BINDER ATTACHED TO
THE FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL.
C
13037660
D
FACILITIES ARCHITECTS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
SALT LAKE CITY, UT 84123
P 801.957.4899
F 801.957.3839
CONSULTANTS:
C
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
CAMPUS:
1
OFFICE
4
OFFICE
213G
OFFICE
213H
213K
TAYLORSVILLE
REDWOOD CAMPUS
4600 S REDWOOD RD
TAYLORSVILLE UT
84123
OFFICE
213L
OFFICE
OFFICE
213F
213M
FIRE ALARM
JUNCTION BOX
2
OFFICE
BUILDING & ROOM NUMBER:
213N
CUBICAL AREA
COLLABORATION
213
213
TECHNOLOGY BLDG ROOM 213
OFFICE
213E
B
PROFESSIONAL SEAL:
OFFICE
B
213P
OFFICE
213D
eLEARNING SERVICES
REMODEL
OFFICE
213C
PROJECT TITLE:
5
REVISIONS:
MARK DATE
WORKROOM
213A
OFFICE
C:\Users\mcartwright.ENVISION\Documents\13-022 SLCC eLearning Remodel_13-Central_mcartwright.rvt
2
2
DESCRIPTION
OFFICE
213B
213Q
6
OFFICE
DOC. TYPE: PERMIT SET
213Q-A
OFFICE
CONSULTATION
ISSUE DATE:18 MARCH 2013
213R
213
CURRENT REVISION DATE: 03/04/13
RECEPTION
213
SLCC PROJECT NO: F13011
3
BLDG&RM#: TECHNOLOGY BLDG - ROOM 213
7
FILE: 005.213 eLEARNING REMODEL.rvt
DRAWN BY: EE
CONFERENCE ROOM
CONSULTING
213W
A
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
A
213T
CONSULTING
213V
CONSULTING
CHECKED BY: JO
COPYRIGHT: STATE OF UTAH
213U
SHEET TITLE:
SYSTEMS PLAN MAIN
LEVEL
8
SHEET NUMBER:
1
1
2
SYSTEMS PLAN MAIN LEVEL
1/8" = 1'-0"
3
4
5
EY101
p. 49
DFCM
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Bid MW13039
p. 50
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
SECTION
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
PAGES
Table of Contents ......................................................................................................................................... 2
DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000 Summary ..................................................................................................................................... 3
012900 Payment Procedures .................................................................................................................... 3
013100 Project Management and Coordination....................................................................................... 8
013200 Construction Progress Documentation........................................................................................ 1
013300 Submittal Procedures .................................................................................................................. 6
014000 Quality Requirements ................................................................................................................. 7
015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls .............................................................................................. 5
017300 Execution .................................................................................................................................... 7
017823 Operation and Maintenance Data ................................................................................................ 7
017839 Project Record Documents.......................................................................................................... 4
DIVISION 04 – UNIT MASONRY
042000 Unit Masonry .............................................................................................................................. 3
DIVISION 06 – WOOD AND PLASTIC
061000 Rough Carpentry ......................................................................................................................... 2
DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
079200 Joint Sealants .............................................................................................................................. 2
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
081113 Hollow Metal Door Frames ........................................................................................................ 2
081416 Flush Wood Doors ...................................................................................................................... 3
084113 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts............................................................................ 3
087100 Door Hardware............................................................................................................................ 6
088000 Glazing ........................................................................................................................................ 2
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing .................................................................................................... 2
092900 Gypsum Board ............................................................................................................................ 2
095113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings ........................................................................................................... 3
096513 Resilient Base and Accessories ................................................................................................... 3
096800 Tile Carpeting ............................................................................................................................. 1
099100 Painting ....................................................................................................................................... 4
101100 Visual Display Surfaces .............................................................................................................. 4
102600 Wall and Door Protection ........................................................................................................... 2
DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
230100
General Requirements ............................................................................................................. 14
230500
Basic Materials and Methods ................................................................................................... 9
230553
Mechanical Identification ......................................................................................................... 5
230593
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing .......................................................................................... 14
230700
HVAC and Plumbing Insulation ............................................................................................. 17
230900
Automatic Temperature Controls .............................................................................................. 7
233113
Metal Ducts ............................................................................................................................. 12
233300
Duct Accessories ...................................................................................................................... 8
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
1
p. 51
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
233600
233713
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Dual Duct Boxes ...................................................................................................................... 6
Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles................................................................................................ 3
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
260000
Table of Contents ..................................................................................................................... 1
260001
Electrical General Provisions ................................................................................................... 7
260070
Electrical Connections for Equipment...................................................................................... 2
260072
Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints ............................................................................... 4
260080
Electrical Demolition ................................................................................................................ 2
260110
Conduit Raceways ..................................................................................................................... 4
260120
Conductors and Cables .............................................................................................................. 6
260135
Electrical Boxes and Fittings .................................................................................................... 4
260140
Wiring Devices .......................................................................................................................... 5
260510
Interior Building Lighting ......................................................................................................... 4
280721
Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System_Existing .................................................................. 5
APPENDIX
ICC-ES Report ESR-1289 Suspended Gypsum Board Ceilings
ICC-ES Report ESR-3336 Suspended Acoustical Tile Ceilings
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
2
p. 52
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Work covered by the Contract Documents.
Type of the Contract.
Work phases.
Use of premises.
Owner's occupancy requirements.
Work restrictions.
Specification formats and conventions.
Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Summary" for division of responsibilities for the
Work.
Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures
governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
Project Identification: eLearning Services Remodel.
1.
Project Location: SLCC Taylorsville Redwood Campus, 4600 S. Redwood Road,
Taylorsville, UT 8412, in the Rampton Technology Building, 4511 S 1905 W,
Taylorsville, UT 84123.
B.
Owner: State of Utah, Division of Facilities Construction & Maintenance, 4110 State Office
Building, Salt Lake City, UT 84114
1.
Agency: Salt Lake Community College, Division of Facilities Services, Redwood
Campus, 4600 S. Redwood Rd., Taylorsville, UT 84123.
C.
Architect: SLCC, Division of Facilities Services, College Architect, 4600 S. Redwood Road,
GFSB 141, Taylorsville, UT 84123.
D.
The Work consists of the following:
SUMMARY
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
011000 - 1
p. 53
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.4
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
1.
The Work includes the remodel (demolition and new construction) of Alcove 200B, and
Rooms 213, 213A, 213B, 213C, 213D, 213E, 213F, 213G, 215, 217, 219, and 221 in the
Rampton Technology Building on the Taylorsville Redwood Campus of Salt Lake
Community College, in Taylorsville, Utah.
2.
The Work will be issued in one bid package:
TYPE OF CONTRACT
A.
1.5
Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
USE OF PREMISES
A.
General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of
Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's
right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.
1.
During construction, the Contractor is to meter and pay utilities related to Contractor’s
activities including electrical, water, gas, telephone, etc.
2.
Refer to Item 1.7.B. below for further instructions regarding utilities.
B.
Use of Site: Limit use of premises to areas that do not conflict with the SLCC’s operations.
Design Team will develop a staging plan to be reviewed and approved by the SLCC. Do not
disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Limits: Confine constructions operations to areas approved in staging plan..
Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site as agreed to in the
preconstruction meeting and indicated on the staging plan..
Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways parking areas, loading areas, and entrances
serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency
vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a.
b.
1.6
Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.
Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of
materials and equipment on-site.
OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.7
Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy a portion of the site and existing adjacent buildings
during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to
minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with
Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated.
WORK RESTRICTIONS
A.
On-Site Work Hours: Work shall be generally performed during hours of operation that are
acceptable to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Contractor shall confirm and obey all
applicable restrictions and regulations.
SUMMARY
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
011000 - 2
p. 54
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
B.
1.8
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or
others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
C.
Bid MW13039
Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission.
Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of
entrances, operable windows, or outdoor air intakes.
SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A.
Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the
16-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.
1.
2.
B.
Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help crossreferencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric
sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are
not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to
determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents.
Division 01: Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in
the Specifications.
Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1.
2.
Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract
Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate.
Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words
shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where
applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.
Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor.
Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for
clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by
others when so noted.
a.
The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context,
are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 011000
SUMMARY
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
011000 - 3
p. 55
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and
process Applications for Payment. Where there is a conflict between the requirements of this
Section and the requirements of the General Conditions, the General Conditions requirements
shall prevail.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
General Conditions, Article 8, Payments and Completion
C.
The word Contractor in this document means the same as Design/Build Team.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract
Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's
Applications for Payment.
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.
Prepare schedule of values on the form approved and provided by DFCM
B.
When approved, including any approved modifications, by the DFCM Representative, the
Schedule of Values form shall be the basis for future Contractor Applications for Payments.
1.5
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A.
Each Application for Payment shall be on a special form approved and provided by DFCM.
B.
Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as
certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.
C.
Transmittal: Submit 4 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to
Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien
and similar attachments if required by DFCM.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
012900 - 1
p. 56
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.
D.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after
deduction for retainage, on each item.
When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.
Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers.
Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity
involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully
entitled to a lien.
Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to
Owner.
List of subcontractors.
Schedule of Values.
Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).
Report of preconstruction conference.
Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
Performance and payment bonds.
Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.
Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial
Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of
the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1.
2.
G.
Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
F.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's
liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by
the previous application.
1.
E.
Bid MW13039
Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting
documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof
that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
Evidence that claims have been settled.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
012900 - 2
p. 57
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
8.
9.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of
date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed
responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
Final, liquidated damages settlement statement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012900
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
012900 - 3
p. 58
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
If conflicts occur between this specification section and the General Conditions, the Contractor
shall follow the requirements of the General Conditions.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on
Project including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Coordination Drawings.
Administrative and supervisory personnel.
Project meetings.
Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).
B.
Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility
will be assigned to a specific contractor.
C.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and
submitting Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and
field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.
Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract
Documents.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
013100 - 1
p. 59
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
Delivery and processing of submittals.
Progress meetings.
Preinstallation conferences.
Project closeout activities.
Startup and adjustment of systems.
Project closeout activities.
Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
1.
1.5
Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure
maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to
ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and
repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.
Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts
and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
D.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees
at meetings.
1.
C.
Bid MW13039
Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually
incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials
that are designated as Owner's property.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability
necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if
coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.
1.
Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed
data. Include the following information, as applicable:
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
013100 - 2
p. 60
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
B.
Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,
structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.
Indicate required installation sequences.
Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of
dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum
clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of
such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be
considered changes to the Contract.
Submit five copies where Coordination Drawings are required for operation and
maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two copies; remainder will be
returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Drawing.
Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those
Sections.
Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key
personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project
site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone
numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and
telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to
Project.
1.
1.6
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches.
Number of Copies: Submit two opaque copies of each submittal. Architect will return
one copy.
a.
4.
Bid MW13039
Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each
temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.
ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL
A.
1.7
General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory
personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.
PROJECT MEETINGS
A.
General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the
meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three
days of the meeting.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
013100 - 3
p. 61
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
B.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Preconstruction Conference:
Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting
construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after
execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location.
Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
1.
2.
Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned
parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar
with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
3.
C.
Bid MW13039
Tentative construction schedule.
Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
Designation of key personnel and their duties.
Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
Procedures for RFIs.
Procedures for testing and inspecting.
Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
Distribution of the Contract Documents.
Submittal procedures.
Preparation of Record Documents.
Use of the premises.
Work restrictions.
Owner's occupancy requirements.
Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
Parking availability.
Office, work, and storage areas.
Equipment deliveries and priorities.
First aid.
Security.
Progress cleaning.
Working hours.
Minutes: Contractor shall Record and distribute meeting minutes.
Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each
construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1.
2.
Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or
affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect
of scheduled meeting dates.
Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
The Contract Documents.
Options.
Related RFIs.
Related Change Orders.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
013100 - 4
p. 62
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
y.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Purchases.
Deliveries.
Submittals.
Review of mockups.
Possible conflicts.
Compatibility problems.
Time schedules.
Weather limitations.
Manufacturer's written recommendations.
Warranty requirements.
Compatibility of materials.
Acceptability of substrates.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Space and access limitations.
Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
Testing and inspecting requirements.
Installation procedures.
Coordination with other work.
Required performance results.
Protection of adjacent work.
Protection of construction and personnel.
Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including
required corrective measures and actions.
Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who
should have been present.
Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the
Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals.
meetings with preparation of payment requests.
1.
2.
Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,
subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in
planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these
meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized
to conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,
in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction
behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to
do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and
subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
1)
Review schedule for next period.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Coordinate dates of
013100 - 5
p. 63
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
b.
Interface requirements.
Sequence of operations.
Status of submittals.
Deliveries.
Off-site fabrication.
Access.
Site utilization.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Work hours.
Hazards and risks.
Progress cleaning.
Quality and work standards.
Status of correction of deficient items.
Field observations.
RFIs.
Status of proposal requests.
Pending changes.
Status of Change Orders.
Pending claims and disputes.
Documentation of information for payment requests.
Minutes: Contractor shall Record the meeting minutes.
Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who
should have been present.
a.
1.8
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
20)
3.
4.
Bid MW13039
Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress
meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue
revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs)
A.
Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents,
and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the
form specified.
1.
2.
B.
RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor
will be returned with no response.
Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's
work or work of subcontractors.
Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Project name.
Date.
Name of Contractor.
Name of Architect.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
013100 - 6
p. 64
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number.
Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as
indicated above.
1.
E.
Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.
Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it.
Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m.
will be considered as received the following working day.
1.
The following RFIs will be returned without action:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
Requests for approval of submittals.
Requests for approval of substitutions.
Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.
Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will start again.
Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to
Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."
a.
F.
Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions,
thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials,
assemblies, and attachments.
Hard-Copy RFIs: DFCM Standard Form
1.
D.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
RFI number, numbered sequentially.
Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time
or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
Contractor's signature.
Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop
Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.
a.
C.
Bid MW13039
If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or
the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI
response.
On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response
to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor
disagrees with response.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
013100 - 7
p. 65
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
G.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.
Submit log weekly.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Project name.
Name and address of Contractor.
Name and address of Architect.
RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.
RFI description.
Date the RFI was submitted.
Date Architect's response was received.
Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and
Proposal Request, as appropriate.
Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as
appropriate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 013100
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
013100 - 8
p. 66
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress
of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1.
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values.
2.
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and
distributing meeting and conference minutes.
3.
Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.
4.
Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and
inspections.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
1.
Comply with the requirements of the Owner / Contractor agreement and section 4.7 of
the General Conditions.
END OF SECTION 013200
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
013200 - 1
p. 67
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.3
Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and
the Schedule of Values.
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and
distributing meeting and conference minutes and for submitting Coordination Drawings.
Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports.
Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties.
Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings,
Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.
Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and
maintenance manuals.
Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting videotapes of
demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.
Divisions 02 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those
Sections.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.
General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will be provided by
Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
013300 - 1
p. 68
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.
2.
Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring
coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress
Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of
related construction activities.
a.
D.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a.
C.
Bid MW13039
Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for
resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of
submittal.
Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1.
2.
3.
Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
Provide a space on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval
markings and action taken by Architect.
Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Project name.
Date.
Name and address of Architect.
Name and address of Contractor.
Name and address of subcontractor.
Name and address of supplier.
Name of manufacturer.
Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
1)
i.
j.
k.
l.
Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a
decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals
shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,
061000.01.A).
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
Other necessary identification.
E.
Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract
Documents on submittals.
F.
Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and
handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. If retaining last option in
subparagraph below, insert a sample of the form to be used at end of Section.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
013300 - 2
p. 69
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Transmittal Form: Use Contractor’s standard transmittal form. Include relevant
information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on
previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents,
including minor variations and limitations. Include same label information as related
submittal.
G.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
H.
Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "REVIEWED" or
‘FURNISH AS CORRECTED,” taken by Architect.
1.5
CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES
A.
General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's CAD files will be provided to
Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project, subject to the following conditions:
1.
A signed waiver is required prior to release of CAD files. Provide a written request to the
Architect for CAD files; the architect will issue a waiver for signature.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
1.
B.
Submit electronic submittals directly to extranet specifically established for Project.
Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1.
2.
3.
If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are
not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
4.
5.
C.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
Number of Copies: Submit three copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project
Record Document.
Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless
submittal of Architect's CAD Drawings are otherwise permitted.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
013300 - 3
p. 70
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
D.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents.
following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Bid MW13039
Include the
Dimensions.
Identification of products.
Fabrication and installation drawings.
Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and
control wiring.
Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
Templates and patterns.
Schedules.
Design calculations.
Compliance with specified standards.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed
wiring.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches.
Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1.
2.
Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together
in one submittal package.
Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for qualitycontrol comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
a.
4.
Generic description of Sample.
Product name and name of manufacturer.
Sample source.
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's
property, are the property of Contractor.
Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
a.
Number of Samples: Submit 3 full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern,
texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's
product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
013300 - 4
p. 71
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A.
Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for
compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with
approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B.
Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
C.
Prepare THREE sets of bond copies. (NOTE: All printing costs of Shop Drawings shall be
borne by the General Contractor and/or the Sub-Contractor. The Sub-Contractor shall be
informed by the General Contractor to provide print copies for the General Contractor’s use.
The number of copies shall be as noted above or additional sets as directed by the General
Contractor (Minimum 3 sets in any case).
1.
Submittals MUST be reviewed, approved, stamped, signed and dated by General
Contractor prior to submitting to Architect
2.
Show Specification Section No. from Project Manual
3.
Show Sub-Contractor’s name, address, telephone & fax numbers and contact person.
4.
The above applies equally to shop drawings, samples, manuals or product submittals.
D.
Deliver submittals to ATTN: College Architect, Salt Lake Community College, 4600 S.
Redwood Road, GFSB 141,Taylorsville, UT 84123.
E.
Each item of the submittal will be logged into the SLCC College Architect’s Shop
Drawing/Sample Record, stamped “RECEIVED” and dated
3.2
ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A.
General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and
will return them without action.
B.
Distribution: All Submittals shall be routed through GSBS Architect’s Document Control
Center. If required, GSBS Document Control will distribute submittals to Architect’s
consultants for review and approval.
C.
Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp
and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:
1.
D.
REVIEWED, REJECTED, REVISE AND RESUBMIT or FURNISH AS CORRECTED
Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
without review.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
013300 - 5
p. 72
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
E.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.
END OF SECTION 013300
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
013300 - 6
p. 73
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and
quality control.
B.
Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities
are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections
may also cover production of standard products.
Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other qualityassurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required
by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of
this Section.
Division 01 Section "Allowances" for testing and inspecting allowances.
Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of
required tests and inspections.
Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction
disturbed by testing and inspecting activities.
Divisions 02 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.
B.
Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
014000 - 1
p. 74
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
completed construction comply with requirements.
enforcement activities performed by Architect.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Services do not include contract
C.
Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to
verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where
indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing,
or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the
Work will be judged.
D.
Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to
verify performance characteristics.
E.
Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project
before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or
compliance with specified criteria.
F.
Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing
agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.
G.
Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e.,
plant, mill, factory, or shop.
H.
Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation
of the Work and for completed Work.
I.
Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
J.
Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an
employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,
including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
1.
K.
1.4
Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must
be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name,
such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively
to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name.
Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a
minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with
special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish
different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the
most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but
apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
014000 - 2
p. 75
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
B.
1.5
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision
before proceeding.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
B.
Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
11.
12.
13.
D.
Specification Section number and title.
Description of test and inspection.
Identification of applicable standards.
Identification of test and inspection methods.
Number of tests and inspections required.
Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
Requirements for obtaining samples.
Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.
Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.6
Bid MW13039
Date of issue.
Project title and number.
Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
Identification of product and Specification Section.
Complete test or inspection data.
Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
014000 - 3
p. 76
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
A.
General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B.
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
C.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
D.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
E.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed
for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this
Project in material, design, and extent.
F.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the
experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according
to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where
required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.
1.
2.
NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary
Laboratory Accreditation Program.
G.
Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this
Project.
H.
Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
Notify Architect three days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.
a.
5.
6.
Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.
Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
014000 - 4
p. 77
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.7
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Contractor Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated, Contractor shall
engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. Payment for such quality-control
services shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Services:
Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal
Procedures."
C.
Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
D.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of
duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
F.
Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the
Work during performance of its services.
Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests
are conducted.
Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar
quality-control service through Contractor.
Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve
or accept any portion of the Work.
Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
Access to the Work.
Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance
and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and
replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1.
Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
014000 - 5
p. 78
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
G.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar qualitycontrol services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of date
established for commencement of the Work.
1.
1.8
Bid MW13039
Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party
involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.
SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A.
Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency or special inspector as
required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and
as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures
and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.
Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed
in the Work during performance of its services.
Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control
service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.
Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion,
which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A.
Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
3.2
Date test or inspection was conducted.
Description of the Work tested or inspected.
Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to
test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A.
General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
014000 - 6
p. 79
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.
2.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas
with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.
Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 01 Section "Cutting and
Patching."
B.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C.
Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 014000
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
014000 - 7
p. 80
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and
protection facilities.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Division 01 Section "Summary" for limitations on utility interruptions and other work
restrictions.
Divisions 02 through 16 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity
requirements for products in those Sections.
USE CHARGES
A.
General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum.
Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not
limited to, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges for electricity used by all
entities for construction operations unless otherwise agreed to in writing with Owner in which
case subparagraph 1. below may apply:
1.
Electric Power Service: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use
without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and
extensions of services as required for construction operations.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
B.
Tests and Inspections: If required, arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect
each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
015000 - 1
p. 81
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric
fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line
posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top rails.
B.
Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section " Miscellaneous
Rough Carpentry."
C.
Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections.
2.2
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A.
Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature
controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.
B.
Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel.
Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate
materials and equipment for construction operations.
1.
2.3
Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan
racks, and bookcases.
Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide
electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with not less than 1 receptacle
on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- square tack board.
Drinking water and private toilet.
Coffee machine and supplies.
Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68
to 72 deg F.
Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height.
Store combustible materials apart from building.
EQUIPMENT
A.
HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,
self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1.
2.
Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating
units is prohibited.
Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
015000 - 2
p. 82
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
3.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for
temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille
in system and remove at end of construction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the
Work.
1.
B.
3.2
Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."
Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
1.
B.
Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location,
operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
1.
Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are
cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion,
restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
C.
Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from
adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
D.
Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as
long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner.
E.
Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient
size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.
1.
2.
F.
Install electric power service, unless otherwise indicated.
Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner.
Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination
for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
015000 - 3
p. 83
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.
G.
Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Police and fire departments.
Ambulance service.
Contractor's home office.
Architect's office.
Engineers' offices.
Owner's office.
Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.
Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when
away from field office.
Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service,
including electronic mail, in common-use facilities.
1.
3.3
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all
construction personnel. Install telephone line(s) for each field office.
1.
H.
Bid MW13039
Provide DSL or T-1 line in primary field office.
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within
construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241.
Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial
Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use
permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
B.
Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs.
Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project.
Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
C.
Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle
waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction. Comply with Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements.
3.4
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that
minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable
effects.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
015000 - 4
p. 84
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."
B.
Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control:
Division 31 Section "Site Clearing."
C.
Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and
around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from
heavy rains.
D.
Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line
of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root
systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.
E.
Site Enclosure Fence: Provide fencing required to adequately secure the site during
construction.
1.
Coordinate fencing with Owner’s security requirements for the existing campus services
compound;
2.
Coordinate access with requirements for canal servicing.
F.
Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
3.5
Comply with requirements specified in
OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A.
Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B.
Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
1.
Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage.
C.
Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D.
Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1.
2.
Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01
Section "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 015000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
015000 - 5
p. 85
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Construction layout.
Field engineering and surveying.
General installation of products.
Coordination of Owner-installed products.
Progress cleaning.
Starting and adjusting.
Protection of installed construction.
Correction of the Work.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for
coordinating field engineering with other construction activities.
Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.
Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and
patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work.
Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with
Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines
and levels, and final cleaning.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and
verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction
affecting the Work.
EXECUTION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
017300 - 1
p. 86
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.
B.
2.
Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.
Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical
services.
Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public
utilities serving Project site.
Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or
Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
1.
Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of
the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.2
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate
and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting
the Work.
1.
C.
Bid MW13039
Description of the Work.
List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.
List of unacceptable installation tolerances.
Recommended corrections.
Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes or primers.
Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or
relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances
located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
C.
Space Requirements:
Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
EXECUTION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
017300 - 2
p. 87
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
D.
3.3
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include
a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the
Contract Documents.
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A.
Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are
discovered, notify Architect promptly.
B.
General: Engage a professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted surveying
practices.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
required dimensions.
Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable
tolerances.
Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established
by authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill
and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.
D.
Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and
electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.
Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
E.
Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and
levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and
duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log
available for reference by Architect.
3.4
FIELD ENGINEERING
A.
Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference
points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control
points during construction operations.
1.
EXECUTION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written
approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points
promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to
Architect before proceeding.
017300 - 3
p. 88
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
2.
B.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base
replacements on the original survey control points.
Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site,
referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having
jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Bid MW13039
Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide
temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.
Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked
construction to its original condition.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet in spaces without a suspended ceiling.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C.
Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D.
Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E.
Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
F.
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
requirements.
G.
Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component
securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.
1.
2.
3.
EXECUTION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
017300 - 4
p. 89
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
H.
Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
I.
Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
3.6
OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS
A.
Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by
Owner's construction forces.
1.
2.
3.7
Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule
for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually
agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences
in actual construction progress.
Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation
conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend
preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the
Work depend on Owner's construction.
PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate
progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1.
2.
3.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the
temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
B.
Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C.
Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1.
2.
D.
Remove liquid spills promptly.
Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
EXECUTION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
017300 - 5
p. 90
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E.
Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F.
Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure
freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G.
Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing
waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.
H.
During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
J.
Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise
deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.8
STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A.
Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation.
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B.
Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for
proper operation.
C.
Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to
inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification
requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."
3.9
Remove
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
3.10
A.
CORRECTION OF THE WORK
Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.
Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching."
EXECUTION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
017300 - 6
p. 91
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up
with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
B.
Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C.
Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired
without visible evidence of repair.
D.
Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components
that cannot be repaired.
E.
Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
END OF SECTION 017300
EXECUTION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
017300 - 7
p. 92
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and
maintenance manuals, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Summary" for coordinating operation and
maintenance manuals covering the Work of multiple contracts.
Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for
operation and maintenance manuals.
Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance
manuals.
Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for
operation and maintenance manuals.
Divisions 02 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual
requirements for the Work in those Sections.
DEFINITIONS
A.
System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular
interaction.
B.
Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Operation and maintenance documentation directory.
Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.
Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes
systems and equipment.
Final Submittal: Submit four copies of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final
inspection.
COORDINATION
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
017823 - 1
p. 93
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
A.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more
than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information
furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY
A.
Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
List of documents.
List of systems.
List of equipment.
Table of contents.
B.
List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation
and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.
C.
List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For
pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.
D.
Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance
manual.
E.
Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual,
identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the
Contract Documents.
If no designation exists, assign a designation according to
ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building
Systems."
2.2
MANUALS, GENERAL
A.
Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each
system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system.
Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Title page.
Table of contents.
Manual contents.
Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Subject matter included in manual.
Name and address of Project.
Name and address of Owner.
Date of submittal.
Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.
Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
017823 - 2
p. 94
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
C.
If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to
accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each
volume of the set.
Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by
system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,
equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.
1.
Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on
spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded
oversize sheets.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize
data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Crossreference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper
operation or maintenance of equipment or system.
Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of
contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.
Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each
tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of
equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification
Section number and title of Project Manual.
Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic
software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.
Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.
Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.
a.
b.
2.3
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed
to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project
Manual.
1.
D.
Bid MW13039
If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and
use as foldouts.
If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled
envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in
manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents,
and drawing locations.
OPERATION MANUALS
A.
Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in
individual Specification Sections and the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.
Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.
Operating standards.
Operating procedures.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
017823 - 3
p. 95
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Operating logs.
Wiring diagrams.
Control diagrams.
Piped system diagrams.
Precautions against improper use.
License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.
Descriptions: Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
Bid MW13039
Product name and model number.
Manufacturer's name.
Equipment identification with serial number of each component.
Equipment function.
Operating characteristics.
Limiting conditions.
Performance curves.
Engineering data and tests.
Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.
Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Startup procedures.
Equipment or system break-in procedures.
Routine and normal operating instructions.
Regulation and control procedures.
Instructions on stopping.
Normal shutdown instructions.
Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.
Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
Special operating instructions and procedures.
D.
Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as
installed.
E.
Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for
identification.
2.4
PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A.
Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.
Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and
sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.
B.
Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and
arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and
telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference
Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C.
Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
017823 - 4
p. 96
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Product name and model number.
Manufacturer's name.
Color, pattern, and texture.
Material and chemical composition.
Reordering information for specially manufactured products.
Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Inspection procedures.
Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.
List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.
Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.
Repair instructions.
E.
Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and
related services.
F.
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1.
2.5
Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
A.
Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include
source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service
contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.
B.
Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,
identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product,
list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,
and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.
C.
Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation
including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins.
Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly
and component removal, replacement, and assembly.
Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.
List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential
maintenance procedures:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Test and inspection instructions.
Troubleshooting guide.
Precautions against improper maintenance.
Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
017823 - 5
p. 97
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
5.
6.
E.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.
Demonstration and training videotape, if available.
Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.
1.
2.
Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,
quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.
Maintenance and Service Record:
Include manufacturers' forms for recording
maintenance.
F.
Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with
parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local
sources of maintenance materials and related services.
G.
Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and
telephone number of service agent.
H.
Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.
1.
Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
MANUAL PREPARATION
A.
Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides
an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
B.
Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care
and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment
not part of a system.
1.
2.
D.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information
for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.
Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional
manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.
Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include
only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each
product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a
tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.
Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
017823 - 6
p. 98
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.
E.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and
where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or
systems.
Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and
flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to
ensure correct illustration of completed installation.
1.
2.
F.
Bid MW13039
Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance
manuals.
Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 01 Section
"Project Record Documents."
Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation
and maintenance documentation.
END OF SECTION 017823
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
017823 - 7
p. 99
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record
Documents, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.3
Record Drawings.
Record Specifications.
Record Product Data.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.
2.
Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
3.
Divisions 02 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record
Documents of the Work in those Sections.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Record Drawings: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up Record Prints.
Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows:
a.
Final Submittal: Submit one set(s) of Record CAD Drawing files,
1)
B.
Electronic Media: CD-R.
Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal.
1.
Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals,
submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record
Product Data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RECORD DRAWINGS
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
017839 - 1
p. 100
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
A.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings
and Shop Drawings.
1.
Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,
whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the
marked-up Record Prints.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be
difficult to identify or measure and record later.
Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup
before enclosing concealed installations.
Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
B.
Bid MW13039
Dimensional changes to Drawings.
Locations and depths of underground utilities.
Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.
Revisions to electrical circuitry.
Actual equipment locations.
Duct size and routing.
Locations of concealed internal utilities.
Changes made by Change Order or Construction or Work Change Directive.
Changes made following Architect's written orders.
Field records for variable and concealed conditions.
Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing
actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked,
show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.
Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.
Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.
Record CAD Drawings: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial
Completion, review marked-up Record Prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full
set of corrected CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Format: Same CAD program, version, and operating system as the original Contract
Drawings.
Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on Record Prints.
Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.
Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution.
Architect will furnish Contractor one set of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings for
use in recording information.
a.
Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of CAD
Drawings as they relate to the Contract Drawings.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
017839 - 2
p. 101
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
b.
C.
2.
2.
3.
New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting
an alternate, substitution, or other modification.
Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record
the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly
prepared Record Drawings into Record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for
formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.
Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into
manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification
on cover sheets.
Record CAD Drawings: Organize CAD information into separate electronic files that
correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet
identification. Include identification in each CAD file.
Identification: As follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Project name.
Date.
Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."
Name of Architect.
Name of Contractor.
RECORD SPECIFICATIONS
A.
Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
CAD Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in AutoCad 2007.
Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location.
1.
2.2
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing Record
Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop
Drawings are suitable to show actual installation.
1.
D.
Bid MW13039
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to
provide a record of selections made.
For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in
operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data.
Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where
applicable.
RECORD PRODUCT DATA
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
017839 - 3
p. 102
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
A.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Bid MW13039
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where
applicable.
MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS
A.
Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous
record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file
miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE
A.
Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project
Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as
they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.
B.
Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the
field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project
Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and
in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to
Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
END OF SECTION 017839
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
017839 - 4
p. 103
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals:
1.
Samples for face brick and colored mortar.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
UNIT MASONRY
A.
2.2
Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.
MASONRY UNITS
A.
Face Brick: Match existing modular brick in color, texture, and size as closely as possible.
1.
2.3
Size: 3-1/2 or 3-5/8 inches (89 or 92 mm) wide by 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) high by 8
inches (203 mm) long.
MORTAR AND GROUT
A.
Mortar: ASTM C 270, proportion specification.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.4
Use masonry cement mortar.
Do not use calcium chloride in mortar.
For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for
interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions, and for other
applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.
Colored Mortar: For face brick, use colored cement or cement-lime mix of color
selected.
Grout: ASTM C 476 with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (200 to 280 mm).
REINFORCEMENT, TIES, AND ANCHORS
A.
Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A 951.
1.
2.
3.
Coating: Mill galvanized at interior walls.
Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter.
Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter.
UNIT MASONRY
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
042000 - 1
p. 104
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
4.
5.
6.
2.5
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter.
For single-wythe masonry, provide either ladder design or truss design.
For multiwythe masonry, provide ladder design with three side rods.
MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A.
Proprietary Acidic Masonry Cleaner: Product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner
manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units.
1.
Manufacturers: One of the following:
a.
b.
c.
Diedrich Technologies, Inc.
EaCo Chem, Inc.
ProSoCo, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Cut masonry units with saw. Install with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
B.
Mix units for exposed unit masonry from several pallets or cubes as they are placed to produce
uniform blend of colors and textures.
C.
Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.
D.
Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back units; do not tooth.
E.
Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates,
beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height and install compressible filler in joint
between top of partition and underside of structure above.
G.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard unless otherwise indicated.
H.
Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction.
I.
Set firebox brick in full bed of refractory mortar with full head joints.
approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide and tool smooth.
J.
Set clay flue liners in full beds of refractory mortar to comply with ASTM C 1283.
3.2
Make joints
LINTELS
A.
Install lintels where indicated.
B.
Minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
UNIT MASONRY
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
042000 - 2
p. 105
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
3.3
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
FLASHING AND WEEP HOLES
A.
Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other
obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wall, and where indicated.
B.
Place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal penetrations
in flashing before covering with mortar.
1.
C.
3.4
Extend flashing 4 inches (100 mm) into masonry at each end and turn up 2 inches (50
mm) to form a pan.
Trim wicking material used in weep holes flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
3.5
Testing and Inspecting: Owner will provide inspectors to perform tests and inspections required
by authorities having jurisdiction.
CLEANING
A.
Clean masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
B.
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly cured, clean exposed masonry.
1.
2.
Wet wall surfaces with water before applying acidic cleaner, then remove cleaner
promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. Protect adjacent interior surfaces and
finishes from damage by mortar, cleaning materials, water, and debris.
Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
END OF SECTION 042000
UNIT MASONRY
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
042000 - 3
p. 106
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals:
anchors.
ICC-ES evaluation reports for fire-retardant treated wood and metal framing
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
2.2
Lumber: Provide dressed lumber, S4S, marked with grade stamp of inspection agency.
TREATED MATERIALS
A.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.3
Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated.
Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for enclosed roof framing, framing in attic
spaces, and where indicated.
Use Interior Type A unless otherwise indicated.
Identify with appropriate classification marking of a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Provide fire-retardant treated materials for all rough carpentry.
LUMBER
A.
Dimension Lumber:
1.
2.
Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or
less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness.
Framing Other Than Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: No. 2: Hem-fir (north):
NLGA; Douglas fir-larch: WCLIB, or WWPA;.
B.
Exposed Boards: Hem-fir, Select Merchantable or No. 1 Common:
WWPA; with 15 percent maximum moisture content.
C.
Concealed Boards: Western woods, Standard: WCLIB; or No. 3 Common: WWPA; with 15
percent maximum moisture content.
D.
Miscellaneous Lumber: Construction, or No. 2 grade with 15 percent maximum moisture
content of any species. Provide for nailers, blocking, and similar members.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
NLGA, WCLIB, or
061000 - 1
p. 107
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
2.4
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A.
2.5
Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, Exterior, AC, fire-retardant
treated, not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal thickness.
MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS
A.
Fasteners: Size and type indicated. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground
contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating
complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
1.
2.
B.
Metal Framing Anchors: Structural capacity, type, and size indicated.
1.
2.
C.
Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property
Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat
washers.
Use anchors made from hot-dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M,
G60 (Z180) coating designation for interior locations where stainless steel is not
indicated.
Use anchors made from stainless steel complying with ASTM A 666, Type 304 for
exterior locations and where indicated.
Sill Sealer: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching
other construction.
B.
Securely attach rough carpentry to substrates, complying with the following:
1.
2.
CABO NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 061000
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
061000 - 2
p. 108
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Product Data and color Samples.
B.
Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants when ambient
and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer
or are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under service and application conditions.
B.
Sealant for Use in Building Expansion Joints:
1.
C.
Sealant for Use in Interior Joints in Ceramic Tile and Other Hard Surfaces in Kitchens and
Toilet Rooms and Around Plumbing Fixtures:
1.
D.
Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.
Acoustical Sealant:
1.
2.2
Single-component, mildew-resistant silicone sealant, ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade NS;
Class 25; for Use NT; formulated with fungicide.
Sealant for Interior Use at Perimeters of Door and Window Frames:
1.
E.
Single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant, ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade NS;
Class 50; for Use NT.
Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that
effectively reduces airborne sound transmission as demonstrated by testing according to
ASTM E 90.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates,
sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant
manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
JOINT SEALANTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
079200 - 1
p. 109
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
B.
Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of size and density to control sealant depth and
otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
C.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or
joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
D.
Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with ASTM C 1193.
B.
Install sealant backings to support sealants during application and to produce cross-sectional
shapes and depths of installed sealants that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
C.
Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants
and backs of joints.
D.
Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal
perimeters, control joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical
sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919.
END OF SECTION 079200
JOINT SEALANTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
079200 - 2
p. 110
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Product Data and Shop Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, suitable for exposed applications.
B.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, free of scale, pitting, or surface defects.
C.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180).
D.
Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, 40Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized.
1.
E.
2.2
For anchors built into exterior walls, sheet steel complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M
or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
HOLLOW METAL DOOR FRAMES
A.
Products:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
B.
Amweld Building Products, LLC.
Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation.
Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.
Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc.
Firedoor Corporation.
Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company.
Habersham Metal Products Company.
Kewanee Corporation (The).
Mesker Door Inc.
Pioneer Industries, Inc.
Security Metal Products Corp.
Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
Windsor Republic Doors.
Frames: ANSI A250.8; conceal fastenings unless otherwise indicated.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
081113 - 1
p. 111
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Steel Sheet Thickness for Interior Doors: 0.053 inch (1.3 mm).
Fabricate interior frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners.
Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement
plates from same material as frames.
Frame Anchors: Not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick.
C.
Glazing Stops: Nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior
doors; screw-applied, removable, glazing stops on inside, fabricated from same material as door
face sheet in which they are installed.
D.
Door Silencers: Three on strike jambs of single-door frames and two on heads of double-door
frames.
E.
Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to
ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A115 Series standards.
F.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware.
G.
Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied coat of lead- and chromate-free primer
complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install hollow metal frames to comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.
1.
B.
Fire-Rated Frames: Install according to NFPA 80.
Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying rust-inhibitive primer.
END OF SECTION 081113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
081113 - 2
p. 112
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.2
Submittals: Samples for factory-finished doors.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer.
B.
Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A,
“Architectural Wood Flush Doors”.
1.3
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer’s written instructions.
B.
Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.
C.
Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Drawings.
1.4
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84 section
b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span.
c. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A.
Quality Standard: WDMA I.S.1-A.
B.
Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that
do not contain urea formaldehyde.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
081416 - 1
p. 113
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
C.
2.2
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:
1.
D.
Bid MW13039
Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated.
Particleboard-Core Doors: Provide blocking in particleboard cores or provide structural
composite lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for doors with protection plates.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
A.
Doors for Transparent Finish:
1.
Interior Solid-Core Doors: Custom grade, seven-ply, particleboard or structural
composite lumber cores (see 2.1.D in this Section).
a.
b.
2.3
Faces: Grade A, Rift Cut Red Oak.
Veneer Matching: Book and balance match, to match existing.
FABRICATION AND FINISHING
A.
Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated and to comply with clearances specified.
B.
Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply
with DHI-WDHS-3.
C.
Cut and trim openings to comply with referenced standards.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Trim light openings with moldings indicated.
Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished.
Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
Factory finish doors indicated for transparent finish with stain and manufacturer's standard
finish complying with WDMA TR-6, catalyzed polyurethane for grade specified for doors, to
match existing.
1.
Sheen: Match existing.
2.
Doors may be finished on site, at Contractor's option. Provide clear finish per Section
099100, sheen to match existing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and WDMA I.S.1-A, and as
indicated.
B.
Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels. Machine doors for hardware.
Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
081416 - 2
p. 114
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
C.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Clearances: As follows unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Bid MW13039
1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.
1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering.
1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold.
Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
Repair, refinish, or replace factory-finished doors damaged during installation, as directed by
Architect.
END OF SECTION 081416
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
081416 - 3
p. 115
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Product Data, Shop Drawings, and color Samples.
1.
For entrance doors, include hardware schedule.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS AND ENTRANCES
A.
Manufacturers
B.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Aluminum-Framed Storefronts and Entrances
by one of the following:
1.
2.
Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company.
EFCO Corporation.
C.
Accessible Entrances: Comply with ICC A117.1.
D.
Fire Rated Aluminum-Framed Storefronts and Entrances.
1.
E.
Provide 20-minute Fire Rated Aluminum-Framed Storefronts and Entrances as indicated
in the Drawings.
Performance Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Limit deflection of framing members normal to wall plane to 1/175 of clear span for
spans up to 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch (6.35 mm)
for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) or an amount that restricts edge deflection
of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less.
Limit deflection of framing members parallel to glazing plane to L/360 of clear span or
1/8 inch (3.2 mm), whichever is smaller.
Structural Testing: Systems tested according to ASTM E 330 at 150 percent of inward
and outward wind-load design pressures do not evidence material failures, structural
distress, deflection failures, or permanent deformation of main framing members
exceeding 0.2 percent of clear span.
Air Infiltration: Limited to 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 L/s per sq. m) of system surface area
when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.
(75 Pa).
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
084113 - 1
p. 116
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
5.
6.
7.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Water Penetration: Systems do not evidence water leakage when tested according to
ASTM E 331 at minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of positive wind-load design
pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).
Thermal Conductance: Average U-factor of not more than 0.57 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F
(3.23 W/sq. m x K) when tested according to AAMA 1503.
Windborne-Debris Resistance: Framing system and doors pass basic-protection testing
requirements in ASTM E 1996 for when tested according to ASTM E 1886.
F.
Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated; ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) sheet; ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) extrusions.
G.
Glazing: As specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."
H.
Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness
required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
I.
Doors: 1-3/4-inch- (44.5-mm-) thick glazed doors with minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick,
extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with
reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed
tie rods. Provide snap-on extruded-aluminum glazing stops, and preformed gaskets.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
J.
Door Design: Medium stile; 3-1/2-inch (88.9-mm) nominal width.
Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches (255 mm)
above floor or ground plane.
Interior Doors: Provide BHMA A156.16 silencers, three on strike jamb of single-door
frames and two on head of double-door frames.
Exterior Doors: Provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. At other
locations, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door
edge.
Hardware: As specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."
Removable Mullion:
1.
Provide Removable Mullion As specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."
K.
Fasteners and Accessories:
Compatible with adjacent materials, corrosion resistant,
nonstaining, and nonbleeding. Use concealed fasteners except for application of door hardware.
L.
Fabrication: Fabricate framing in profiles indicated for flush glazing (without projecting stops).
Provide subframes and reinforcing of types indicated or, if not indicated, as required for a
complete system. Factory assemble components to greatest extent possible. Disassemble
components only as necessary for shipment and installation.
1.
M.
Door Framing: Reinforce to support imposed loads. Factory assemble door and frame
units and factory install hardware to greatest extent possible. Reinforce door and frame
units for hardware indicated. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before
finishing components.
Aluminum Finish: Class I, clear anodic finish; complying with AAMA 611.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
084113 - 2
p. 117
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Isolate metal surfaces in contact with incompatible materials, including wood, by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous coating or primer, or by applying sealant or tape
recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
C.
Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200
"Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.
D.
Install framing components true in alignment with established lines and grades to the following
tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Variation from Plane: Limit to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over
total length.
Alignment: For surfaces abutting in line, limit offset to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). For surfaces
meeting at corners, limit offset to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch (3
mm).
Install doors without warp or rack. Adjust doors and hardware to provide tight fit at contact
points and smooth operation.
END OF SECTION 084113
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
084113 - 3
p. 118
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Hardware schedule and keying schedule.
B.
Cylinders and keys by Owner.
C.
NOTE: Confirm all door hardware with SLCC Locksmith before ordering any products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
HARDWARE
A.
General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and
door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule.
1.
Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated.
B.
Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive
qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 “Door Hardware Sets” Article.
Products are identified by descriptive titles corresponding to requirements specified in Part 2.
C.
Manufacturer’s Product Designations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.2
Butt Hinges: Ives
Continuous Hinges: Hager
Locksets: Marks USA
Exit Devices: Von Duprin
Closers: LCN
Overhead Holders: Glynn-Johnson
Kickplates: Ives
Floor/Wall Stops: Ives
MATERIALS AND FABRICATION:
A.
General:
1.
Hand of door: Drawings show direction of slide, swing or hand of each door leaf.
Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as
shown.
2.
Manufacturer’s Name Plate:
Do not use manufacturer’s products which have
manufacturer’s name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable
DOOR HARDWARE
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
087100 - 1
p. 119
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.3
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
nameplates), except in conjunction with require UL labels and as otherwise acceptable to
Architect.
Manufacturer’s identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
Finish: All hardware finish shall match US10, Satin Bronze unless otherwise indicated.
Closer bodies, covers and arms shall be powder-coated finishes.
Lockset Design: Lever handle design shall be 195 Lever as manufactured by Marks
USA.
Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally
prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware which has been
prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated.
Furnish screws for installation, with each hardware item. Proved Phillips flat-head
screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition)
screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish
of such other work as closely as possible, including “prepared for paint” in surfaces to
receive painted finish.
Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when door is closed,
except to extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners.
Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or not on opposite face is exposed
in other work, except where it is not feasible to adequately reinforce the work. In such
cases, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners.
Tools and Maintenance Instructions for Maintenance: Furnish a complete set of
specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner’s continued
adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of finish hardware.
HINGES, BUTTS AND PIVOTS
A.
Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors
and frames, provide only template-produced units.
B.
Screws: Furnish Phillips flat-head or machine screws for installation of units, except furnish
Phillips flat-head or wood screws for installation of units into wood. Finish screw heads to
match surface of hinges or pivots.
C.
Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:
1. Steel Hinges: Steel pins.
2. Non-ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins.
3. Out-swing Corridor Doors: Non-removable pins.
4. Interior Doors: Non-rising pins.
5. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves.
6. Number of hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges per door
leaf for doors 90” or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30” of additional
height.
DOOR HARDWARE
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
087100 - 2
p. 120
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
D.
Furnish hinges in sizes and types as required by architect’s details to achieve maximum degree
or opening.
E.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Ives
2.4
LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A.
Cylinders to be supplied by Owner.
B.
Keying System to be supplied by Owner.
C.
Furnish temporary keyed cores for the construction period, and remove these when directed.
The construction cores remain property of the supplier and shall be returned to the supplier
when they are removed. Contractor shall install the permanent cores in the presence of the
owner’s representative.
D.
Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only.
E.
Key Quantity:
1. Furnish 3 key blanks for each lock and cylinder.
2. 6 Construction master keys.
F.
Deliver keys to Owner’s representative.
2.5
LOCKS, LATCHES AND BOLTS
A.
Locks shall meet these certifications:
1.
Cylindrical Locks – ANSI A156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1 Strength and Operational
requirements. Meets A117.1 Accessibility Codes. Latch bolts shall be steel with
minimum 1/2” throw, deadlocking on keyed and exterior functions. 3/4” throw antifriction latchbolt on pairs of fire doors. Strikes: Provide manufacturer’s standard wrought
box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame. Locksets
to be tested to exceed 3,000,000 cycles. Lock case shall be steel. Lock shall incorporate
one piece spring cage and spindle. Provide 5/8” minimum throw of latch and deadbolt
used on pairs of doors. Prove Seven Year Warranty.
a. Lock design shall be Marks 95 Line “Survivor” Grade 1, Function AB – Finish shall be
US10 Satin Bronze.
B.
Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings.
C.
Lock Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide lockset products of the
following approved manufacturers:
1. Marks USA, 95 Line “Survivor” Grade 1, 195 Lever Type
DOOR HARDWARE
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
087100 - 3
p. 121
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
2.6
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES
A.
Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the manufacturer’s
recommendations for size of door control unit, depending upon size of door, exposure to
weather and anticipated frequency of use.
B.
Closers: All door closers shall be of one manufacturer to provide for proper installation and
servicing after installation. All closers shall be inspected after installation by a factory
representative to ensure proper adjustment and operation. Closer shall carry a manufacturer’s
10 year warranty for hydraulic units and 2 year warranty for electrical and/or handicap power
assist door closers against manufacturing defects and workmanship.
C.
Cylinder: Shall be of high strength cast iron construction. All door exterior closers shall be
tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 test requirements by a BHMA certified independent testing
laboratory. A written certification showing successful completion of a minimum of 10,000,000
cycles for all exterior door closers must be provided. Cylinder shall have been manufactured
and in the marketplace for a minimum of 10 years.
D.
All door closers shall be fully hydraulic and have full rack and pinion action with a shaft
diameter of a minimum of 11/16” and piston diameter of 1-1/2”. Closer shall utilize full
complement bearings at shaft. Pinion and pistons shall be hardened regardless of closer size.
The closer shall incorporate tamper resistant non-critical screw valves of V-slot design to
reduce possible clogging. Closer shall have separate and independent screw valve adjustments
for latch speed, general speed and hydraulic backcheck. Backcheck shall be properly located so
as to effectively slow the swing of the door at a minimum of 10 degrees in advance of the dead
stop location. Pressure relief valves are not acceptable.
E.
All door closers shall pass UL10C positive pressure fire test.
F.
Parallel Arm Closers: Shall incorporate one piece solid forged steel arms with bronze bushings.
1-9/16” x 1/2” steel stud shoulder bolts shall be incorporated in regular arms, hold open arms,
arms with stop built in, arms with hold open and stop built in. All other closers to have forged
steel main arms for strength and durability.
G.
Built-in Stops: Where closers with built-in positive stops are used, the stops shall be of one
piece cast malleable iron material. Screw on stops of any kind are not acceptable. Where
required, the hold-open assembly handle for these stops shall rotate on ball bearings.
H.
All closers to have a powder coat finish on closer body, arm, metal cover and adapter plate.
Powder coat finish shall exceed a minimum 100 hour salt spray test, as described in ANSI
Standard A156.4 and ASTTM B117.
I.
Hydraulic Fluid: All closers, with the exception of interior and interior electronic closers, shall
utilize temperature stable fluid capable of withstanding temperature ranges of 120 degrees F. to
-30 F. without requiring seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close the door.
J.
Supply all drop plates, shoe supports, templates, etc. to properly install closers according to
manufacturer’s recommendations.
K.
Provide grey resilient parts for exposed bumpers.
DOOR HARDWARE
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
087100 - 4
p. 122
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
L.
Pressure relief valves are not accepted.
M.
Closer being submitted for approval shall have been manufactured for at least 10 years. A list
of (10) year old projects using submitted closer shall be available upon request.
N.
All door closers shall be furnished with metal covers.
O.
Closer Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide closer products of the
following approved manufacturers:
1. LCN Closers – 400 Series.
2.7
DOOR TRIM UNITS
A.
Fasteners: Provide manufacturer’s standard exposed fasteners for door trim units (kick plates,
edge trim, viewers, knockers, mail drops and similar units); either machine screws or selftapping screws.
B.
Fabricate protection plates (armor, kick or mop) not more than 1-1/2” less than door width on
stop side and not more than 1/2” less than door width on pull side, x the height indicated.
C.
Where existing doors are receiving new hardware, provide new protection plates on all doors
that have existing plates.
D.
Metal Plates: Brass, .050” (U.S. 18 GA.).
E.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Ives
2. Rockwood
3. Quality
2.8
DOOR SILENCERS
A.
All hollow metal frames shall have grey resilient type silencers. Quantity (3) on single doors
and quantity (2) on pairs of doors.
B.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Ives
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Mount hardware in locations recommended by the Door and Hardware Institute unless
otherwise indicated.
DOOR HARDWARE
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
087100 - 5
p. 123
DFCM
Bid MW13039
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
3.2
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A.
Hardware Set No. 01:
Door Number:
213.3
213A
213B
213C
213D
213E
213L
213M 213N
213P
213Q
213Q-A
(3)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
B.
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
213V
(1)
213R
213H
213K
213T
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5
95Survivor Grd1 195AB
Key-in-lever by Owner
8400 10” X 1” LDW
WS401CCV
SR64
US10
US10
US10
US10
US10
GRY
IVE
MKS
ASA
IVE
IVE
IVE
Entry
95Survivor Grd1 195AB
US10
MKS
Continuous Hinge
Exit Device
Surface Closer
Dummy Pull
Night Latch
Remov Mullion
Elec Strike (FR)
Strike (FR)
112HD
XP98-F E
4040XP
XP98DT
XP98NL-OP
9854
6111
499F
BR
US10
US10
US10
US10
SP313
US10
US10
IVE
VON
LCN
VON
VON
VON
VON
VON
Hinges
Exit Device
Surface Closer
Cylinder
Kick Plate
Wall Stop
Silencer
5BB1 4.5 X 4.5
SP98-F
4040XP
Key-in-lever by Owner
8400 10” X 1” LDW
WS401CCV
SR64
US10
US10
US10
US10
US10
US10
GRY
IVE
VON
LCN
ASA
IVE
IVE
IVE
213W
EA
Hardware Set No. 03:
213.0
213.1
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
D.
213G
Hardware Set No. 02:
213U
C.
Hinges
Entry
Cylinder
Kick Plate
Wall Stop
Silencer
213F
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
only
EA
EA
Hardware Set No. 04
213.2
(3)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
EA
END OF SECTION 087100
DOOR HARDWARE
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
087100 - 6
p. 124
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 088000 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Product Data and Samples.
B.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers
and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1.
2.
GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual."
IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing
Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."
C.
Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing
with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and
safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
D.
Fire Rated Glazing Labeling: Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fireprotection-rated glazing with certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, whether glazing is
for use in fire doors or other openings, whether or not glazing passes hose-stream test, whether
or not glazing has a temperature rise rating of 450 deg F (250 deg C), and the fire-resistance
rating in minutes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GLASS, GENERAL
A.
Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201.
Provide safety glazing labeling where safety glass is indicated.
B.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide products that comply with NFPA 80 and are listed
and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for
applications indicated.
2.2
GLASS PRODUCTS
A.
2.3
Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3.
MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES
A.
Glass Type: Clear fully tempered float glass.
GLAZING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
088000 - 1
p. 125
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.
2.
B.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Thickness: 6.0 mm.
Provide safety glass.
Glass Type: Clear 20-minute fire resistance rated fully tempered float glass.
1.
2.
2.4
Bid MW13039
Thickness: 6.0 mm.
Provide 20-minute fire resistance rated glass.
GLAZING SEALANTS
A.
Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
1.
Products: One of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Dow Corning Corporation; 799.
GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000.
Tremco Incorporated; Proglaze SSG.
Approved equal.
B.
Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Products that are approved by testing
agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which they are used for
applications and fire-protection ratings indicated.
C.
Low-Emitting Materials: Sealants shall have a VOC content of not more than 250 g/L.
D.
Low-Emitting Materials: Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other
glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are contained in GANA's "Glazing
Manual."
B.
Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
C.
Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION 088000
GLAZING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
088000 - 2
p. 126
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Product Data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested
in assemblies per ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
assemblies per ASTM E 90 and classified per ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing
and inspecting agency.
2.2
METAL FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A.
Steel Framing Members, General: ASTM C 754.
1.
2.
B.
Steel Sheet Components: ASTM C 645. Thickness specified is minimum uncoated basemetal thickness.
Protective Coating: manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant zinc coating.
Suspended Ceiling and Soffit Framing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch (1.59mm) diameter, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.
Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, and 0.162-inch
(4.12-mm) diameter.
Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled steel, 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) thick, and minimum 1/2”
wide flanges.
Furring Channels:
a. 3/4-inch- (19.1-mm-) deep, cold-rolled channels, 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) thick.
b. Steel studs, 0.0296 inch (0.752 mm) thick, in depth indicated.
c. Steel, rigid hat-shaped channels; 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) deep, 0.0296 inch (0.752
mm) thick.
d. Resilient furring channels, 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) deep, with single- or double-leg
configuration.
Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645 Interlocking, direct-hung
system.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
092216 - 1
p. 127
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
C.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Partition and Soffit Framing:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.3
Bid MW13039
Studs and Runners: In depth indicated and 0.0296 inch (0.752 mm) thick unless
otherwise indicated.
Flat Strap and Backing: 0.0296 inch (0.752 mm) thick.
Rigid Hat-Shaped Furring Channels: In depth indicated and 0.0296 inch (0.752 mm)
thick.
Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) deep, with single- or double-leg
configuration.
Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) thick, 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deep.
Z-Furring: In depth required by insulation, 1-1/4-inch (31.8-mm) face flange, 7/8-inch
(22.2-mm) wall-attachment flange, and 0.0179 inch (0.454 mm) thick.
ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Comply with referenced installation standards.
1.
B.
Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding
power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Nonsag, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that
apply to framing installation and with United States Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction
Handbook."
1.
2.
3.
Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with ASTM C 841.
Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with ASTM C 1063.
Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with ASTM C 844.
B.
Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,
grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C.
Isolate steel framing from building structure, except at floor, to prevent transfer of loading
imposed by structural movement.
1.
D.
Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install foam-gasket isolation
strip between studs and wall.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with requirements of listed assemblies.
END OF SECTION 092216
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
092216 - 2
p. 128
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Product Data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested
in assemblies per ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
assemblies per ASTM E 90 and classified per ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing
and inspecting agency.
2.2
PANEL PRODUCTS
A.
Provide in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.
B.
Interior Gypsum Board: ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, in thickness
indicated, with manufacturer's standard edges. Type X where indicated.
2.3
ACCESSORIES
A.
Trim Accessories: ASTM C 1047, formed from galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet,
rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized-steel sheet. For exterior trim, use accessories
formed from hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Provide cornerbead at outside corners unless otherwise indicated.
Provide LC-bead (J-bead) at exposed panel edges.
Provide control joints where indicated.
Joint-Treatment Materials: ASTM C 475/C 475M.
1.
2.
3.
Joint Tape: Paper unless otherwise recommended by panel manufacturer.
Joint Compounds: Setting-type compounds.
Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping
compound.
GYPSUM BOARD
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
092900 - 1
p. 129
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
C.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex
sealant complying with ASTM C 834.
D.
Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (unfaced).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840.
1.
2.
3.
Isolate gypsum board assemblies from abutting structural and masonry work. Provide
edge trim and acoustical sealant.
Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Fasten gypsum panels to supports with screws.
Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layer separately to supports
with screws.
B.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with requirements of listed assemblies.
C.
Finishing Gypsum Board: ASTM C 840.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
At concealed areas, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated
assemblies, provide Level 1 finish: Embed tape at joints.
At substrates for tile, provide Level 2 finish: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of
joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide Level 4 finish: Embed tape and apply separate first,
fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges.
Where indicated, provide Level 5 finish: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and
finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges. Apply skim coat to
entire surface.
Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a
uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application
patterns.
END OF SECTION 092900
GYPSUM BOARD
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
092900 - 2
p. 130
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Product Data and material Samples.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested
in assemblies per ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Seismic Standard: Provide acoustical panel ceilings designed and installed to withstand the
effects of earthquake motions according to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
CISCA's Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings:
Comply with CISCA's
"Recommendations for Direct-Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings - Seismic
Zones 0-2."
CISCA's Guidelines for Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with CISCA's
"Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct-Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies Seismic Zones 3 & 4."
UBC Standard 25-2, "Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and for Lay-in Panel
Ceilings."
Reference DFCM document: NONSTRUCTURAL COMPONENT CHECKLIST on the
drawings.
See Appendix for ICC-ES Report ESR-1289 for gypsum board ceilings and ICC-ES
Report ESR-3336 for suspended acoustical tile ceilings.
ACOUSTICAL PANELS AP-1
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following as the Basis of
Design.
1.
B.
Armstrong Cortega #703.
Classification: As follows, per ASTM E 1264:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Type and Form: Type III, Form 2.
Pattern: C D, Small holes, no pattern.
Color: White.
Light Reflectance (LR) Coefficient: Not less than 0.87.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
095113 - 1
p. 131
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
5.
6.
7.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Not less than 0.50.
Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): Not less than 35.
AC: Not less than 180.
C.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 1264, Class A materials, tested per ASTM E 84.
D.
Edge Detail: Angled Tegular (SLT).
E.
Thickness: 15/16 inch.
F.
Modular Size: 24 by 48 inches (610 by 1220 mm).
G.
Antimicrobial Treatment: Broad spectrum fungicide and bactericide based.
H.
For proprietary or semi-proprietary specification, retain paragraph above. For descriptive
specification, retain first paragraph below. Before selecting options below, verify availability
with manufacturers' product data.
2.3
CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A.
Wide-face, direct-hung system; ASTM C 635, heavy-duty structural classification. Main and
cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, pre-painted, electrolytically zinc coated,
or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating
designation, with prefinished 15/16” wide metal caps and flanges.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following as the Basis of
Design.
a.
2.
Armstrong Prelude XL 15/16” Exposed Tee.
Color: White.
B.
Attachment Devices: Sized for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
Direct Hung, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
C.
Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1
zinc coating, soft temper.
1.
Size: Provide yield strength at least 3 times the hanger design load (ASTM C 635,
Table 1, Direct Hung), but not less than 0.135-inch- (3.5-mm-) diameter wire.
D.
Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard product designed to accommodate seismic forces.
E.
Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed to secure panels in place.
F.
Hold-Down Clips: Manufacturer's standard product; spaced 24 inches (610 mm) O.C. on all
cross tees.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
095113 - 2
p. 132
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Ceiling Suspension System Installation: Comply with ASTM C 636 and CISCA's "Ceiling
Systems Handbook."
1.
Fire-Rated Assembly: Install fire-rated ceiling systems according to tested fire-rated
design.
B.
Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat,
precise fit.
C.
Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as indicated on Drawings.
END OF SECTION 095113
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
095113 - 3
p. 133
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Product Data and Samples.
B.
Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner at least twenty (20) linear feet of each type and color of
resilient wall base installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RESILIENT BASE
A.
Products: Subject to requirements, and to match existing Rubber Base in the GFBS, provide
products by the following manufacturer as the Basis of Design:
1.
Roppe Corporation, USA
Roppe Pinnacle Plus Rubber Base, Type TS Rubber Vulcanized Thermoset
B.
Color and Pattern:
1. Color and pattern shall match existing.
C.
ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset).
D.
Group (Manufacturing Method): I (solid).
E.
Style: Cove (base with toe) to VCT.
F.
Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
G.
Height: Shall match existing.
H.
Lengths: coils in manufacturer's standard lengths.
I.
Outside Corners: preformed.
J.
Inside Corners: Job formed.
K.
Finish: Match existing.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
096513 - 1
p. 134
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
2.2
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY
A.
Products:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.
Flexco, Inc.
Johnsonite.
R.C.A. Rubber Company (The).
Roppe Corporation, USA.
VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division.
B.
Color: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer’s full range.
C.
Description: Carpet edge for glue-down applications, Joiner for tile and carpet, Transition
Strips as required.
D.
Material: Rubber.
E.
Profile and Dimensions: As indicated.
2.3
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement- or blended
hydraulic cement-based formulation provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for
applications indicated.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit products and substrate
conditions.
C.
Stair-Tread-Nose Filler:
Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient tread
manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.
D.
Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to
protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.
E.
Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by resilient stair
tread manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Prepare concrete substrates according to ASTM F 710. Verify that substrates are dry and free
of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
B.
Adhesively install resilient wall base and accessories.
C.
Install wall base in maximum lengths possible. Apply to walls, columns, pilasters, casework,
and other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is required.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
096513 - 2
p. 135
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
D.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would otherwise be exposed.
END OF SECTION 096513
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
096513 - 3
p. 136
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 096800 - TILE CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Product Data and Samples.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CARPET TILE:
A.
2.2
CPTT-1
Carpet Tile shall be provided by the Owner and installed by the Contractor.
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A.
All Installation Accessories shall be provided by the Contractor.
B.
Carpet Tile Adhesives: Pressure-sensitive type that complies with flammability requirements
for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for conditions indicated
for releasable installation.
1.
Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.
C.
Tackless Carpet Stripping: Water-resistant plywood, in strips as required to match cushion
thickness and that comply with CRI 104, Section 12.2.
D.
Seam Adhesive:
manufacturer.
Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with CRI 104.
B.
Carpet Tile Installation Method: Glue down; releasable, pressure-sensitive adhesive.
1.
Install Carpet Tiles using the quarter-turn method.
END OF SECTION 096800
CARPETING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
096800 - 1
p. 137
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 099100 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals:
1.
2.
3.
Product Data. Include printout of MPI's "MPI Approved Products List" with product
highlighted.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.
Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of
topcoat indicated.
a. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.
b. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
c. Label each coat of each Sample.
d. Label each Sample for location and application area.
B.
Mockups: Full-coat finish Sample of each type of coating, color, and substrate, applied where
directed by the Architect.
C.
Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each color and type of finish coat paint used
on Project, in containers, properly labeled and sealed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PAINT
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Benjamin Moore & Co.
ICI Paints.
Sherwin-Williams Company.
Pratt & Lambert Paints.
B.
MPI Standards: Provide materials that comply with MPI standards indicated and listed in its
"MPI Approved Products List."
C.
Material Compatibility: Provide materials that are compatible with one another and with
substrates.
1.
D.
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
Use interior paints and coatings that comply with the following limits for VOC content:
1.
PAINTING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
099100 - 1
p. 138
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
E.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Nonflat Paints, Coatings: 150 g/L.
Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.
Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: 350 g/L.
Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: 550 g/L.
Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.
Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L.
Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.
Stains: 250 g/L.
Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.
Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L.
Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L.
Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.
Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints
and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following
chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in
a fabrication or finishing shop:
1. Acrolein.
2. Acrylonitrile.
3. Antimony.
4. Benzene.
5. Butyl benzzuyl phthalate.
6. Cadmium.
7. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.
8. Di-n-butyl phthalate.
9. Di-n-octyl phthalate.
10. 1,2-dichlorobenzene.
11. Diethyl phthalate.
12. Ethylbenzene.
13. Formaldehyde.
14. Hexavalent chromium.
15. Isophorone.
16. Lead.
17. Mercury.
18. Methyl ethyl ketone.
19. Methyl isobutyl ketone.
20. Methylene chloride.
21. Naphthalene
22. Toluene (methylbenzene).
23. 1,1,1-trichloroethane.
24. Vinyl chloride.
F.
Colors: As selected from manufacturer’s full range for each type of paint indicated.
PAINTING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
099100 - 2
p. 139
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Comply with recommendations in MPI's "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual"
applicable to substrates indicated.
B.
Remove hardware, lighting fixtures, and similar items that are not to be painted. Mask items
that cannot be removed. Reinstall items in each area after painting is complete.
C.
Clean and prepare surfaces in an area before beginning painting in that area. Schedule painting
so cleaning operations will not damage newly painted surfaces.
3.2
APPLICATION
A.
Comply with recommendations in MPI's "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual"
applicable to substrates indicated.
B.
Paint exposed surfaces, new and existing, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
D.
Use brushes only for exterior painting and where the use of other applicators is not
practical.
Use rollers for finish coat on interior walls and ceilings.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
1.
E.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.
Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
Paint the back side of access panels.
Color-code mechanical piping in accessible ceiling spaces.
Do not paint prefinished items, items with an integral finish, operating parts, and labels
unless otherwise indicated.
If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured
film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
Apply stains and transparent finishes to produce surface films without color irregularity,
cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush marks, runs, ropiness, or other imperfections. Use
multiple coats to produce a smooth surface film of even luster.
PAINTING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
099100 - 3
p. 140
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
3.3
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
INTERIOR PAINT APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A.
Gypsum Board:
1.
B.
Steel, including Hollow Metal Frames:
1.
C.
High-Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 9.2B
High-Performance Eggshell Architectural Latex: Two coats over interior latex
primer/sealer.
Semigloss, Quick-Dry Enamel: Two coats over quick-drying alkyd metal primer:
MPI INT 5.3F.
Wood substrates, non-traffic surfaces, including wood trim and doors.
1.
Satin Water-Based Varnish: Three coats: MPI INT 6.1F.
END OF SECTION 099100
PAINTING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
099100 - 4
p. 141
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 101100 - VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1. Markerboards.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.2
Division 061000 Section "Rough Carpentry".
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
1.3
DEFINITIONS
A. Visual Display Board Assembly: Visual display surface that is factory fabricated into
composite panel form, either with or without a perimeter frame; includes chalkboards,
markerboards, and tackboards.
B. Visual Display Surface: Surfaces that are used to convey information visually, including
surfaces of chalkboards, markerboards, tackboards, and surfacing materials that are not
fabricated into composite panel form but are applied directly to walls.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Operation and maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace Markerboards that fail(s) in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
101100 - 1
p. 142
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Warranty Period: Life of the Building.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
B.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Porcelain-Enamel Markerboards by one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Porcelain-Enamel Markerboards.
ADP Lemco, Inc.
AARCO Products, Inc.
Egan Visual Inc.
Poly Vision Corporation, a Steelcase Company
DESCRIPTION
A.
Porcelain-Enamel Markerboards: Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminated markerboard
assembly of three-ply construction consisting of backing sheet, core material, and 0.021-inch
thick porcelain-enamel face sheet with high-gloss finish.
1.
2.
2.3
Hardboard Core: 1/2” thick, with 0.005-inch thick aluminum foil backing.
Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer’s standard, moisture-resistant thermoplastic type.
MARKERBOARD ACCESSORIES
A.
Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch thick extruded
aluminum, standard size and shape.
1. Factory-Applied Trim: Manufacturer’s standard.
B.
Chalktray: Manufacturer’s standard, continuous.
1. Solid Type: Extruded aluminum with ribbed section and smoothly curved exposed ends.
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
Porcelain-Enamel Visual Display Assemblies: Laminate porcelain-enamel face sheet and
backing sheet to core material under heat and pressure with manufacturer’s standard flexible,
waterproof adhesive.
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
101100 - 2
p. 143
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
B.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricate units straight and of single lengths, keeping joints to a
minimum. Miter corners to a neat, hairline closure.
1. Where factory-applied trim is indicated, trim shall be assembled and attached to visual
display units at manufacturer’s factory before shipment.
2.5
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products” for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.6
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
2.7
Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACE SCHEDULE
A.
Visual Display Board, Factory Assembled.
1. Markerboard: Porcelain-enamel markerboard assembly.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Color: White
Corners: Square
Width: As indicated on the Drawings
Height: As indicated on the Drawings
Mounting: Wall
Mounting Height: As indicated on the Drawings
Factory-Applied Aluminum Trim: Manufacturer’s standard with clear anodic finish
Accessories:
a. Chalk Tray: Solid type
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
101100 - 3
p. 144
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
A.
Examine porcelain-enamel markerboards before installation, with installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation and backing for visual display surfaces.
C.
Reject porcelain-enamel markerboards that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for surface preparation.
B.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair the performance of and affect the smooth,
finished surfaces of visual display boards, including dirt, mold, and mildew.
C.
Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings,
cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair bond between visual
display surfaces and wall surfaces.
3.3
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
3.4
General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on the
Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight, level,
and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and
accessories necessary for complete installation.
INSTALLATION OF FACTORY-FABRICATED VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS AND
ASSEMBLIES
A.
Visual Display Boards: Mechanically mount visual display boards to wall surfaces with
manufacturer’s standard grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim,
and accessories necessary for complete installation. Secure both top and bottom of boards to
walls.
1.
If chalktrays are not factory-attached, install chalktrays with manufacturer’s standard
approved fasteners or clips according to manufacturer’s written instructions.
END OF SECTION 101100
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
101100 - 4
p. 145
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 102600 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Product Data and material Samples.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 2240/A 240M.
B.
Adhesive: Recommended by manufacturer for use with material and substrate indicated.
1. Use adhesives and sealants that comply with the following limits for VOC content when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
a. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.
b. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
c. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.
2.2
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
A.
Surface Mounted Metal Corner Guards (SS): Fabricated from 1-piece or extruded metal with
formed edges; with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.
1.
Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
ARDEN Architectural Specialties, Inc
IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems; Division of InPro Corporation.
Korogard Wall Protection Systems; Division of RJF International Corporation.
Pawling Corporation.
Material: Stainless Steel, Type 304.
a. Thickness: Minimum 16 Gauge.
b. Finish: Directional Satin, No. 4.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Size and Profile: Wing size nominal 2-1/2” by 2-1/2”
Corner Radius: 1/8”.
Mounting: Adhesive.
Door Protection Plates: Reference Specification Section 087100 Door Hardware.
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
102600 - 1
p. 146
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install components level, plumb, and true to line without distortions.
END OF SECTION 102600
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
102600 - 2
p. 147
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
APPENDIX
ICC-ES Report ESR-1289 Suspended Gypsum Board Ceilings
ICC-ES Report ESR-3336 Suspended Acoustical Tile Ceilings
END OF APPENDIX
EXECUTION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
017300 - 1
p. 148
DFCM
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Bid MW13039
p. 149
DFCM
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Bid MW13039
p. 150
DFCM
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Bid MW13039
p. 151
DFCM
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Bid MW13039
p. 152
DFCM
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Bid MW13039
p. 153
DFCM
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Bid MW13039
p. 154
DFCM
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Bid MW13039
p. 155
DFCM
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Bid MW13039
p. 156
DFCM
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Bid MW13039
p. 157
DFCM
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Bid MW13039
p. 158
DFCM
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Bid MW13039
p. 159
DFCM
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Bid MW13039
p. 160
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
DIVISION 23
MECHANICAL
230100
230500
230553
230593
230700
230900
233113
233300
233600
233713
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
BASIC MATERIALS & METHODS
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
MECHANICAL INSULATION
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
METAL DUCTS
DUCT ACCESSORIES
DUAL DUCT BOXES
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
p. 161
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 230100 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
GENERAL
General Conditions and Division 01 apply to this Division.
SCOPE
Includes 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Related Work Specified Elsewhere
1.
2.
1.3
Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for the completion of the
mechanical and plumbing scope of work.
Furnish and install all motors specified in this Division and be responsible for the
proper operation of electrical powered equipment furnished by this Division.
Furnish exact location of electrical connections and information on motor controls
to Division 26.
Mechanical Contractor shall obtain the services of independent Test and Balance
Agency.
Placing the air conditioning, heating, ventilating, and exhaust systems into full
operation and continuing their operation during each working day of testing and
balancing.
Making changes in pulleys, belts, and dampers, or adding dampers, as required
for the correct balance as recommended by Balancing Contractor at no additional
cost to Owner.
Air balance, final adjustment and test run.
The satisfactory performance of the completed systems is a requirement of this
specification.
Conduit, line voltage wiring, outlets, and disconnect switches specified in Division
26.
Magnetic starters and thermal protective devices (heaters) not a factory mounted
integral part of packaged equipment are specified in Division 26.
SITE OBSERVATION
A.
The Contractor shall examine the site and understand the conditions which may affect
the performance of work of this Division before submitting proposals for this work.
B.
No subsequent allowance for time or money will be considered for any consequence
related to failure to examine existing site conditions.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Section 230100- 1
p. 162
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.4
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
DRAWINGS
A.
Mechanical drawings show general arrangement of piping, ductwork, equipment, etc;
however, locations are to be regarded as shown diagrammatically only. Follow as
closely as actual building construction and work of other trades will permit.
B.
Because of the small scale of mechanical drawings, it is not possible to indicate all
offsets, fittings, and accessories which may be required. Investigate existing structural
and finished conditions affecting this work and arrange work accordingly, providing
such fittings, valves, and accessories required to meet conditions.
If changes in location of piping, equipment, ducts, etc. are required due to lack of
coordination of work under this division, such changes shall be made without charge.
Contractor shall review drawings with local and state agencies having jurisdiction and
any changes required by them shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer prior to
bidding or commencement of work. It is understood that while Drawings are to be
followed as closely as circumstances permit, this Division will be held responsible for
the installation of systems according to the true intent and meaning of the Contract
Documents. Anything not clear or in conflict will be explained by making application to
the Engineer in writing. Should conditions arise where certain changes would be
advisable, secure Owner's and Engineer approval for these changes before
proceeding with work.
1.5
COORDINATION OF WORK:
A.
Coordinate work of various trades in installing interrelated work. Before installation of
mechanical items, make proper provision to avoid interferences in a manner approved
by Engineer. Changes required in work specified in Division 23 caused by neglect to
secure approval shall be made at no cost to Owner.
B.
Arrange piping, ductwork, and equipment to permit ready access to valves, unions,
starters, motors, control components, and to clear openings of doors and access
panels. Contractor shall provide all necessary access doors and/or panels to provide
complete access to all mechanical equipment, dampers, or accessories. Doors for
dampers, etc. shall be minimum 12" x 12" and doors for mechanical equipment shall be
minimum 24" x 24".
C.
Furnish and install inserts and supports required by Division 23 unless otherwise
noted. Furnish sleeves, inserts, supports, and equipment that are an integral part of
other Divisions involved in sufficient time to be built into the construction as the Work
proceeds. Locate these items and see that they are properly installed. Expense
resulting from improper location or installation of items above shall be borne by
Contractor.
D.
Be responsible for required digging, cutting, and patching incident to work of this
Division and make required repairs afterwards to satisfaction of Owner and Architect.
Cut carefully to minimize necessity for repairs to existing work. Do not cut beams,
columns, or trusses.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Section 230100- 2
p. 163
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.
2.
3.
E.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Patch and repair walls, floors and roofs with materials of same quality and
appearance as adjacent surfaces unless otherwise shown. Surface finishes shall
exactly match existing finishes of same materials.
This Division shall bear expense of cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing of
work of other Divisions because of its fault, error, tardiness, or because of
damage done by it.
Provide the necessary cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing pavements,
sidewalks, etc. to permit installation of work of this Division.
Adjust locations of piping, ductwork, equipment, etc, to accommodate work from
interferences anticipated and encountered. Determine exact route and location of each
pipe and cut prior to fabrication.
1.
Make offsets, transitions, and changes in direction of piping, ductwork, and
electrical raceways as required to maintain proper head room and pitch of
sloping lines whether or not indicated on Drawings.
F.
Slots and openings through floors, walls and roofs shall be provided by this Division.
G.
This Contractor shall schedule his work, store his equipment and materials, and work
in harmony with other Contractors so as to not delay or jeopardize the construction.
H.
This Division shall coordinate with electrical contractor to insure that all required
components of control work are included and fully understood. Any discrepancies shall
be called to the attention of the Engineer before completion of bids. No additional cost
shall accrue to the Owner as a result of lack of such coordination.
1.6
EQUIPMENT & MATERIALS:
A.
Requests for substitution shall be received in writing a minimum of seven days prior to
bidding. Prior acceptance shall be by Manufacturer's name only. Items not listed in
this specification or subsequent addendums shall not be considered. No oral
approvals will be acceptable. Manufacturers listed in this specification are acceptable
only for items listed. All other items manufacturer wishes to bid must be prior
approved. All equipment shall be subject to final review in accordance with "Project
Submittals".
B.
Product Approvals -
C.
1.
If approval is received to use other than specified items, responsibility for
specified capacities and insuring that items to be furnished will fit space available
lies with this Division.
2.
In the event other than specified equipment is used and will not fit job site
conditions, this Division assumes responsibility for replacement with items
named in Specification.
Use domestic made pipe, pipe fittings, and motors on Project.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Section 230100- 3
p. 164
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
D.
Motor and equipment name plates as well as applicable UL labels shall be in place
when Project is turned over to Owner.
E.
Insure that items to be furnished fit spaces available. Make necessary field
measurements to ascertain space requirements including those for connections and
furnish and install equipment of size and shape so final installation shall suit true intent
and meaning of Contract Documents. Do not scale off drawings.
F.
All materials shall be of the best commercial quality obtainable, consistent with
specified materials and for the purpose or function intended. Materials shall be new
unless specifically excepted.
G.
Equipment catalog or model numbers shown define the basic equipment types and
quality standard only. Catalog numbers shall not be considered as all inclusive and
shall be verified to include all devices, controls, operators, and appurtenances
necessary for the satisfactory and complete operation of the equipment.
H.
Follow manufacturer's directions in delivery, storage, protection, and installation of
equipment and materials.
1.
I.
1.7
Promptly notify Engineer in writing of conflicts between requirements of Contract
Documents and Manufacturer's directions and obtain Engineer’s written
instructions before proceeding with work. Contractor shall bear all expenses
arising from correcting deficiencies of work that does not comply with
Manufacturer's directions or such written instructions from.
Deliver equipment and material to site and tightly cover and protect against dirt, water,
and chemical or mechanical injury but have readily accessible for inspection. Store
items subject to moisture damage (such as controls) in a dry, heated space.
PROJECT SUBMITTALS:
A.
Furnish complete catalog data for manufactured items of equipment to be used in the
Work to for review within 15 days after award of Contract.
B.
Submittal shall include, but not be limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
equipment scheduled
balancing contractor
insulation
grilles, and diffusers
automatic temperature controls
certificates of guarantee
valves
plumbing fixtures, accessories, and specialties
any item for which more than one manufacturer is mentioned
Submit a minimum of five copies of data in binders and index in same order and name
as they appear in Specification.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Section 230100- 4
p. 165
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.
2.
3.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
State sizes, capacities, brand names, motor HP, electrical requirements,
accessories, materials, gauges, dimensions, and other pertinent information.
List on catalog covers page numbers of submitted items.
Underline or highlight applicable data.
D.
If material or equipment is not as specified or submittal is not complete, it will be
rejected.
E.
Catalog data or shop drawings for equipment which are noted as approved shall not
supersede Contract Documents.
F.
Review comments shall not relieve this Division from responsibility for deviations from
Contract Documents unlessattention has been called to such deviations in writing at
time of submission, nor shall they relieve this Division from responsibility for errors in
items submitted.
G.
Check work described by catalog data with Contract Documents for deviations and
errors.
H.
All items other than first named specified equipment shall show and state all
exceptions and deviations taken and shall include design calculations and drawing
layouts.
I.
The Contractor shall review the submittals prior to submission to the to make sure that
the submittals are complete in all details. No submittal will be reviewed which does not
bear the contractor's notation that such checking has been made.
J.
No partial submittals will be considered unless approved by the
K.
Manufacturers' names shall be mentioned as acceptable prior to bidding.
L.
Contractor shall verify equipment dimensions to fit the spaces provided with sufficient
clearance for servicing the equipment.
M.
Contractor shall review equipment submittals for compliance with schedules,
specifications, and drawing plans and details. Equipment submittal shall show the
proper arrangements to suit installation and maintenance such as motor location,
access doors, filter removal, piping connections, etc.
N.
Equipment submittal sheets shall be clearly marked indicating equipment symbol and
exact selection of proposed equipment. Submittals shall clearly indicate name of
manufacturer of each item.
O.
For unacceptable items, the right shall be reserved to require the first named specified
items.
P.
Where submittals are sent with any of the above listed information missing or are
incomplete they will be returned to the contractor unchecked to be completed and
resubmitted. No additional time or money shall be allowed for failure to provide
complete submittals on the first review.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Section 230100- 5
p. 166
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Q.
1.8
A.
1.9
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
If an item requiring submittal review is ordered, purchased, shipped, or installed prior to
the submittal review and is subsequently disapproved the item shall be removed from
the job site and replaced with an approved item at contractors expense.
CLEANING & FINISHING:
Contractor shall, at all times, keep the premises free from waste material and rubbish.
Upon completion of this Section of the work, Contractor shall remove all surplus
materials and rubbish; clean all spots resulting from the mechanical work from
hardware, floors, glass, walls, etc.; do all required patching up and repair all work of
other trades damaged by Contractor under this Section of the work, and leave the
premises in a clean orderly condition. Clean heating and cooling coils, internally and
externally, and replace all air filters prior to final mechanical inspection. Remove rust,
plaster, dirt, grease and oil before painting, insulating, or exposing to view the
equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. in completed structure. Refinish any damaged
surfaces and leave in proper working order at final completion.
EQUIPMENT SERVICING:
A.
Prior to starting mechanical equipment, all motors, bearings and moving parts shall be
properly oiled, greased and lubricated as required. Full and adequate maintenance
service shall be given and upon completion all equipment shall be cleaned and
checked and placed in perfect condition for the Owner.
B.
Amount and type of lubricant shall be per manufacturer's specification.
1.10
A.
1.11
SUPERVISION:
The Contractor shall supervise and direct the work with his best skill and attention. He
will be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and
procedures of construction. The Contractor will be responsible to see that the finished
work complies accurately with the Contract Documents.
SAFETY REGULATIONS:
A.
Contractor shall provide equipment, supervision, construction, procedures, and
everything necessary to assure safety of life or property.
B.
Refer also to General Condition and Special Conditions for protection clauses.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Section 230100- 6
p. 167
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.12
A.
1.13
A.
1.14
A.
1.15
A.
1.16
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
LEAK DAMAGE:
Contractor shall be responsible for damages to the work of other Contractors or to the
building, or to its contents, people, etc., caused by leaks in any of the equipment or
piping installed by him through equipment or material failures, leaking joints or
disconnected pipes, fittings, or by overflows and shall make at his own expense all
repairs to fixtures, building interior, contents, paint, rugs, furniture, ceiling tile, and
equipment so damaged.
TOOLS AND STORAGE OF EQUIPMENT:
The Contractor shall furnish all necessary tools, staging and whatever may be
necessary for the installation of this work and shall at all times protect this work and
others, and the materials to be used therein from damage by the weather, accident and
other causes, and shall repair and make good any damage thus occurring.
WORKMANSHIP:
Workmanship shall be the best quality of its kind for respective industries, trades, crafts
and practices and shall be acceptable in every respect to the Owner and Engineer.
Nothing contained herein shall relieve the Contractor from performing good work,
perfect in all details of construction.
BELT GUARDS:
Shall be provided, properly enclosing each belt drive system. Guards shall be easily
removable, constructed of expanded metal with suitable frames corresponding with
SMACNA standard and with tachometer openings. Coordinate with equipment
suppliers to avoid duplication of belt guards supplied with equipment. Guards shall
comply with OSHA Regulations.
ELECTRICAL WORK:
A.
Power wiring to all electrically driven apparatus shall be done under the electrical
contract. See Electrical Specifications.
B.
Unless specifically noted otherwise on documents, Electrical Contractor shall furnish
and install all magnetic starters including properly sized heaters, and disconnect
switches as indicated on drawings or required by code.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Section 230100- 7
p. 168
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
C.
The Contractor shall verify the proper operation of equipment furnished by him. Costs
for repair, replacing, re-wiring and retesting shall be borne by the Contractor without
additional costs to the Owner.
D.
Motors shall be as specified.
1.17
A.
1.18
A.
CONTRACTOR'S USE OF BUILDING EQUIPMENT:
The Contractor may use equipment such as electric motors, fans, filters, etc. when
permanently installed as part of the project and with the written permission of the
Owner. As each piece of equipment is used, maintenance procedures approved by the
manufacturer shall be followed, a careful record shall be kept of the time used,
maintenance procedure following and of any difficulty experienced with equipment.
The Contractor's records on the equipment shall be submitted to the Owner upon
acceptance of project. All fan belts and filter media shall be new at the beginning of
the Mechanical System Operating Test Run and System Balancing. Wearing surfaces
(such as bearings) shall be carefully inspected just prior to acceptance. Any excessive
wear noted shall require replacement.
INSPECTION NOTICE:
The following is a basic list of guideline items so that the Architect, district building
inspector/Owner’s representative can be at job site for these inspections as the
building progresses. Mechanical Contractor shall inform these people one week in
advance of test time.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.19
A.
Water tests on all sewer, waste, and rainwater piping prior to piping being
concealed.
Pressure tests on all water service piping.
Pressure tests on hot, chilled, and condenser water supply and return piping.
All duct work prior to installation of finished ceilings, including ductwork pressure
testing.
The initial start-up of mechanical equipment, etc.
Any changes or problems occurring at job site.
Inspect all vent flashings on roof prior to roofing.
Periodic inspection at their discretion will be made to insure compliance to
Contract Documents and codes. Contractor shall provide ladders, access and
other assistance as requested during inspections.
Control piping pressure tests.
Final inspection before giving approval for final payment.
LEAK DAMAGE: WARRANTY GUARANTEE:
The Contractor shall warrant all materials and equipment to be of quality consistent
with specifications as represented by manufacturer's published data.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Section 230100- 8
p. 169
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
B.
The Contractor shall guarantee that the installation and operation of the equipment
shall be free from defects for a period of one year beginning at date of substantial
completion and acceptance. The Contractor shall replace or repair any part of the
installation that is found to be defective or incomplete within the guarantee period.
C.
The one year guarantee on equipment and systems shall commence when equipment
has been demonstrated to work and has been accepted. (Example: If an equipment
item fails to perform and it takes 9 months after substantial completion to correct, then
the guarantee shall commence after the item has been demonstrated to perform and
has been accepted.)
D.
Substantial completion and acceptance in no way relieves the Contractor from
providing the systems and equipment as specified.
1.20
COMPLETION SCHEDULE:
A.
Start-up and verification of basic equipment items shall be done prior to the date of
substantial completion with sufficient time to allow balancing and adjusting to be
performed.
B.
At the time of the final inspection a date shall be agreed upon for completion of any
remaining items. At least double the estimated cost of the work will be withheld from
the Contractor's payment.
1.21
A.
CODE REQUIREMENTS, FEES, AND PERMITS
The work shall be installed in accordance with the following applicable codes,
ordinances and standards unless otherwise specified. The codes and standards shall
include but not be limited to and be of the latest and current editions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
American Boiler and Affiliated Industries (AB and AI)
American Gas Association (AGA)
Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA)
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (ARI)
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers
(ASHRAE) - ASHRAE 90.1-2007
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM)
American Standards Association (ASA)
American Water Works Association (AWWA)
American Welding Society (AWS)
Associated Air Balance Council (AABC)
Heat Exchange Institute (HEI)
Hydraulic Institute (HI)
BR
National Electrical Code (NEC)
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Section 230100- 9
p. 170
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning contractors National Association (SMACNA)
Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
International Building Code (IBC) 2009 Ed
International Mechanical Code (IMC) 2009 Ed
International Plumbing Code (IPC) with Utah Amendments 2009 Ed
International Energy Conservation Code (IECC) 2009 Ed
Utah State Safety Orders (OSHA/UOSH)
Utah Fire Rating Bureau
Utah Boiler and Pressure Vessel Law
Utah Air Conservation Regulations/Waste Disposal regulations.
ASHRAE Ventilation STD.62-2007
B.
Should drawings conflict with any code, the code shall govern. If drawings and
specifications establish a quality exceeding the code, the drawings and specifications
shall govern. If conflicts do exist among the drawings, specifications and codes, the
same shall be brought to the attention of the Engineerin writing prior to bidding,
otherwise Contractor shall comply with applicable codes.
C.
The latest edition of all codes shall be used.
D.
Contractor shall give all notices, obtain all necessary permits, file necessary plans,
prepare documents and obtain approvals, and pay all fees required for completion of
the mechanical and plumbing work outlined in this Division of the specifications and
shown on the Mechanical Drawings.
1.22
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
A.
Upon completion of work and before final payment, Contractor shall furnish and deliver
to the Owner, through the Engineer, installation, operation and maintenance manuals
with instructions for all new materials and equipment used in the building. The
contractor shall provide three (3) hard copies of the manuals, and three (3) CD’s with
electronic copies of the manuals. Electronic information shall be .PDF format. The
CD’s shall include the same information as the hard copies, and shall be organized in
the same manner with electronic bookmarks for each section. CD case and the CD
itself shall be labeled the same as the hard copies of the manuals.
B.
Bind Operation and Maintenance Manual for Mechanical Systems in a hard-backed
piano hinge loose-leaf binder with strong sturdy cover. The project name shall be on
the spine and the front of the binder. The front of the binder shall include the following
information:
OPERATION
AND
MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
for MECHANICAL SYSTEMS of
(Name of Project)
(Location of Project)
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Section 230100- 10
p. 171
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
(Date of Project Award)
(Name of Architect)
C.
Introduction
1.
2.
3.
D.
First Section - Summary information including:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Title page including name of project, project number, date awarded and date of
substantial completion.
Second page shall contain the names, phone numbers and addresses of
Architect, Consulting Engineers, Mechanical Contractor, and General Contractor.
Third page shall include a Table of Contents for the entire manual.
First page shall contain the contractor’s warranties.
Second page shall contain a list of names, addresses and phone numbers of
contractors and all sub-contractors and work to which each was assigned.
Final page or pages shall contain an equipment list. The list shall contain each
item of equipment or material for which a submittal was required giving ID or tag
no as contained on the drawings make and model No. Serial No. Identification
No. Location in building, function along with the name, address, and phone
number of the supplier.
Second Section - Mechanical Equipment O&M data including:
1.
2.
Mechanical maintenance schedule, including a lubrication list when necessary.
Mechanical Equipment Operation and Maintenance Data including:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
F.
Equipment descriptions
Detailed installation instruction, operating and maintenance instructions.
Instructions include in a step by step manner identifying start-up, operating,
shutdown and emergency action sequence sufficiently clear so a person
unfamiliar with the equipment could perform its operations.
Equipment drawings, performance curves, operating characteristics, etc.
Name addresses and phone number of manufacturer, fabricator and local
vender clearly printed or stamped on cover.
Complete parts listing which include catalog number, serial number,
contract number or other accurate provision for ordering replacement and
spare parts.
Certified drawings, where applicable, showing assembly of parts and
general dimensions.
Approved Mechanical submittals
Third Section - Plumbing Equipment O&M data including:
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Section 230100- 11
p. 172
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.
2.
G.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Section shall contain general product catalog cuts, as well as exploded view
drawings with parts lists for all valves and other items with multiple parts.
Approved Plumbing submittals
Fourth Section - Controls O&M data including:
1.
2.
3.
H.
Bid MW13039
Sequence of Operation
Description of each operating system included location of switches, breakers,
thermostats, and control devices. Provide a single line diagram, showing set
points, normal operating parameters for all loads, pressures, temperatures and
flow check points; Describe all alarms and cautions for operation.
Provide schematic control diagrams, panel diagrams, wiring diagrams, etc. for
each separate fan system, chilled water system, hot water system, exhaust air
system, pumps, etc. Each control diagram shall show a schematic representation
of mechanical equipment and location of start-stop switches, insertion
thermostats, thermometers, pressure gauges, automatic valves, etc. The correct
reading for each control instrument shall be marked on the diagram.
The Fifth Section shall contain a complete air and water test and balance report. The
report shall contain the name, address and phone number of the agency. It shall also
include:
1.
2.
3.
Floor plans showing all air openings and thermometer locations clearly marked
and cross referenced with data sheets. Format may be 8 1/2 x 11 or 11x14 if
legible.
Data sheets showing amount of air and water at each setting. See sections 23.
List of equipment with date of last calibration.
I.
Drawings and reproducible masters of drawings as required in individual specification
sections, are not to be bound in volumes but are to be delivered separate with the
maintenance manuals.
J.
See the following checklist for assistance in assembling manual:
Item #
Description
1.
3 ring heavy duty binder with Project name, number and date on
cover and project name on spine.
O&M manual on CD (with label on CD matching label on manual).
Electronic copy shall be a PDF file with bookmarks that match the
tabs in the hard copy.
Title Page [including project name, number, address, date
awarded, date of substantial completion]
Second Page Contact List [including architect (if applicable),
mechanical engineer, mechanical contractor, and general
contractor (if applicable)]
Table of Contents
Section 1 - Summary
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Y, N, or
NA
Section 230100- 12
p. 173
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
Warranty
Mechanical’s Sub-contractor List
Vendor List
Equipment List
Section 2 – Mechanical Equipment
A.
B.
C.
8.
Maintenance Schedule (including lubrication list)
Mechanical Equipment O&M Data (for each piece of equipment
submitted) per specifications
Approved mechanical submittals
Section 3 – Plumbing Equipment
A.
B.
9.
A.
Plumbing equipment O&M data
Approved plumbing submittals
Section 4 - Controls
Sequence of Operation
B.
Controls diagrams
C.
Controls Equipment
10.
Section 5 – Test and Balance Report
A.
Complete Test and Balance Report per specifications
1.23
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A.
Contractor shall instruct building maintenance personnel in the operation and
maintenance of the installed mechanical systems utilizing the Operation and
Maintenance Manual when so doing.
B.
Minimum instruction periods shall be as follows 1.
2.
3.
Mechanical - Two hours.
Plumbing - Two hours.
Temperature Control - Two hours.
C.
Instruction periods shall occur before final site observation when systems are properly
working and before final payment is made.
D.
None of these instructional periods shall overlap each other.
E.
An additional four hours of instruction will be provided by each contractor, after 60 days
of system operation by owner to insure proper system operation and answer questions.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Section 230100- 13
p. 174
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.24
A.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
RECORD DRAWINGS
Contractor shall keep an up-to-date set of mechanical and plumbing drawings in his
custody showing all changes in red, clearly defined and neatly drafted by him. At the
end of construction, he shall turn these drawings over to the Engineer. Record
drawings must be completed and submitted prior to final site observation
.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
(Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
(Not Used)
END OF SECTION 230100
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Section 230100- 14
p. 175
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 230500 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.3
Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
Dielectric fittings.
Mechanical sleeve seals.
Sleeves.
Escutcheons.
Mechanical demolition.
Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms,
furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces
above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished
occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor
ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical
contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E.
Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather
conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
F.
The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1.
2.
3.
ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
BASIC MATERIAL AND METHODS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Section 230500- 1
p. 176
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.6
Dielectric fittings.
Mechanical sleeve seals.
Welding certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1.
2.
B.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SUBMITTALS
1.
2.
B.
Bid MW13039
Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and that certification is current.
All materials, piping, etc. shall be new, and domestically made of the best commercial
quality obtainable, consistent with specified materials and for the purpose or function
intended unless specifically approved in writing prior to bid.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through
shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of
dirt, debris, and moisture.
B.
Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and
bending.
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during
progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
B.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-inplace concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C.
Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring
access that are concealed behind finished surfaces.
BASIC MATERIAL AND METHODS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Section 230500- 2
p. 177
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A.
Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and
joining methods.
B.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.2
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed
below.
B.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping
system contents.
1.
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness
unless thickness or specific material is indicated.
a.
b.
2.
Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze
flanges.
Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and
full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by
piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux
according to ASTM B 813.
F.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for generalduty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for
refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for
wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
H.
Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1.
2.
3.
4.
ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.
CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.
BASIC MATERIAL AND METHODS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Section 230500- 3
p. 178
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
2.3
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A.
Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded,
solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B.
Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C.
Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working
pressure at 180 deg F.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.4
A.
MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular
space between pipe and sleeve.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
2.5
Capitol Manufacturing Co.
Central Plastics Company.
Eclipse, Inc.
Epco Sales, Inc.
Hart Industries, International, Inc.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
Prior Approved Equal.
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
Calpico, Inc.
Metraflex Co.
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
Linkseal.
Prior Approved Equal.
Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include
type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of
length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for
each sealing element.
SLEEVES
A.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint.
B.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
BASIC MATERIAL AND METHODS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Section 230500- 4
p. 179
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
C.
Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with
plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
E.
PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
2.6
ESCUTCHEONS
A.
Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to
closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that
completely covers opening.
B.
One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated
finish.
2.7
A.
GROUT
Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement
grout.
1.
2.
3.
Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
Disconnect, demolish, and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and components
indicated to be removed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and
cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same
or compatible piping material.
Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and
plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible
ductwork material.
Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment.
Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and
remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and
make equipment operational.
BASIC MATERIAL AND METHODS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Section 230500- 5
p. 180
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
7.
B.
3.2
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and
remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is
unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new
products of equal capacity and quality.
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
piping systems. Drawings do not show every offset, or bend that may be required.
Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as
indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C.
Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in
equipment rooms and service areas.
D.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas
at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
E.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal.
F.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
H.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
I.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system
operating pressure.
L.
Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors where indicated on
drawings and where penetrating will be visible to public.
M.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board
partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
BASIC MATERIAL AND METHODS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Section 230500- 6
p. 181
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
a.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment
areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend castiron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if
ring is specified.
2.
3.
Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space
between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
4.
Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve
and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and
location of joint.
N.
Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space
between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
O.
Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves.
Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for
1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve
seals.
1.
Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing
elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve.
Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe
and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to
expand and make watertight seal.
P.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,
and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials.
Q.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
R.
Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for
roughing-in requirements.
3.3
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated,
to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube
Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
BASIC MATERIAL AND METHODS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Section 230500- 7
p. 182
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
E.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and
Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with
AWS A5.8.
F.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs
and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1.
2.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry
seal threading is specified.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are
corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open
welds.
G.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes
and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for
service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on
bolt threads.
I.
Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and
fittings according to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
J.
3.4
A.
Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and
solvent cements.
ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.
CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number
PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138
Appendix.
Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
PIPING CONNECTIONS
Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at
final connection to each piece of equipment.
Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect
piping materials of dissimilar metals.
BASIC MATERIAL AND METHODS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Section 230500- 8
p. 183
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
3.5
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting
heights are not indicated.
B.
Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems
and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or
replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with
minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible
locations.
D.
Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
END OF SECTION 230500
BASIC MATERIAL AND METHODS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Section 230500- 9
p. 184
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 230553 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their
installation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Equipment nameplates.
Equipment signs.
Access panel and door markers.
Pipe markers.
Warning tags.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each
identification material and device.
C.
Valve numbering scheme.
D.
Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Furnish extra copies (in addition to
mounted copies) to include in maintenance manuals.
1.4
A.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping
Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of
identification devices for piping.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting
of surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
C.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Section 230553- 1
p. 185
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, for permanent
attachment on equipment.
1.
Data:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
B.
3.
4.
A.
Data: Instructions for operation of equipment and for safety procedures.
Engraving: Manufacturer's standard letter style, 1/4” or larger with terms to
match equipment identification.
Thickness: 1/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent
adhesive.
Access Panel and Door Markers: 1/16” thick, engraved laminated plastic, with
abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to identification. Provide 1/8” center
hole for attachment.
1.
2.2
Location: Accessible and visible.
Fasteners: As required to mount on equipment.
Equipment Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate
engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine
subcore, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide
holes for mechanical fastening.
1.
2.
C.
Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number.
Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data.
Labels of tested compliances.
Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent
adhesive.
PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating
service, and showing direction of flow.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Colors: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary
for each application length.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full-band pipe markers
extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Either full-band or
strip-type pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required for
label.
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Section 230553- 2
p. 186
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
5.
B.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both
directions; or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers: Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, selfadhesive back.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
3.2
A.
APPLICATIONS, GENERAL
Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 23 Sections. If
more than single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications,
selection is Installer's option.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of
mechanical equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is
damaged or located where not easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and
visible. Include nameplates for the following general categories of equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Fuel-burning units, including boilers, furnaces, heaters, etc.
Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.
Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and
similar equipment.
Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.
Install equipment signs with screws or permanent adhesive on or near each major item
of mechanical equipment. Locate signs where accessible and visible.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Identify mechanical equipment with black equipment markers with white lettering.
Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than
24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately
larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering twothirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.
Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements,
indicate safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper
operations, and identify units.
Include signs for the following general categories of equipment:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous
units such as gas outlets.
Fuel-burning units, including boilers, furnaces, heaters, etc.
Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units.
Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units,
and similar equipment.
Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes.
Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Section 230553- 3
p. 187
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
g.
h.
C.
3.3
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Tanks and pressure vessels.
Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water-treatment systems, and similar
equipment.
Install access panel markers with screws on equipment access panels.
PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A.
Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install
with flow indication arrows showing direction of flow.
B.
Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces;
machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums;
and exterior nonconcealed locations as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.4
Near each valve and control device.
Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal
units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures.
At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of
concealed piping.
Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25
feet in areas of congested piping and equipment.
On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced
markers.
VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION
A.
Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves;
valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; shutoff
valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal
devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged
valves in a valve schedule.
B.
Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color
scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following:
1.
Valve-Tag Size:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches.
Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches.
Gas: 1-1/2 inches.
Steam: 2 inches.
Letter Color:
a.
Depression black filled numbers not less than ½” high and black filled
letters not less than ¼” high.
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Section 230553- 4
p. 188
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
3.5
A.
3.6
A.
3.7
A.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
VALVE-SCHEDULE INSTALLATION
Mount valve schedule on wall in accessible location in each major equipment room.
ADJUSTING
Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually
blocked by other work.
CLEANING
Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules.
END OF SECTION 230553
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Section 230553- 5
p. 189
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following:
1.
Air Systems:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Constant-volume air systems.
Variable-air-volume systems.
HVAC equipment quantitative-performance settings.
Existing systems TAB.
Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as
to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.
B.
Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains,
branches, and terminals, according to indicated quantities.
C.
Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors,
and ceilings that are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow,
smoke, odors, and other pollutants.
D.
Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors
of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat
is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.
E.
NC: Noise criteria.
F.
Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield
repeatable results.
G.
RC: Room criteria.
H.
Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230593 - 1
p. 190
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
I.
Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of
measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.
J.
Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the
suction side.
K.
System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions
that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
L.
System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance
ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when
the fan was performance tested.
M.
TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
N.
Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or
leaves the distribution system.
O.
Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment.
P.
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing
and reporting TAB procedures.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: Within 15 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 4
copies of evidence that TAB firm and this Project's TAB team members meet the
qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
B.
Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to
Proceed, submit 4 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in
Part 3.
C.
Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed,
submit 4 copies of TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3
"Preparation" Article. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this
Project.
D.
Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this
Section, on approved forms certified by TAB firm.
E.
Sample Report Forms: Submit two sets of sample TAB report forms.
F.
Warranties specified in this Section.
1.5
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by AABC or NEBB.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230593 - 2
p. 191
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
B.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
TAB Conference: Meet with Owner's and Architect's representatives on approval of
TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details.
Ensure the participation of TAB team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized
service representatives, HVAC controls installers, and other support personnel.
Provide seven days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.
1.
Agenda Items: Include at least the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
C.
Bid MW13039
Submittal distribution requirements.
The Contract Documents examination report.
TAB plan.
Work schedule and Project-site access requirements.
Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes
the following:
1.
2.
Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified
TAB reports.
Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures
specified and referenced in this Specification.
D.
TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing
and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems” or NEBB's
"Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental
Systems."
E.
Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC's "National
Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning
Systems or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of
Environmental Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification."
F.
Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more
frequently if required by instrument manufacturer.
1.
G.
Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration
and the name of party performing instrument calibration.
Approved TAB agencies:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Bonneville Test and Balance.
BTC Services.
Certified Test and Balance.
Danis Test and Balance.
Intermountain Test and Balance.
RS Analysis.
Testing and Balancing, Inc.
Prior approved equal.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230593 - 3
p. 192
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.6
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire
TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with
Owner's operations.
B.
Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before
Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize
conflicts with Owner's operations.
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and
equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems
and equipment to support and assist TAB activities.
B.
Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test
dates and times.
C.
Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems
have been satisfactorily completed.
1.8
A.
WARRANTY
National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC's "National
Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning
Systems" forms stating that AABC will assist in completing requirements of the
Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents.
Guarantee includes the following provisions:
1.
2.
The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the
Contract Documents.
Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and
installation limits.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
(Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to
discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and
equipment.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230593 - 4
p. 193
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.
2.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions
of Contract.
Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells,
flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers,
are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of
these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing
and for efficient system and equipment operation.
B.
Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.
C.
Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 1 Section "Project Record
Documents."
D.
Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design
assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of
philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E.
Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate
performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that
can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or
part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce performance ratings of
HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when
the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for
air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems,"
Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5
and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.
F.
Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that
testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have
been performed.
G.
Examine system and equipment test reports.
H.
Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing
devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices,
balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and
that their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for
efficient system and equipment operation.
I.
Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
J.
Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings
are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is
ready for operation.
K.
Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, to verify that they are
accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.
L.
Examine plenum ceilings used for supply air to verify that they are airtight. Verify that
pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230593 - 5
p. 194
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
M.
Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.
N.
Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting
or mixing fluid flows.
O.
Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight
fins.
P.
Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
Q.
Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and
controls.
R.
Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
S.
3.2
Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended
controller.
Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of
fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units,
mixing boxes, and variable-air-volume terminals.
Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two-way valves and threeway mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected.
Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight,
drafts, and cold walls.
Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract
Documents.
Controller set points are set at indicated values.
Interlocked systems are operating.
Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values.
Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures.
Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set
points if different from indicated values.
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B.
Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230593 - 6
p. 195
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
7.
8.
3.3
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required
and access to balancing devices is provided.
Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations
can be met.
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A.
Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating,
Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and this Section.
B.
Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to
the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After
testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials
identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation
Specifications for this Project.
C.
Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent
identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fanspeed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.
D.
Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
3.4
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A.
Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet
volumes with required fan volumes.
B.
Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C.
For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D.
Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow
measurements.
E.
Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and
exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F.
Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G.
Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H.
Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I.
Check for airflow blockages.
J.
Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230593 - 7
p. 196
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
K.
Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
L.
Check for proper sealing of air duct system.
3.5
A.
PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed
listed by fan manufacturer.
1.
Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling
unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as
practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and
transitions.
Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible
connection.
Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near
the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream
from duct restrictions.
Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the
plenum that houses the fan.
Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance
personnel must change filters.
Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound
traps, heat recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced
conditions.
Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design
static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect
factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur.
Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than
indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and
electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes.
Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult
equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers
and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur.
Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, economizer, and any other
operating modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.
Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to
indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
1.
Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and
adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230593 - 8
p. 197
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
a.
2.
C.
Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for
Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and
inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.
Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted.
Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within
specified tolerances.
Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's
written instructions and calculating factors.
Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified
tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than
extractors and the dampers at air terminals.
1.
2.
3.6
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1.
D.
Bid MW13039
Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of
indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations
prescribed by the Contract Documents.
Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS
A.
Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the
indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a maximum
set-point airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated
airflow of the fan. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed
evenly among the branch ducts.
B.
Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have
been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Set outside-air dampers at minimum, and return- and exhaust-air dampers at a
position that simulates full-cooling load.
Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static
pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the
entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of
terminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus
the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses.
Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow.
Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver
the designed maximum airflow.
Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written
instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the
air outlets downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air
systems.
Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver
the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in
airflow as described for constant-volume air systems.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230593 - 9
p. 198
DFCM
Bid MW13039
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
a.
6.
7.
8.
3.7
A.
3.8
If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but
leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return
airflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air
ducts and inlets as described for constant-volume air systems.
Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the staticpressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate
static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit.
Record the final fan performance data.
PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following
data:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.
Motor horsepower rating.
Motor rpm.
Efficiency rating.
Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds
varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove
proper operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and
serial numbers, and nameplate data.
PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS
A.
During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the
automatic temperature-control system.
B.
Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two
successive eight-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of
final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.
C.
Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.
3.9
A.
PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING,
SYSTEMS
AND BALANCING EXISTING
Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be
reused.
1.
Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each
fan.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230593 - 10
p. 199
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate
information.
Check the refrigerant charge.
Check the condition of filters.
Check the condition of coils.
Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate drain trap.
Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication.
Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the
measurements taken. Report deficiencies.
New filters are installed.
Coils are clean and fins combed.
Drain pans are clean.
Fans are clean.
Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated.
Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.
Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems
are affected by the renovation work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.10
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing
equipment that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been
cleaned and refurbished.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Bid MW13039
Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows
and determine the new fan, speed, filter, and coil face velocity.
Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face
velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by
equipment manufacturer.
If calculations increase or decrease the airflow and water flow rates by more than
5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated airflow and
water flow rates. If 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required.
Air balance each air outlet.
PROCEDURES FOR TESTING DUCT SYSTEMS
A.
Perform duct leakage tests and duct cleanliness tests as described in division 23.
B.
Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass initial tests and inspections.
The sheet metal contractor shall be responsible to make corrections and repairs as
necessary to pass the tests. TAB contractor shall include initial test and 1 follow up
test. Any additional follow up tests required due to system not passing shall be
performed by the TAB contractor at the Division 23 contractor’s expense.
3.11
A.
TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION
Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230593 - 11
p. 200
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
B.
Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely
affect control functions.
C.
Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual
measurements.
D.
Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).
E.
Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve
operators.
F.
Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device
positions and correlate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of
response to input changes.
G.
Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.
H.
Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems.
I.
Check main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.
J.
Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system
operates on a grounded or nongrounded power supply.
K.
Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.
3.12
A.
TOLERANCES
Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.13
Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10
percent.
Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent.
Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.
REPORTING
A.
Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents
as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for
systems' balancing devices.
Recommend changes and additions to systems'
balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing.
Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to
allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.
B.
Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed
procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of
deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230593 - 12
p. 201
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple
floors.
3.14
FINAL REPORT
A.
General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond
paper, in three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced
systems.
B.
Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing
and balancing engineer.
1.
C.
3.15
A.
Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
Provide final report on standard AABC or NEBB forms.
INSPECTIONS
Initial Inspection:
1.
2.
After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly
check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final
test and balance readings documented in the Final Report.
Randomly check the following for each system:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
B.
Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.
Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals.
Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor.
Compare the reading to the set point.
Measure sound levels at two locations.
Measure space pressure of at least 10 percent of locations.
Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.
Note deviations to the Contract Documents in the Final Report.
Final Inspection:
1.
2.
3.
4.
After initial inspection is complete and evidence by random checks verifies that
testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final
report, request that a final inspection be made by Architect.
TAB firm test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence
of Architect.
Architect shall randomly select measurements documented in the final report to
be rechecked. The rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total
measurements recorded, or the extent of measurements that can be
accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.
If the rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements
documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the
measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230593 - 13
p. 202
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
5.
6.
7.
3.16
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total
measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing
shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
TAB firm shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the
final report and balancing device settings to include all changes and resubmit the
final report.
Request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails,
Owner shall contract the services of another TAB firm to complete the testing and
balancing in accordance with the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the
services from the final payment.
ADDITIONAL TESTS
A.
Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify
that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual
conditions.
B.
Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak
summer and winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting
during near-peak summer and winter conditions.
END OF SECTION 230593
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230593 - 14
p. 203
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 230700 - HVAC AND PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Insulation Materials:
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Insulating cements.
Adhesives.
Lagging adhesives.
Factory-applied jackets.
Field-applied jackets.
Tapes.
Securements.
Corner angles.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Mineral fiber.
Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity,
thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).
B.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
C.
Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of
insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements
indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.
D.
Field quality-control reports.
HVAC AND PLUMBING INSULATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230700- 1
p. 204
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.4
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an
apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of
Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have firetest-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per
ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes,
and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
1.
2.
1.5
A.
1.6
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smokedeveloped index of 50 or less.
Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smokedeveloped index of 150 or less.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with
appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use
temperature.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports."
B.
Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation
application, duct Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for
equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop
Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation
and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
C.
Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
1.7
SCHEDULING
A.
Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required,
after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments
that have satisfactory test results.
B.
Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in
each area of construction.
HVAC AND PLUMBING INSULATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230700- 2
p. 205
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials
shall be applied.
B.
Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C.
Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride
content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D.
Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E.
Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the
manufacturing process.
F.
Calcium Silicate:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
G.
Industrial Insulation Group (The); Thermo-12 Gold.
Prior approved equal.
Preformed Pipe Sections:
Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of
noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous calcium silicate with a non-asbestos fibrous
reinforcement. Comply with ASTM C 533, Type I.
Flat-, curved-, and grooved-block sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous
calcium silicate with a non-asbestos fibrous reinforcement. Comply with
ASTM C 533, Type I.
Prefabricated Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585 for
dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and
flanges.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting
resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I. Factory-applied
jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1.
Duct insulation shall have a minimum R value = 5 for installation in an
unconditioned space, and a minimum R value = 8 for installation outdoors.
Provide a weather protective sheet metal jacket for outdoor installation.
2.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap.
Johns Manville; Microlite.
Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap.
Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.
HVAC AND PLUMBING INSULATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230700- 3
p. 206
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
e.
f.
H.
2.
Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.
Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.
Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation.
Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.
Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
Prior approved equal.
Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting
resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A.
INSULATING CEMENTS
Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.3
Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.
Prior approved equal.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
A.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
1.
2.2
Bid MW13039
Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; Triple I.
P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Super-Stik.
Prior approved equal.
ADHESIVES
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for
bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Calcium Silicate Adhesive: Fibrous, sodium-silicate-based adhesive with a service
temperature range of 50 to 800 deg F.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
C.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-97.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-27/81-93.
Marathon Industries, Inc.; 290.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-30.
Vimasco Corporation; 760.
Prior approved equal.
Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82.
HVAC AND PLUMBING INSULATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230700- 4
p. 207
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
D.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Solvent
Welding
Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with
insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
A.
Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone.
Johns-Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE
Adhesive.
P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive.
Red Devil, Inc.; Celulon Ultra Clear.
Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive.
Prior approved equal.
LAGGING ADHESIVES
1.
2.5
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.
ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80.
Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
Prior approved equal.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
A.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.
1.
2.4
Bid MW13039
Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-52.
Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-42.
Marathon Industries, Inc.; 130.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 11-30.
Vimasco Corporation; 136.
Prior approved equal.
Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to
adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F.
Color: White.
FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications.
When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive
covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
HVAC AND PLUMBING INSULATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230700- 5
p. 208
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
2.6
A.
ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic
adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835.
Compac Corp.; 104 and 105.
Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ.
Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.
Prior approved equal.
Width: 3 inches.
Thickness: 11.5 mils.
Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 2 percent.
Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic
adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
TAPES
1.
B.
Bid MW13039
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827.
Compac Corp.; 110 and 111.
Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK.
Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.
Prior approved equal.
Width: 3 inches.
Thickness: 6.5 mils.
Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 2 percent.
Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic
adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0555.
Compac Corp.; 130.
Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White PVC tape.
Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.
Prior approved equal.
Width: 2 inches.
Thickness: 6 mils.
HVAC AND PLUMBING INSULATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230700- 6
p. 209
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
4.
5.
6.
D.
Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 500 percent.
Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800.
Compac Corp.; 120.
Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF.
Venture Tape; 3520 CW.
Prior approved equal.
Width: 2 inches.
Thickness: 3.7 mils.
Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 5 percent.
Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.
SECUREMENTS
Bands:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
2.8
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.
1.
2.7
Bid MW13039
Childers Products; Bands.
PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands.
RPR Products, Inc.; Bands.
Prior approved equal.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316;
0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide.
Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020
inch thick, 1/2 inch wide.
Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted
to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.
CORNER ANGLES
A.
PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to
ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.
B.
Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according
to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H-14.
C.
Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, stainless steel
according to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or 316.
HVAC AND PLUMBING INSULATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230700- 7
p. 210
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation
and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1.
2.
3.
3.2
Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free
of defects.
Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials
that will adversely affect insulation application.
B.
Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating,
apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:
1.
2.
Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick
and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140
and 300 deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials
and application methods for operating temperature range.
Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32
and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for
appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature
range.
C.
Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with
requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
D.
Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in
contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.3
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even
surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and
piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B.
Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in
insulation system schedules.
HVAC AND PLUMBING INSULATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230700- 8
p. 211
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
C.
Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service.
Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket
in either wet or dry state.
D.
Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E.
Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F.
Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and
specialties.
G.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H.
Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints
with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J.
Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on
anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to
structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier
mastic.
Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal
insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended
by insulation material manufacturer.
Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install
shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger,
support, and shield.
K.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate
and wet and dry film thicknesses.
L.
Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Draw jacket tight and smooth.
Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as
insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples
along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive selfsealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches
o.c.
a.
4.
For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
HVAC AND PLUMBING INSULATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230700- 9
p. 212
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
5.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and
joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.
M.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its
nominal thickness.
N.
Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and
cracking due to thermal movement.
O.
Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged
areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and
seal patches similar to butt joints.
P.
For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.4
A.
Vibration-control devices.
Testing agency labels and stamps.
Nameplates and data plates.
Manholes.
Handholes.
Cleanouts.
PENETRATIONS
Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof
penetrations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof
surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor
insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor
insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below
top of roof flashing.
Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B.
Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation
flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
C.
Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations:
continuously through wall penetrations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall
surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor
insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor
insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing
at least 2 inches.
Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
HVAC AND PLUMBING INSULATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Install insulation
230700- 10
p. 213
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
D.
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire
Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
E.
Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire
rated. For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire
damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match
adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2
inches.
Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in
Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."
GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where
more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation
articles.
B.
Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other
specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise
indicated.
Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made
from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be
butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints,
seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth,
hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of
same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe
insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie
wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.
Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of
same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap
adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to
and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints,
seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.
Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of
same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap
adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and
irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket
flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the
insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below
ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.
HVAC AND PLUMBING INSULATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230700- 11
p. 214
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
6.
7.
8.
9.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe
insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the
thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat
with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a
breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabricreinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible
elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers,
valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC
covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.
Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word
"UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels.
C.
Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure
temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on
insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by
tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing
cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
D.
Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.6
A.
Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of
same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as
adjoining pipe insulation.
When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend
insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness
over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange
cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material
compatible with insulation and jacket.
Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges
except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting
of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its
attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches
over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or
union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly
with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and
trowel second coat to a smooth finish.
Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
CALCIUM SILICATE INSULATION INSTALLATION
Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1.
Secure single-layer insulation with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals and
tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.
HVAC AND PLUMBING INSULATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230700- 12
p. 215
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
2.
3.
B.
3.
4.
2.
3.
2.
3.
A.
Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus
twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer
circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of block
insulation of same material and thickness as pipe insulation.
Finish flange insulation same as pipe insulation.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available.
Secure according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
When preformed insulation sections of insulation are not available, install mitered
sections of calcium silicate insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or
bands.
Finish fittings insulation same as pipe insulation.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1.
3.7
Install 2-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3 inches.
Secure inner layer with wire spaced at 12-inch intervals. Secure outer layer with
stainless-steel bands at 12-inch intervals.
Apply a skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement to insulation surface.
When cement is dry, apply flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer
of glass cloth or tape. Overlap edges at least 1 inch. Apply finish coat of lagging
adhesive over glass cloth or tape. Thin finish coat to achieve smooth, uniform
finish.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1.
D.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1.
2.
C.
Bid MW13039
Install mitered segments of calcium silicate insulation to valve body. Arrange
insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
Finish valve and specialty insulation same as pipe insulation.
MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION
Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and
tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and
protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure
laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not
staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as
HVAC AND PLUMBING INSULATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230700- 13
p. 216
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier
mastic and flashing sealant.
B.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1.
2.
D.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available.
When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered
sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation.
Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus
twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer
circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket
insulation.
Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap
seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available.
When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe
insulation to valve body.
Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation
without disturbing insulation.
Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums:
insulation pins.
1.
2.
3.
Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per
unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head,
capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides
of vertical ducts as follows:
a.
b.
c.
On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along
longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation
end joints, and 16 inches o.c.
On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches
o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install
additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and
plenums.
HVAC AND PLUMBING INSULATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Secure with adhesive and
230700- 14
p. 217
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
d.
e.
f.
4.
b.
6.
7.
3.8
A.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.
Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend
parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape
matching insulation facing.
For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a
continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams
and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of
insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch
outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factoryor field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints,
seams, and protrusions.
a.
5.
Bid MW13039
Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain
vapor-barrier seal.
Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at
18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied
in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and
over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width
equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.
Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end
joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches
o.c.
Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation
section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows
with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation
surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure
on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches
o.c.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied
jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of
inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each duct system defined in the
"Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing
field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation.
Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each type of equipment
defined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment,
remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance.
Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by
removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their
installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight
pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two
HVAC AND PLUMBING INSULATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230700- 15
p. 218
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations
of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service
defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
B.
3.9
A.
All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection
reveals noncompliance with requirements.
DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Items Not Insulated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.10
A.
Fibrous-glass ducts.
Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
Factory-insulated plenums and casings.
Flexible connectors.
Vibration-control devices.
Factory-insulated access panels and doors.
INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE
Concealed, round and flat-oval duct insulation shall be the following:
1.
B.
Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.
Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.
Indoor, concealed return, Air.
Indoor, exposed return, Air.
Indoor, concealed, Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust.
Indoor, concealed exhaust.
Indoor, exposed exhaust.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
Concealed, low pressure, round rectangular, and flat-oval exhaust-air duct insulation
shall be the following:
1.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
C.
Rectangular, low pressure, supply-air duct insulation shall be lined per Section “Metal
Ducts”.
D.
Rectangular, return-air duct insulation shall be lined per Section “Metal Ducts”.
E.
Concealed, Type I, Commercial, Kitchen Hood Exhaust Duct and Plenum Insulation:
Fire-rated blanket or board; thickness as required to achieve 2-hour fire rating.
HVAC AND PLUMBING INSULATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230700- 16
p. 219
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
F.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Exposed or medium pressure, round and flat-oval, supply-air, and return air duct
insulation shall be a perforated linear. See Section “Metal Ducts”.
END OF SECTION 230700
HVAC AND PLUMBING INSULATION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230700- 17
p. 220
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 230900 - AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
PART 1- GENERAL CONDITIONS
1.1
A.
1.2
GENERAL CONDITIONS
All pertinent sections of Division 23, are a part of the work described in this section.
Division 1 is a part of this and all other sections of these specifications.
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
The scope of work shall include all labor, material, and equipment necessary to
complete the temperature control work for the entire project.
B.
The Building Automation System (BAS) shall be an extension of the existing Johnson
Controls Metasys campus BAS. Integrate the new local controllers with the existing
system for remote monitoring and control. The BAS shall incorporate Direct Digital
Control (DDC) for equipment and direct communication to the Central Operator
Workstations for remote monitoring and control.
C.
All line and low voltage control wiring for the temperature control system shall be
installed in conduit in accordance with the National Electric Code, Local Codes, and
DFCM and SLCC Standards.
D.
This contractor shall carefully review all notes, coordination schedules, and drawings
for work required under this section of the specification.
E.
Adjustment and validation of control system. Instruction of Owner's representative on
maintenance and operation of control equipment.
F.
Composite diagrams showing interlocks between equipment furnished under this and
other sections.
G.
This system shall include but not be limited to controls and equipment for the Facilities
Shop Building as hereinafter specified:
1.
2.
1.3
A.
Dual duct boxes
Space Thermostats.
EXECUTION
Related Work in Other Sections:
1.
Examine all sections for work related to work of this section, principal items of
which are:
a.
b.
Finished
Mechanical
Division 9
Division 23
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230900-1
p. 221
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
c.
2.
Electrical
Division 26
The Mechanical Contractor shall:
1)
2)
b.
2)
3)
4)
5)
c.
Install automatic valves, and separable wells that are specified to be
supplied by the temperature control contractor.
Furnish and install all necessary piping connections required for flow
devices.
The Sheet Metal Contractor shall:
1)
Install all automatic dampers and provide necessary blank-off plates
or transitions required to install dampers that are smaller than duct
size.
Assemble multiple section dampers with required interconnecting
linkages and extend required number of shafts through duct for
external mounting of damper motors.
Provide necessary sheet metal baffle plates to eliminate stratification
and provide air volumes specified. Locate baffles by experimentation
and fix and seal permanently in place only after stratification
problems have been eliminated.
Provide access doors or other approved means of access through
ducts for service to control equipment.
Furnish and install all smoke/fire dampers with electric actuators to
meet UL listing.
The Electrical Contractor shall:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Furnish and install line voltage power where shown on the Electrical
drawings is furnished and wired by Division 26.
Furnish and install 120 volt, 20 amp breaker for all ATC Panels.
Refer to electrical power plan and mechanical drawings for location
of ATC Panels.
Air Handling Unit duct smoke detectors shall be furnished, installed
and wired by Division 26000, Electrical Contractor. Fan shutdown
from the building Fire Alarm Panel by Division 26.
Provide the interlock control and wiring or the smoke/fire dampers
furnished by the sheet metal contractor.
Performance:
1.
2.
C.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
The following incidental work shall be furnished by the designated contractor
under the supervision of the Temperature Control Contractor:
a.
B.
Bid MW13039
Control system shall be an extension of the existing electronic direct digital
control system with remote monitoring and control at the campus Operator
Workstations.
Qualified Contractors: Johnson Controls Inc., Branch Office, contact: Greg
Jones.
Submittals:
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230900-2
p. 222
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.
Data sheets for all control systems and components.
Valve, damper, showing sizes, configuration capacity and location of all
equipment.
1)
2)
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Electric wiring and wiring connections required for the installation of the
temperature control system as herein specified, shall be provided by the
Temperature Control Contractor unless specifically shown on the drawings or
called for in the specifications to be by the Electrical Contractor. Install wiring in
accordance with the local and national electrical codes.
Wiring from the building fire alarm panel to smoke detectors shall be furnished
and installed by Electrical Contractor.
Fan shutdown wiring from the Fire Panel shall be furnished and installed by the
Electrical Contractor.
All cable shall be minimum 18 awg twisted shielded.
All cabling including communication cabling, binary inputs, binary outputs, analog
inputs and analog outputs shall be wired using the same color cable for each
type of I/O and/or communication type. (Example analog in = Yellow, analog
output = tan, binary in = orange, binary out = purple, communication = blue.)
All cabling including communication cabling, binary inputs, binary outputs, analog
inputs and analog outputs shall be labeled at least every 2 feet with the
communication and/or I/O designation type.
Instruction and Adjustment:
1.
2.
F.
Control system drawings containing pertinent data to provide a
functional operating system, including a sequence of operation.
Detailed shop drawings may be submitted in as-built form upon
project completion.
Submit six (6) complete sets of documentation.
Wiring:
1.
E.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
The following shall be submitted for approval:
a.
b.
D.
Bid MW13039
Upon completion of the project, the Temperature Control Contractor shall adjust
and validate all thermostats, controllers, valves, damper operators, relays, etc.
provided under this section.
Instruction manuals shall be furnished covering the function and operation of the
control system on the project for use by the owner's operating personnel. An
instruction period last not less than two (2) hours shall be provided to completely
familiarize operating personnel with the temperature control system and direct
digital controllers on the project.
Warranty:
1.
Upon completion of the project as defined either by acceptance of the building by
the Owner or by beneficial use of the equipment by the Owner, a warranty period
of one year shall commence. The warranty shall consist of a commitment by the
Automatic Temperature Control Contractor to provide at no cost to the Owner,
parts and labor as required to repair or replace such parts of the temperature
control system that prove inoperative due to defective materials or installation
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230900-3
p. 223
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
practices. This warranty expressly excludes routine service such as filter
cartridge replacement, compressor lubrication or instrument calibration.
G.
Project Completion Documentation:
1.
Submit three (3) copies of operation and maintenance manuals including:
a.
Manufacturer's catalog data and specification of sensors, controllers,
valves, actuators and other components.
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
An operator's manual which will include detailed instruction for all
operation of systems.
A copy of the warranty letter.
Control drawings with sequence of operation and bill of materials.
A list of operating and maintenance procedures.
Submit three (3) copies of Instrument Check-Off sheets including:
1)
2)
Installation verification of all I/O points signed and dated by the
installer that performed the work.
Software verification check off sheets verifying functional operation in
accordance with the sequence of operation signed and dated by the
technician that performed the work.
PART 2- EQUIPMENT
2.1
A.
2.2
OVERVIEW
The Automatic Temperature Control of the mechanical equipment shall be through a
local standalone DDC controller with electric damper and valve actuators where
required. Individual room control functions shall be electronic networked to the
Network Control Unit.
APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS (GENERAL)
A.
Each ASC shall operate as a standalone controller capable of performing its specified
control responsibilities independently of other controllers. Each ASC shall be a
microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, real-time digital control processor.
B.
Each ASC shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and data
bases including:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Generic Input/Output Monitor and Control
Control Processes
Energy Management Applications
Operator I/O (Portable Service Terminal)
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230900-4
p. 224
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
C.
2.3
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Application Specific Controllers shall directly support the temporary use of a portable
service terminal. The capabilities of the portable service terminal shall include but not
be limited to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
D.
Bid MW13039
Display temperatures
Display status
Display setpoints
Display control parameters
Override binary output control
Override analog setpoints
Modification of gain and offset constants
Modified selected HVAC configuration programs and down load modifications.
Powerfail Protection: All system setpoints, proportional bands, control algorithms, and
any other programmable parameters shall be stored such that a power failure of any
duration does not necessitate reprogramming the controller.
CENTRAL OPERATOR WORKSTATIONS
A.
This contractor shall modify the existing operating software to monitor and control the
mechanical hardware points. The software programming point descriptors shall match
the existing campus hardware descriptors. Prior to software programming, submit a
point list of system operation to the maintenance staff for review and comments.
B.
Upon substantial completion, this contractor shall perform a software back-up/save of
the operating software. One back-up copy shall remain at the central operator
workstation location, the other copy will be given to the Maintenance Director.
2.4
TEMPERATURE SENSORS
A.
Space sensors shall have warmer/cooler setpoint adjustments and local override
switch. Space sensors shall have a portable service tool jack, fully wired and
functional.
B.
Duct mounted averaging sensors shall use a sensing element incorporated in a copper
capillary with a minimum length of 20'. The sensor shall be installed according to
manufacturer’s recommendation and looped and fastened at a minimum of every 36".
C.
Thermowells for all immersion sensors shall be stainless steel or brass as required for
each application.
2.5
A.
CONTROL VALVES
All automatic control valves shall be fully proportioning with modulating plugs for equal
percentage of linear flow characteristics. The valves shall be sized by the control
manufacturer and by provided with analog actuators (Bellimo or prior approved equal)
of sufficient power for the duty intended. Valve body and actuator selection shall be
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230900-5
p. 225
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
sufficient to handle system pressure and shall close against the differential pressure
liable to be encountered on the project.
B.
General: Control Valves up to 4 inch shall be sized for a 3 to 5 psi drop valves shall be
pack-less, modulating, pneumatically actuated. These valves shall have a true linear
flow characteristic in relationship to valve opening.
C.
Unit Ventilator Valves, ½ Inch to 1 Inch: Valves shall be sized for a 3 to 5 psi drop.
Valve body shall be nickel plated brass. Two position valves shall not be allowed.
PART 3- SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
3.1
A.
DUAL DUCT TERMINAL UNIT SEQUENCE
Each dual duct box shall consist of a room sensor, a cold deck supply damper with an
over the shaft Direct Digital Controller, modulating integral damper motor with quick
release, integral differential pressure sensor, Discharge Air Temperature sensor, Hot
deck supply damper, and a Flo-Cross 2 x 12 points averaging and signal amplifying air
flow sensor. The temperature control shall utilize Proportional, Integral and Derivative
(PID) algorithms. Each box shall include maximum and minimum (cooling and heating)
flow settings (CFM), Morning Warm-Up/Cool-Down, Tenant Override, and Room
Temperature Control. The box shall be controlled though the BAS as follows:
1.
Unoccupied Mode:
a.
When the central air handling unit is off, the BAS shall command the supply
air dampers closed.
b.
If the room temperature falls 5 Deg F adjustable below the night setback
heating low setpoint, the BAS shall generate an alarm.
c.
When AHU is on during night setback heating mode, box shall open to
minimum occupied airflow setpoint, then modulate hot deck supply air
damper to maintain space temperature night setback heating high setpoint.
d.
When AHU is on during night setback cooling mode, box shall open to max
cooling CFM until unoccupied cooling low setpoint is reached, then close to
minimum occupied position.
2.
Occupied Mode:
a.
The BAS shall schedule the box to occupied mode. The central air
handling unit must be running before the box will operate in the occupied
mode. If the central air handling unit is running before the box is scheduled
occupied, the box shall be in the warmup/cooldown mode.
b.
There shall be a cooling setpoint of 76 Deg F. (adjustable) and a heating
setpoint of 70 Deg F. (adjustable). There shall be a 4 Deg F. (adjustable)
deadband between the heating and cooling setpoints.
c.
Cooling:
1. The BAS shall modulate the cold deck supply air damper to maintain
room temperature setpoint through the room sensor as well as the BAS.
The supply damper shall be modulated towards the maximum position as
the room temperature rises above setpoint and shall be modulated
towards the minimum position as the room temperature drops below the
setpoint. The shall operate independent of the supply air pressure.
d.
Ventilation:
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230900-6
p. 226
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
1.
The Box shall be considered in the ventilation mode when the room
temperature is between the heating and cooling setpoint. The BAS
shall modulate the supply air dampers to maintain the minimum flow
(CFM) to the room for air proper air quality.
e.
Heating:
1. When the room temperature drops below the heating set point, the
Box shall be considered to be in the heating mode. The BAS shall
modulate the hot deck from minimum flow to heating maximum flow.
f.
Warm-Up Cool-Down Mode:
1. When the BAS commands the central air handling unit on before the
scheduled occupied start time, the system shall be in the WarmUp/Cool-Down mode. When in the Warm-Up/Cool Down mode, the
box shall control to occupied temperature setpoint.
g.
The Tenant Override:
1. Local override: When a box is in the Unoccupied Mode and a button on
the room sensor is pushed, the BAS shall place the box in the Occupied
Mode for 60 minutes (adjustable). The BAS shall command the other
boxes on the same floor to their minimum open position, and the
appropriate central air handling unit and central plant equipment to on in
order to provide the overridden box with the necessary comfort.
3. Each sensor shall have an adjustable slide or up and down buttons for
warmer/cooler adjustment. Range of adjustment shall be programmed
in BAS, and shall be +/- 2 degrees adjustable.
h.
Box Room Sensor:
1.
The Room Sensor shall provide room temperature value to the
controller.
2.
The Room Sensor shall be supplied in the following manner:
a.
LCD display for showing (typically) the current temperature.
Tenant override to allow timed override of unoccupied to occupied
mode of operation.
b.
LED indication of override state
c.
Up/Down keys to allow adjustment of the current setpoint
d.
User interface with the Box Sensor shall be provided as a
configurable function, and shall offer password protection for
access to network variable editing.
e.
The room sensor shall have a plug-in port for the Portable
Operators Terminal (POT). (Two POT’s with cables shall be
provided per specifications)
f.
The Room Sensor shall provide access to additional diagnostic
data from a sensor-user keypad request. This diagnostic mode is
displayed on the LCD screens and includes separate displays for
the controllers:
Subnet and Node Address
Errors
Alarms
Temperature Offset
END OF SECTION 230900
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
230900-7
p. 227
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 233113- METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.3
A.
Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.
Single-wall round and flat-oval ducts and fittings.
Sheet metal materials.
Duct liner.
Sealants and gaskets.
Hangers and supports.
Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, ductmounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and
balancing requirements for metal ducts.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam
and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and
performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
1.
Static-Pressure Classes:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
Leakage Class:
a.
b.
METAL DUCTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Supply Ducts (except in Mechanical Rooms): 2-inch wg.
Supply Ducts (Upstream from Air Terminal Units): 3-inch wg.
Supply Ducts (Downstream from Air Terminal Units): 1-inch wg.
Supply Ducts (in Mechanical Equipment Rooms): 2-inch wg.
Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg.
Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg.
Round Supply-Air Duct: 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg.
Flat-Oval Supply-Air Duct: 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg.
233113- 1
p. 228
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
c.
d.
B.
A.
Rectangular Supply-Air Duct: 6 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg.
Flexible Supply-Air Duct: 6 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg.
Seismic Hazard Level A: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.48.
Seismic Hazard Level B: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.30.
Seismic Hazard Level C: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.15.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of the following products:
1.
2.
3.
Liners and adhesives.
Sealants and gaskets.
Seismic-restraint devices.
B.
Welding certificates.
C.
Field quality-control reports.
1.5
A.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports and seismic restraints shall
withstand the effects of gravity and seismic loads and stresses within limits and under
conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible" SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems."
1.
2.
3.
1.4
Bid MW13039
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
2.
3.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.
AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum
supports.
AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A.
General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth)
Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved,
duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible."
METAL DUCTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
233113- 2
p. 229
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
C.
Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams Rectangular Ducts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements,
materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
D.
Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction:
Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 2, "Fittings and Other Construction," for
static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support
intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible."
2.2
A.
SINGLE-WALL ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCTS AND FITTINGS
General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based
on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,
but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Lindab Inc.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
SEMCO Incorporated.
Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.
Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Metco.
Prior approved equal.
B.
Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and
diameter (diameter of the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct).
C.
Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Transverse Joints Round Duct," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials
involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
1.
D.
Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.
Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Seams - Round Duct
and Fittings," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials
involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
1.
METAL DUCTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded
longitudinal seams.
233113- 3
p. 230
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
2.
E.
2.3
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches in width (major dimension) with
butt-welded longitudinal seams.
Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and
Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing
requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A.
General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and
duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be
free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other
imperfections.
B.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1.
2.
C.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars;
black and galvanized.
1.
D.
2.4
A.
Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.
Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.
Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce
aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or
EPDM gasket materials.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less;
3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
DUCT LINER
Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and
with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group.
Johns Manville.
Knauf Insulation.
Owens Corning.
Prior approved equal.
Maximum Thermal Conductivity:
1)
METAL DUCTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Type I, Flexible: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean
temperature.
233113- 4
p. 231
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
2)
2.
3.
4.
B.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Type II, Rigid: 0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean
temperature.
Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will
form the interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosionresistant coating. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an
NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems.
Solvent-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with
ASTM C 916.
Duct insulation shall have a minimum R value = 5 for installation in an
unconditioned space, and a minimum R value = 8 for installation outdoors.
Insulation Pins and Washers:
1.
2.
C.
Bid MW13039
Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel
pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank,
length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized
carbon-steel washer.
Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inchthick galvanized steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation
securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-19, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent
adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness
with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.
Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive
metal nosing.
Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive.
Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure
butted-edge overlapping.
Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners
of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal
joints necessary.
Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500
fpm.
Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not
exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at
intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.
Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings
that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall.
Fabricate edge facings at the following locations:
a.
b.
c.
METAL DUCTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Fan discharges.
Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher
than 2500 fpm or where indicated.
233113- 5
p. 232
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
9.
2.5
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness
as specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at
uniform distance from outer shell without compressing insulation.
a.
10.
Bid MW13039
Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch diameter, with an overall
open area of 23 percent.
Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers,
turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat
sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to
duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.
SEALANT AND GASKETS
A.
General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for
sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum
smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
B.
Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
Application Method: Brush on.
Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.
Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.
Water resistant.
Mold and mildew resistant.
VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).
Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.
Service: Indoor or outdoor.
Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare),
stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.
Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.
Type: S.
Grade: NS.
Class: 25.
Use: O.
D.
Flange Gaskets:
plasticizer.
E.
Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:
1.
2.
3.
METAL DUCTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene
Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and
shall be rated for 10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.
EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.
Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated
couplings and fitting spigots.
233113- 6
p. 233
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
2.6
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.
B.
Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or
galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
C.
Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and
Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."
D.
Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts:
ASTM A 603.
E.
Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.
F.
Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel,
and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping
device.
G.
Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws;
compatible with duct materials.
H.
Trapeze and Riser Supports:
1.
2.
3.
Galvanized steel complying with
Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.
Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc
chromate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DUCT INSTALLATION
A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to
size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other
design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are
approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.
B.
Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install round and flat-oval ducts in maximum practical lengths.
D.
Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E.
Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and
for branch connections.
METAL DUCTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
233113- 7
p. 234
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
F.
Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines.
G.
Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and
permanent enclosure elements of building.
H.
Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
I.
Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment
rooms and enclosures.
J.
Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are
exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation
with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on
four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
K.
Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire
dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire
and smoke dampers.
L.
Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign
materials. Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction
Guidelines."
3.2
A.
SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
Seal duct seams and joints for duct static-pressure and leakage classes specified in
"Performance Requirements" Article, according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 1-2, "Standard Duct Sealing
Requirements," unless otherwise indicated.
1.
For static-pressure classes 1- and 1/2-inch wg, comply with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Seal Class C, except as
follows:
a.
3.3
Ducts that are located directly in zones they serve.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports."
B.
Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel
fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1.
2.
METAL DUCTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and
completely cured.
233113- 8
p. 235
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
3.
4.
5.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate
concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick.
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate
concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.
C.
Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2,
"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers
and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch
intersection.
D.
Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
E.
Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with
welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a
maximum intervals of 16 feet.
F.
Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pullout, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building
materials where used.
3.4
CONNECTIONS
A.
Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23
Section "Duct Accessories."
B.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Leakage Tests:
1.
2.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual."
Test the following systems:
a.
3.
4.
5.
METAL DUCTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Supply air.
Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate
leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements.
Test for leaks before insulation application.
Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system
or section being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test entire
system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above
maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for
testing.
233113- 9
p. 236
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
C.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Duct System Cleanliness Tests:
1.
2.
Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.
Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness
according to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and
Restoration of HVAC Systems."
a.
Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter
media shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.
D.
Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.6
DUCT SCHEDULE
A.
Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel:
B.
Intermediate Reinforcement:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Liner:
1.
D.
Supply- and Return-Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I.
Double-Wall Duct Interstitial Insulation:
1.
E.
Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel.
Stainless-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel.
Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized sheet steel coated with zinc
chromate.
Supply- and Return-Air Ducts: 1 inch thick.
Elbow Configuration:
1.
Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards
- Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a.
Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower:
1)
2)
b.
Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm:
1)
2)
3)
METAL DUCTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio.
Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two
vanes.
Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3,
233113- 10
p. 237
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
"Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in
Elbows."
c.
Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:
1)
2)
3)
2.
Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-3, "Round Duct Elbows."
a.
Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of
direction have proportionately fewer segments.
1)
2)
3)
b.
c.
F.
Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three
segments for 90-degree elbow.
Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four
segments for 90-degree elbow.
Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five
segments for 90-degree elbow.
Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.
Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam.
Branch Configuration:
1.
Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards
- Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-6, "Branch Connections."
a.
b.
2.
Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.
Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.
Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and
Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.
a.
b.
c.
G.
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two
vanes.
Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3,
"Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in
Elbows."
Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap.
Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap.
Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.
Duct Schedule
1.
METAL DUCTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
Rectangular duct with liner:
233113- 11
p. 238
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
a.
2.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Low pressure supply and return.
Rectangular duct wrapped with insulation:
a.
3.
Bid MW13039
Low pressure exhaust and fresh air.
Single wall round with wrapped insulation.
a.
Low pressure supply and return.
END OF SECTION 233113
METAL DUCTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
233113- 12
p. 239
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 233300 - DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
Volume dampers.
2.
High Efficiency Take-Offs.
3.
Turning vanes.
4.
Duct-mounting access doors.
5.
Flexible connectors.
6.
Flexible ducts.
7.
Duct accessory hardware.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
A.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.4
A.
1.5
A.
Division 23 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for electric and
pneumatic damper actuators.
Volume dampers.
High Efficiency Take-Offs.
Turning vanes.
Duct-mounting access doors.
Flexible connectors.
Flexible ducts.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
233300- 1
p. 240
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M
and having G60 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for
surfaces exposed to view.
C.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel
ducts.
D.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less;
3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
E.
Frame: 0.052-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting
flange.
F.
Blades: 0.025-inch- thick, roll-formed aluminum.
G.
Blade Seals: Neoprene.
H.
Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
I.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
J.
Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
2.2
A.
VOLUME DAMPERS
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Air Balance, Inc.
American Warming and Ventilating.
Clifco
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
McGill AirFlow Corporation.
METALAIRE, Inc.
Nailor Industries Inc.
Penn Ventilation Company, Inc.
Ruskin Company.
Vent Products Company, Inc.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
233300- 2
p. 241
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
11.
12.
B.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.3
Air Rite.
Prior approved equal.
Pressure Classes of 3-Inch wg or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts
with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating
shaft.
Standard Volume Dampers: Opposed-blade design, standard leakage rating, with
linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
1.
D.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories.
Stiffen damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers
in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to
seal duct consistent with pressure class.
1.
C.
Bid MW13039
Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064
inch thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated
for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in
ducts.
Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel.
Aluminum Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch- thick, aluminum sheet channels;
frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and flangeless frames
where indicated for installing in ducts.
Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch- thick aluminum sheet.
Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch- thick extruded aluminum.
Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inchthick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit
damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
HIGH EFFICIENCY TAKE-OFF
A.
Factory-manufactured rectangular-to-round or round-to-round 45 degree leading tap
fabricated of 24 ga zinc-coated lockforming quality steel sheets meeting requirements
of ASTM A 653, with G-90 coating.
B.
One inch wide mounting flange with die formed corner clips, pre-punched mounting
holes, and adhesive coated gasket.
C.
Manual Volume Damper:
1.
2.
3.
Single blade, 22 ga minimum.
3/8 inch minimum square rod with brass damper bearings at each end.
Heavy duty locking quadrant on 1-1/2 inch high stand-off mounting bracket
attached to side of round duct.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
233300- 3
p. 242
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
D.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Approved Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.4
Bid MW13039
HETD-L by Daniel Manufacturing.
STO by Flexmaster USA Inc.
HET by Sheet Metal Connectors Inc.
Hercules.
Clifco
Air-Rite.
Prior approved equal.
TURNING VANES
A.
Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and
Flexible" for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes.
B.
Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1-1/2-inch- wide, single-vane, curved blades
of galvanized sheet steel set 3/4 inch o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades
set 2 inches o.c.; and set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
1.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
C.
2.5
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Duro Dyne Corp.
METALAIRE, Inc.
Ward Industries, Inc.
Prior approved equal.
Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated
faces and fibrous-glass fill.
DUCT-MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS
A.
General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
B.
Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and rectangular; fabricated of galvanized sheet
metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include
vision panel where indicated. Include 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
American Warming and Ventilating.
CESCO Products.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
Greenheck.
McGill AirFlow Corporation.
Nailor Industries Inc.
Ventfabrics, Inc.
Ward Industries, Inc.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
233300- 4
p. 243
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
j.
k.
2.
3.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Air Rite.
Prior approved equal.
Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
Provide number of hinges and locks as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Less Than 12 Inches Square: Secure with two sash locks.
Up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks.
Up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches.
Sizes 24 by 48 Inches and Larger: One additional hinge.
C.
Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber.
D.
Insulation: 1-inch- thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.
2.6
A.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Duro Dyne Corp.
Ventfabrics, Inc.
Ward Industries, Inc.
Prior approved equal.
B.
General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and
adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1.
C.
Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide
attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or
0.032-inch- thick aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with ducts.
D.
Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with
weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.
1.
2.
3.
2.7
A.
Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..
Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd..
Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling.
Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F.
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
Manufacturers:
DUCT ACCESSORIES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
233300- 5
p. 244
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
2.8
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
Hart & Cooley, Inc.
McGill AirFlow Corporation.
Themaflex.
Prior approved equal.
Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, multiple layers of aluminum laminate
supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene
or aluminized vapor barrier film.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Bid MW13039
Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.
Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.
Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F.
Flexible Duct Clamps: Nylon strap, in sizes 3 through 18 inches to suit duct size.
DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A.
Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including
screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing
instruments and of length to suit duct insulation thickness.
B.
Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to
gasoline and grease.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
A.
Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116,
"Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
B.
Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel
accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in
stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C.
Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and
where indicated.
D.
Install volume dampers in ducts with liner; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
E.
Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where
branches lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of
two duct widths from branch takeoff.
F.
Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
233300- 6
p. 245
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
G.
Install fire and smoke dampers, with fusible links, according to manufacturer's ULapproved written instructions.
H.
Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories
and terminal units as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
I.
Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, rectangular access doors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
J.
On both sides of duct coils.
Adjacent to fire or smoke dampers, providing access to reset or reinstall fusible
links.
To interior of ducts for cleaning; before and after each change in direction, at
maximum 50-foot spacing.
On sides of ducts where adequate clearance is available.
One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.
Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.
Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.
Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.
Body Access: 25 by 14 inches.
Body Plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.
Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, round access doors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 inches in diameter.
Two-Hand Access: 10 inches in diameter.
Head and Hand Access: 12 inches in diameter.
Head and Shoulders Access: 18 inches in diameter.
Body Access: 24 inches in diameter.
K.
Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Mechanical Identification."
L.
Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with
fans and motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators.
M.
For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and higher, cover flexible connectors
with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.
N.
Connect terminal units to supply ducts with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible duct.
Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.
O.
Connect diffusers to low pressure ducts with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct
clamped or strapped in place.
P.
Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.
Q.
Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
233300- 7
p. 246
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
3.2
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.
B.
Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action.
C.
Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 23 Section
"Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."
END OF SECTION 233300
DUCT ACCESSORIES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
233300- 8
p. 247
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 233600 – DUAL DUCT BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
1.3
A.
Dual-duct air terminal units.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of the following products, including rated capacities,
furnished specialties, sound-power ratings, and accessories.
1.
2.
3.
Air terminal units.
Liners and adhesives.
Sealants and gaskets.
B.
Field quality-control reports.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For air terminal units to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1
Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
2.
1.4
Instructions for resetting minimum and maximum air volumes.
Instructions for adjusting software set points.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
B.
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems
and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up."
DUAL DUCT BOXES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
233600- 1
p. 248
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.5
A.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
DUAL-DUCT AIR TERMINAL UNITS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1.
Carnes.
2.
Krueger.
3.
Nailor Industries Inc.
4.
Price Industries.
5.
Titus.
6.
Tuttle & Bailey.
7.
Prior approved equal.
B.
Configuration: Two control dampers inside unit casing with mixing attenuator section
and control components inside a protective metal shroud.
C.
Casing: 0.034-inch steel, wall.
1.
Casing Lining: Adhesive attached, 1-inch- thick, coated, fibrous-glass duct liner
complying with ASTM C 1071, and having a maximum flame-spread index of 25
and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50, for both insulation and adhesive,
when tested according to ASTM E 84.
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Cover liner with nonporous foil.
Air Inlets: Round stub connections or S-slip and drive connections for duct
attachment.
Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections.
Access: Removable panels for access to parts requiring service, adjustment, or
maintenance; with airtight gasket.
Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.
Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings.
1.
Maximum Damper Leakage: ARI 880 rated, 3 percent of nominal airflow at 3inch wg inlet static pressure.
E.
Velocity Sensors: Multipoint array with velocity sensors in cold- and hot-deck air inlets
and air outlets.
F.
Direct Digital Controls: Bidirectional damper operators and microprocessor-based
controller and room sensor. Control devices shall be compatible with controls specified
DUAL DUCT BOXES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
233600- 2
p. 249
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
in Division 23 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" and shall have the
following features:
1.
2.
Damper Actuators: 24 V, powered closed, spring return open.
Terminal Unit Controller: Pressure-independent, variable-air-volume controller
with electronic airflow transducers factory calibrated to minimum and maximum
air volumes, and having the following features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.2
Occupied and unoccupied operating mode.
Remote reset of airflow or temperature set points.
Adjusting and monitoring with portable terminal.
Communication with temperature-control system specified in Division 23
Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls."
3.
Room Sensor: Wall mounted with temperature set-point adjustment and access
for connection of portable operator terminal.
4.
Unit shall be capable of controlling to sequence listed in specification division 23
Controls. The following is a diagram of the required sequence of operation.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.
B.
Steel Cables: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.
C.
Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel,
and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping
device.
D.
Air Terminal Unit Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal
screws; compatible with duct materials.
DUAL DUCT BOXES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
233600- 3
p. 250
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
E.
2.3
A.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes and plates for units with steel casings;
aluminum for units with aluminum casings.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Factory Tests: Test assembled air terminal units according to ARI 880.
1.
Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and
minimum factory-set airflows, coil type, and ARI certification seal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
B.
Install air terminal units level and plumb.
service and maintenance.
C.
Install wall-mounted thermostats.
3.2
Maintain sufficient clearance for normal
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."
B.
Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel
fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and
completely cured.
Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate
concretes and for slabs more than 4 inches thick.
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate
concretes and for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.
C.
Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
D.
Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pullout, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building
materials where used.
DUAL DUCT BOXES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
233600- 4
p. 251
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
3.3
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
CONNECTIONS
A.
Install piping adjacent to air terminal unit to allow service and maintenance.
B.
Hot-Water Piping: In addition to requirements in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping,"
connect heating coils to supply with shutoff valve, strainer, control valve, and union or
flange; and to return with balancing valve and union or flange.
C.
Connect ducts to air terminal units according to Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts."
D.
Make connections to air terminal units with flexible connectors complying with
requirements in Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories."
3.4
A.
3.5
IDENTIFICATION
Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, and maximum and
minimum factory-set airflows. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section
"Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for equipment labels and warning signs
and labels.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
inspections.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations,
including connections.
C.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service:
Engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations,
including connections, and to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
test for compliance with requirements.
Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
E.
Air terminal unit will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
DUAL DUCT BOXES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
233600- 5
p. 252
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
3.6
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
A.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
STARTUP SERVICE
1.
3.7
Bid MW13039
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
Verify that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal unit
manufacturer to achieve proper performance.
Verify that controls and control enclosure are accessible.
Verify that control connections are complete.
Verify that nameplate and identification tag are visible.
Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified.
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air terminal units.
END OF SECTION 233600
DUAL DUCT BOXES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
233600- 6
p. 253
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
A.
Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volumecontrol dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following:
1.
2.
Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise
ratings.
Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, room
location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
MANUFACTURERS
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply to product selection:
1.
2.2
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
GRILLES AND REGISTERS
Fixed Face Ceiling Return, Exhaust, or Transfer Air Grille:
1.
Products:
a.
Carnes; RSLA.
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
233713 - 1
p. 254
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.3
A.
Material: Steel.
Finish: Baked enamel, white.
Face Arrangement: 1/2 inch horizontal blade spacing.
Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide.
Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers:
Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Carnes; SK-A.
Krueger; SH.
METALAIRE, Inc., Metal Industries Inc.; 55005.
Price Industries; SMD.
Titus; TDC.
Tuttle & Bailey; MS.
Or equal by:
1)
2)
3)
4)
2.
3.
A.
A-J Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Anemostat; a Mestek Company.
Dayus Register & Grille.
Hart & Cooley, Inc.; Hart & Cooley Div.
Nailor Industries of Texas Inc.
CEILING DIFFUSER OUTLETS
1.
2.4
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Krueger; S85H.
Price Industries; 535.
Titus; 355RL.
Tuttle & Bailey; T70D.
Or equal by:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
2.
3.
4.
5.
Bid MW13039
A-J Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Anemostat; a Mestek Company.
Hart & Cooley, Inc.; Hart & Cooley Div.
Nailor Industries of Texas Inc.
Material: Steel.
Finish: Baked enamel, white.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to
ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
233713 - 2
p. 255
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance
of equipment.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.
B.
Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts,
fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve
design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure
drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed
in lay-in ceiling panels, provide lay-in ceiling module. Where architectural features or
other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.
C.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow
service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
3.3
A.
ADJUSTING
After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as
directed, before starting air balancing.
END OF SECTION 233713
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
233713 - 3
p. 256
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ITEM
SECTION
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
CONDUIT RACEWAYS
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
WIRING DEVICES
INTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM EXISTING
260001
260070
260072
260080
260110
260120
260135
260140
260510
280721
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260000 – 1
p. 257
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 260001 – ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B.
Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and other applicable documents also apply to work of this
section.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A.
1.3
The contract documents indicate the extent of electrical work. Provide all labor, materials,
equipment, supervision and service necessary for a complete electrical system as described in
divisions 26, 27, and 28.
RELATED SECTIONS:
A.
Other Divisions relating to electrical work apply to the work of this section. See other applicable
Divisions including, but not necessarily limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
1.4
Division 1 – General and Supplementary Conditions
Division 2 – Existing Conditions
Division 3 – Concrete
Division 5 – Metals
Division 6 – Wood, Plastics, and Composites
Division 7 – Thermal and Moisture Protection
Division 8 – Openings
Division 9 – Finishes
Division 21 – Fire Suppression
Division 22 – Plumbing
Division 23 – Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning
Division 28 – Electronic Safety and Security
INTERPRETATIONS OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS:
A.
Prior to bidding the job, submit requests for clarification in writing to the Architect/Engineer prior
to issuance of the final addendum.
B.
After signing the contract, provide all materials, labor, and equipment to meet the intent,
purpose, and function of the contract documents.
C.
The following terms used in Division 26 and 28 documents are defined as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
"Provide" - Means furnish, install, and connect, unless otherwise indicated.
"Furnish" - Means purchase new and deliver in operating order to project site.
"Install" - Means to physically install the items in-place.
"Connect" - Means make final electrical connections for a complete operating piece of
equipment. This includes providing conduit, wire, terminations, etc. as applicable.
"Or Equivalent" - Means to provide equivalent equipment. Such equipment must be
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260001 – 1
p. 258
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
approved by the Engineer prior to bidding.
1.5
EXAMINATION OF SITE:
A.
Visit the site and verify existing field conditions prior to submitting bid.
B.
All costs arising from site conditions and/or preparation shall be included in the base bid. No
additional charges will be allowed due to inadequate site inspection.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Perform work in accordance with all governing codes, rules, and regulations including the
following minimum codes (latest editions or as otherwise accepted by the Authorities Having
Jurisdiction):
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
National Electric Code (NEC)
International Building Code (IBC)
International Fire Code (IFC)
International Mechanical Code (IMC)
International Plumbing Code (IPC)
American Disability Act (ADA)
National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)
Local Codes and Ordinances
Comply with all standards where applicable for equipment and materials including the following
minimum standards:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Underwriter's Laboratories (UL)
American Society for testing Materials (ASTM)
Certified Ballast Manufacturers (CBM)
Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)
National Electrical Manufacturer's Institute (NEMA)
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL)
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
American Institute of Electrical Engineer's Electrical Power
Systems and Grounding in Commercial Construction
Illuminating Engineers Society (IES)
C.
Provide new electrical equipment conforming to all requirements as set forth in the above
standards. Provide UL labeled equipment where such label is applicable.
D.
Comply with all state and local codes and ordinances. When conflicts occur among codes,
standards, drawings, and/or specifications, the most stringent requirements shall govern.
E.
Obtain all permits, inspections, etc. required by authority having jurisdiction. Include all fees in
bid. Provide a certificate of approval to the owner's representative from the inspection authority
at completion of the work.
F.
Provide only first-class workmanship from competent workers, conforming to the best electrical
construction practices.
G.
The contractor shall have a current state contracting license applicable to type of work to be
performed under this contract.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260001 – 2
p. 259
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.7
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SUBMITTALS:
A.
The contractor shall submit complete shop drawings and other required submittals. Incomplete
submittals will be returned to the contractor unreviewed. No time extensions or cost increases
will be allowed for delays caused by the return of incomplete submittals.
B.
Shop Drawings: After the contract is awarded, but prior to manufacture or installation of any
equipment, submit eight (8) complete sets of shop drawings. Partially complete sets of shop
drawings are not acceptable. Submit all shop drawings in one complete submittal package.
Prior to submitting shop drawings, review and certify that they are in compliance with the
contract documents; Sign all approved shop drawings. Allow a minimum of two weeks for
architect/engineer to review shop drawings. Refer to architectural general provision section for
additional requirements.
C.
Provide equipment catalog “cut sheets”, brochures and/or drawings which clearly describe the
proposed equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections, isometrics, and detailed engineering
and dimensional information as applicable including equipment room layouts. Electrical room
layouts are required to show all electrical equipment locations for all projects that include
electrical rooms. Do not submit catalog sheets which describe several different items in
addition to those items to be used, unless all relevant information is clearly identified. Bind each
information set in three ring binder or binders of sufficient size or sizes to enclose all
information. Organize all information by section. Provide separate tabbed covers for each
section of Divisions 26, 27, and 28, indicating section number for each section requiring
submittals.
D.
Include on front cover of binder or binders the name and location of the project, architect,
electrical engineer, general contractor, electrical contractor, subcontractors, supplier/vendor,
order number, volume, date, and any other applicable information. Certify that shop drawings
are submitted in accordance with the contract documents with a written statement indicating
compliance. Submittals will be reviewed and comments produced two times maximum.
Additional reviews will be billed at current rates.
1.8
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:
A.
Submit four (4) complete sets of operating instruction and maintenance manuals for all
equipment and materials provided under Divisions 26, 27, and 28.
B.
Provide manufacturer's recommended operating and maintenance instructions, cleaning and
servicing requirements, serial and model number of each piece of equipment, complete list of
replacement parts, performance curves and data, wiring diagrams, warranties, and vendor's
name, address, and phone numbers. Do not submit information which describes several
different items in addition to those items to be used, unless all relevant information is clearly
identified. Assemble all data in completely indexed volume or volumes. Engrave the job title,
and name, address, and phone numbers of the contractor on the front cover and on the spine.
Incomplete O&M manuals will be returned to the contractor for corrections / additions.
1.9
RECORD DRAWINGS:
A.
Maintain on a daily basis a complete set of "Red-Lined Drawings", reflecting an accurate record
of all work including addendums, revisions, and changes. Indicate precise dimensioned
locations of all concealed work and equipment, including concealed or embedded conduit,
junction boxes, etc. Record all "Red-Lined Drawing" information on a set of full sized prints of
the contract drawings.
B.
Certify the "Red Lined Drawings" for correctness. Indicate on each drawing the name of the
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260001 – 3
p. 260
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
general and electrical contractors with signatures of each representative responsible for the
work.
C.
1.10
The electrical engineering design firm will create record (as-built) drawings from the certified
red-lined drawings; however, the general and electrical contractors retain the responsibility for
the accuracy of the record drawings.
WARRANTY:
A.
Ensure that the electrical system installed under this contract is in proper working order and in
compliance with drawings, specifications, and/or authorized changes and is free from electrical
defects. Without additional charge, replace or repair, to satisfaction of the owner's
representative, except from ordinary wear and tear, any part of the installation which may fail or
be determined unacceptable within a period of one (1) year after final acceptance or as
otherwise indicated in individual sections, but in no case less than one year. Warranty
incandescent and fluorescent lamps only for a period of two months from the date of substantial
completion.
B.
Provide complete warranty information for each item including beginning of warranty period,
duration of warranty, names, addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filling a
claim and obtaining warranty services. Written warranties and guarantees are to be submitted
separately as:
1.
2.
Originals bound in a binder clearly identified with the title, “WARRANTIES AND
GUARANTEES,” the project name, the project number, and the Contractor’s business
name.
Electronic documents in *.pdf format.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL:
A.
2.2
All materials shall be new and shall bear the manufacturer's name, trade name, and the
approved testing laboratory such as the UL label in every case where a standard has been
established for that particular material. Used materials are acceptable only if specifically
indicated on drawings.
SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS:
A.
Provide only specified products or products approved by addendum. Substitutions will be
considered if two copies of the proposal is received at the architect's/engineer's office eight (8)
working days prior to the bid day. Include in the proposal the specified and proposed catalog
numbers of the equipment under consideration and a catalog cut sheet(s) with pictorial and
descriptive information. Certify that the equipment proposed is equal to that specified, that it
has the same electrical and physical characteristics, compatible dimensions, and meets the
functional intent of the contract documents.
B.
It is the responsibility of the contractor to make all substituted equipment comply with the intent
of the contract documents and bear all cost associated with conflicts arising form the use of
substituted equipment.
C.
Provide samples if so required by the architect or engineer before or after bid day.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260001 – 4
p. 261
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
2.3
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SPARE PARTS:
A.
Provide spare parts as specified in Divisions 26, 27, and 28 sections. Deliver all spare parts to
owner's representative prior to substantial completion.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL:
A.
Workmanship: Provide only first class workmanship from competent workers. Defective
materials or workmanship will not be allowed on the project. Provide competent supervision for
the work to be accomplished. Keep same foreman on the job, unless a change is authorized
by the engineer.
B.
Coordination: Prior to construction, layout electrical work and coordinate work with other
trades. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installation of materials and equipment for efficient
flow of the work. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be
set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
Install electrical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of equipment
components. Coordinate the installation of electrical materials and equipment above ceilings
with suspension system, mechanical equipment and systems, and structural components.
Coordinate with all utilities including power, communication, and data installations.
C.
Provide cutting, drilling, channeling, etc. only as necessary for proper completion of the work.
Do not cut structural members unless authorization is issued in writing by the architect/engineer.
D.
Repairs: Repair damage to building, grounds, or utilities as a result of work under this contract
at no additional cost to the owner.
E.
Dimensioning: Electrical drawings indicate locations for electrical equipment only in their
approximate location, unless specifically dimensioned. Do not scale electrical drawings for
dimensional information. Refer to architectural drawings and shop drawings where applicable
for locations of all electrical equipment. Field verify all dimension on the job site.
F.
Provide block-outs, sleeves, demolition work, etc., required for installation of work specified in
this division.
G.
Standards: Provide electrical installation in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA standards, and NECA's "Standards of
Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill
requirements.
H.
All workmen doing work of any nature on State of Utah projects must at all times carry their
electrician's license with them and show it upon request. The acceptable ratio of apprentice to
journeyman electricians on the job is 1:1.
3.2
REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION:
A.
When it is clearly apparent that information is not adequately described in the construction
documents or when a coordination problem exists, submit a request for information (RFI)
through proper contractual channels. The electrical engineering design firm will provide a
response through its contractual channel. Although verbal direction may be given to expedite
changes, responses are not considered part of the contract documents until a change order has
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260001 – 5
p. 262
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
been issued and signed by the Owner or his designated representative. The Contractor shall
bear all costs associated with proceeding on any change order that has not been approved by
the Owner or his designated representative.
B.
3.3
Any damages caused by construction delays due to frivolous RFI’s, will be born solely by the
Contractor.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS:
A.
3.4
Provide all necessary guards or construction barriers and take all necessary precautions to
insure the safety of life and property.
CLEAN:
A.
3.5
Clean up all equipment, conduit, fittings, wire, packing cartons, plastic, and other debris that is a
direct result of the installation of the work of this division, both during the execution, and at the
conclusion, of the project. Keep the site clean and safe during the progress of the work. Clean
fixtures, interior and exterior of all equipment, and raceways prior to final acceptance. Vacuum
interior of all electrical panels and equipment. Correct any damaged equipment. Touch-up or
repaint if necessary.
TEMPORARY POWER:
A.
Make arrangements with the proper institution authority for all temporary electricity.
B.
All temporary wiring shall meet the requirements of NEC Article 305 and the State Industrial
Commission.
3.6
POWER OUTAGES:
A.
3.7
All power outages required for execution of this work shall occur during non-standard working
hours and at the convenience of the owner. Any electrical service interruption will be
coordinated at least 7 days in advance of the power shut-off. Include all costs for overtime work
in bid. Coordinate all outages and proceed only after receiving authorization from the owner's
representative. Keep all outages to an absolute minimum.
STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS:
A.
3.8
Provide storage space for storage of materials and apparatus and assume complete
responsibility for all losses due to any cause whatsoever. Lost or damaged materials will be
replaced at no additional cost to owner. Do not store materials and apparatus in any public
thoroughfare or in any area on the site where such storage would constitute a hazard to
persons in the vicinity. Protect completed work, work underway, and apparatus against loss or
damage.
FIRE PENETRATION SEALS:
A.
Seal all raceway and/or cable penetrations through fire-rated floors, wall, and ceilings to prevent
the spread of smoke, fire, toxic gas or water through the penetration either before, during or
after fire. Provide penetration sealants and fittings of ratings to match the rating of the
penetrated materials so that the original fire rating of the floor or wall is maintained as required
by Article 300-21 of the NEC.
B.
Sealant Systems: Provide sealants, wall wraps, partitions, caps, and other accessories
complying with UL 1479 (ASTM E-814) from the following where applicable:
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260001 – 6
p. 263
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
3M Fire Barrier Sealing Penetration System
Chase Foam Fire Stop System
Thomas and Betts Flame Safe Fire Stop System
Nelson Fire Stop Products
C.
Fittings: Where applicable, provide OZ Type CFSF/I and CAFSF/I fire seal fittings for conduit
and cable penetrations through concrete and masonry wall, floor, slabs, and similar structures.
D.
Install sealants and fittings in accordance with all manufacturer's written instructions.
3.9
LABELING:
A.
Engraved black plastic laminated, with white-core labels, 1/16" thick, shall be permanently
attached on both the interior and exterior the following electrical equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
B.
3.10
A.
3.11
A.
Branch panels
Switchgear
Disconnect switches
Motor starter and controls junction boxes (power and auxiliary)
Push buttons
Thermal switches
Time switches
Motor control centers
Transformer
Similar equipment.
Lighting contactors and associated switches
Junction boxes larger than 4x4x1/2.
The labels shall have 1/4" high, engraved letters, such as EF-1, AC-1, Panel A, etc.
PROJECT FINALIZATION AND START-UP:
Have each representative give personal instructions on operating and maintenance of their
equipment to the owner's maintenance and/or operation personnel..
FINAL REVIEW:
Have the project foreman accompany their reviewing parties and remove coverplates, panel
covers, access panels, etc. as requested, to allow review of the entire electrical system.
END OF SECTION 260001
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260001 – 7
p. 264
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 260070 – ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
B.
This section is a Division 26 General Provisions section, and is part of each Division 26 and 28
sections making reference to electrical connections.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A.
Extent of electrical connections for equipment include all final electrical connections for all
equipment having electrical requirements including, but not necessarily limited to the following:
1.
1.3
Equipment specified under all divisions of the contract. Refer to other divisions for
specific electrical requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
STANDARDS: Refer to Section 260001 – Electrical General Provisions as applicable.
B.
SHOP DRAWINGS: Not required.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL:
A.
Provide all materials for electrical connections including, but not necessarily limited to the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
B.
Raceways
Fittings
Conductors
Cords
Cord caps
Wiring devices
Pressure connectors
Lugs (CU-AL)
Electrical insulating tape
Heat-shrinkable tubing
Cable ties
Wire nuts
Other items and accessories as required.
Crimp on or slip-on type splicing materials designed to be used without wire stripping are not
acceptable.
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260070 – 1
p. 265
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
C.
Power Distribution Blocks: Provide Square D Type LB or Equivalent.
D.
Refer to other Division 26, 27, and 28 Sections for specification of electrical materials as
applicable.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL:
A.
3.2
Make electrical connections in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable
requirements of NEC, NEMA Standards, and NECA's "Standards of Installation", and in
compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.
CONNECTIONS:
A.
Permanently Installed Fixed Equipment:
1.
2.
B.
Install conductors in flexible conduit from junction box to equipment control panel or
connection point.
Where such installations are subject to moisture, install in liquid-tight flexible conduit.
Movable equipment:
1.
Provide wiring devices, cord caps, and multi-conductor cables as required.
C.
Other methods as required by the NEC and/or as required by special equipment or field
conditions.
D.
Power Distribution Blocks: Unless noted otherwise on drawings, provide power distribution
blocks only for tapping of feeders and branch circuits. Locate in junction box or gutter in NEMA
ratings to suit application.
3.3
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS:
A.
3.4
Obtain manufacturer's instruction and wiring diagram regarding electrical connections of each
piece of equipment and provide connections in accordance therewith.
VERIFICATION OF LOAD CHARACTERISTICS:
A.
Verify electrical load characteristics of all equipment prior to rough-in. Review respective shop
drawings of all other Divisions and Owner's equipment manuals. Report any variances from
electrical characteristics noted in the contract documents to the Architect/Engineer prior to
rough-in.
B.
Value of rough-in work, electrical equipment, etc. installed and/or purchased by the contractor
not meeting equipment requirements shall be credited back to the owner.
END OF SECTION 260070
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260070 – 2
p. 266
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 260072 – ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY:
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
Seismic restraints for electrical equipment and systems.
DEFINITIONS:
A.
IBC: International Building Code.
B.
Seismic Restraint: A structural support element such as a metal framing member, a cable, an
anchor bolt or stud, a fastening device, or an assembly of these items used to transmit seismic
forces from an item of equipment or system to building structure and to limit movement of item
during a seismic event.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are
more stringent.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS:
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
2.2
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
manufacturers specified.
SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS:
A.
Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads
calculated or imposed under this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times
the applied force.
B.
Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-3, factory-fabricated components for field
assembly.
ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260072 – 1
p. 267
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.
2.
3.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Available Manufacturers:
a.
Cooper B-Line; a division of Cooper Industries.
b.
ERICO International Corporation.
c.
Allied Support Systems; Power-Strut Unit.
d.
GS Metals Corp.
e.
Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.; O-Strut Div.
f.
National Pipe Hanger Corp.
g.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
h.
Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
i.
Wesanco, Inc.
Finishes:
a.
Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to
MFMA-3.
Channel Dimensions: Selected for structural loading and applicable seismic forces.
C.
Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed
for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
D.
Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded
body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in
riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as
required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
E.
Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,
shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
F.
Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their
supports to building surfaces include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Verify suitability of fasteners in subparagraph below for use in lightweight concrete or
concrete slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement
concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
a.
Available Manufacturers:
1)
Hilti, Inc.
2)
ITW Construction Products.
3)
MKT Fastening, LLC.
4)
Simpson Strong-Tie Co. Inc.
In the following subparagraph, use stainless steel anchors in corrosive environments.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.
a.
Available Manufacturers:
1)
Cooper B-Line; a division of Cooper Industries.
2)
Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc
3)
Hilti, Inc.
4)
ITW Construction Products.
5)
MKT Fastening, LLC.
6)
Powers Fasteners.
Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for
attached structural element.
Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260072 – 2
p. 268
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
2.3
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SEISMIC-RESTRAINT COMPONENTS:
A.
Rated Strength, Features, and Application Requirements for Restraint Components: As defined
in reports by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Structural Safety Factor: Strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components
used shall be at least five times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be
subjected.
B.
Angle and Channel-Type Brace Assemblies: Steel angles or steel slotted-support-system
components; with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building
structure at the other end.
C.
Cable Restraints: ASTM A 603, zinc-coated, steel wire rope attached to steel or stainless-steel
thimbles, brackets, swivels, and bolts designed for restraining cable service.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Available Manufacturers:
a.
Amber/Booth Company, Inc.
b.
Loos & Co., Inc.
c.
Mason Industries, Inc.
Seismic Mountings, Anchors, and Attachments: Devices as specified in Part 2 "Support,
Anchorage, and Attachment Components" Article, selected to resist seismic forces.
Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally
bolted connections to hanger rod, of design recognized by an agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchors: Neoprene units designed for
seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor
bolts and studs used.
Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene
elements and steel sleeves designed for seismically rated rigid equipment mountings,
and matched to type and size of attachment devices used.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and
systems, except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B.
Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for
raceways as within 12 inches of coupling, fitting, and box, at each 90 degrees bend, minimum of
two supports per ten foot run. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter.
C.
Multiple Raceways: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support
system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding
specified design load limits.
1.
3.2
Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps, or as
otherwise required by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
SUPPORT AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT INSTALLATION:
A.
Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements, except as specified in this Article.
ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260072 – 3
p. 269
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
B.
Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, raceways may be
supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.
C.
Install seismic-restraint components using methods approved by the evaluation service
providing required submittals for component.
D.
Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of
components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads
within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall
be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg).
E.
Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods
unless otherwise indicated by code:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock
washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm)
thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs
less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.
To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69
Spring-tension clamps.
To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,
transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means
that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements.
F.
Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing
bars.
G.
Do not drill or core cut holes for anchors or use powder-activated fasteners in post-tension
slabs, joists, and beams.
3.3
INSTALLATION OF SEISMIC-RESTRAINT COMPONENTS:
A.
Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide
resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.
B.
Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide
resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.
C.
Restraint Cables: Provide slack within maximums recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at
flanges of beams, upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.
END OF SECTION 260072
ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260072 – 4
p. 270
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 260080 – ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
B.
This section is a Division 26 General Provisions section, and is part of each Division 26 and 28
sections making reference to electrical demolition.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A.
Extent of electrical demolition work is indicated by drawings.
B.
Electrical demolition items are shown to give a basic description of the extent of demolition
work, but may not be inclusive.
C.
Do not assume that the electrical drawings reflect as-built conditions. Visit and observe the
project prior to submitting bid and determine extent of electrical demolition work.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Standards: Refer to Section 260001 - Electrical General Provisions as applicable.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS - Not Used.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL:
A.
Demolition work shall be laid out in advance to eliminate unnecessary cutting, drilling,
channeling, etc. Where such cutting, drilling, or channeling becomes necessary, perform with
care, use skilled mechanics of the trades involved. Cutting work of other contractors shall be
done only with the consent of that contractor. Cutting of structural members is not permitted.
Repair damage to building and equipment as a result of electrical demolition work under this
contract at no additional cost to owner.
B.
Obtain permission from the architect before penetrating any ceiling, floor, and wall surfaces.
3.2
METHODS:
A.
Disconnect and remove any/all fixtures, devices, equipment, etc. required for proper completion
of the work whether shown or not.
B.
Relocate, rewire, and/or reconnect any/all fixtures, devices, equipment, etc. that for any reason
obstructs construction.
ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260080 – 1
p. 271
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
C.
Maintain circuit integrity and continuity of all existing circuits/feeders, and systems that interfere
with or are interrupted by remodel work, unless those circuits/feeders are to be abandoned
completely. Maintain all circuits and systems in operation during construction. Provide
temporary panels, temporary wiring and conduits, etc. as required.
D.
Leave all existing fixtures, devices, equipment, etc. In portions of the building not being
remodeled, in working condition.
E.
Remove and dispose of all raceways, conductors, boxes, devices, equipment, etc., that are not
to be reused. Terminate at accessible junction box by providing proper knockout closure, tape
conductors, and label as "spare" with circuit no., Zone no., or other characteristic identifying
source.
F.
Existing raceways may be reused, if in place, where in compliance with the contract documents
and the National Electrical Code. Upgrade and/or provide new conduit supports where
necessary for all raceways being reused. Insure integrity of existing raceways before re-use.
G.
Return to owner all light fixtures which are to be removed. Dispose of all light fixtures if so
directed by owner in accordance with local environmental laws and policies. Those fixtures
indicated for re-use shall be thoroughly cleaned, repaired as required, re-lamped, and installed
as indicated. When storing fixtures for reuse, store in area and/or provide protective covering
that will keep construction dust and materials off fixtures.
H.
Completely remove all telephone or data cables which are to be removed back to source or as
directed by owner.
I.
Disconnect and remove all sound system equipment including speakers, amplifiers, etc. And
return to owner. Completely remove and dispose of all associated conduit and wire.
3.3
PATCHING AND REPAIR:
A.
Finished Surfaces: The electrical contractor is responsible for patching and repair of all
existing interior surfaces pertaining to the installation of work under this Division, unless
specifically noted elsewhere in the contract documents. Where patching and repair is
necessary, surfaces shall be finished (painted, etc.) to match the adjacent materials, finished,
and colors. Requirements of other Divisions such as Division 9 - finishes shall apply.
B.
Hard Surfaces: Whenever excavation or trenching is required for the installation of electrical
work, it shall be the responsibly of the electrical contractor to make repairs and/or replacements
of hard finish surfaces such as concrete, asphalt, etc. Requirements of other Divisions such as
Division 2 – Existing Conditions shall apply.
3.4
CONCEALING:
A.
All raceways shall be concealed within the ceilings, walls, and floors, except in locations where
exposed raceways are specifically permitted, such as equipment rooms and unfinished storage
areas.
B.
Surface-mounted raceways or systems shall be permitted only where approved by
Architect/Engineer.
END OF SECTION 260080
ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260080 – 2
p. 272
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 260110 – CONDUIT RACEWAYS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
B.
This section is a Division 26 General Provisions section, and is part of each Division 26, 27, and
28 sections making reference to conduit raceways.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A.
Extent of raceways is indicated by drawings and schedules.
B.
Types of raceways in this section include the followings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Rigid Metal Conduit
Intermediate Metal Conduit
Electrical Metallic Tubing
Flexible Metal Conduit
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Standards: Refer to Section 260001 – Electrical General Provisions as applicable. Provide
conduit raceway installation in accordance with recommendations of the American Iron and
Steel Institute "Design Manual on Steel Electrical Raceways", latest edition.
B.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of raceway of types and sizes
required, whose products have been in satisfactory service for not less than three (3) years.
C.
Shop Drawings: Not required.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUITS:
A.
Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC): Provide zinc-coated, hot-dipped galvanized, rigid metallic conduit
in accordance with Federal Specification WW-C-0581 and ANSI C80.1.
B.
Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Provide hot-dipped galvanized, intermediate metal conduit in
accordance with Federal Specification WW-C-581.
C.
Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT): Provide electric metal tubing in accordance with Federal
Specification WW-C-563 and ANSI C80.3.
D.
Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide zinc-coated, flexible metal conduit in accordance with Federal
Specification WW-C-566.
CONDUIT RACEWAYS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260110 – 1
p. 273
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
2.2
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
FITTINGS:
A.
Rigid Metal Conduit, Intermediate Metal Conduit, and PVC Externally Coated Rigid Metal
Conduit: Provide fully-threaded, malleable steel fittings, rain-tight and concrete-tight as
applicable. Provide double locknuts and metal bushings at all conduit terminations. Install OZ
Type B bushings on conduits 1-1/4" and larger.
B.
Electric Metallic Tubing: Provide insulated throat, non-indenter, set screw, malleable steel
fittings. Screws must have a full set. Provide concrete-tight compression-type fittings in
suspended slabs. All EMT fittings shall be fabricated from steel. Die-cast fittings or fittings
made from pot metal shall not be allowed. Indenter type fittings are not acceptable. Install OZ
Type B bushings on conduits 1" and larger.
C.
Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide flexible metal conduit fittings in accordance with Federal
Specification W-F-406, Type 1, Class 1, and Style A. Commercial "greenfield" not less than
1/2" diameter or as otherwise specified on drawings is acceptable.
D.
Expansion Fittings: OZ Type AX, or equivalent to suit application.
E.
Sealing Bushings: Provide OZ Type FSK, WSK, or CSMI as required by application. Provide
OZ Type CSB internal sealing bushings.
F.
Cable Supports: Provide OZ cable supports for vertical risers, type as required by application.
2.3
SIZES:
A.
Provide conduits in sizes as indicated in contract documents or as otherwise specified herein,
but not less than 3/4".
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL:
A.
3.2
Install raceway and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,
applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA Standards, and NECA's "Standards of Installation", and
in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.
LOCATIONS:
A.
Rigid Metal Conduit and Fittings: Use for conduit bends greater than 22 degrees where buried
below grade or slab on grade. Install RMC where raceway passes vertically through slab-ongrade. Where raceways penetrate building, manholes, or vault walls and floors below grade,
provide RMC for a minimum distance of 10' on the exterior side of the floor or wall. Use RMC
for exposed runs where conduit is subject to moisture, weather, or mechanical injury. Use in
hazardous locations in accordance with all NEC requirements.
B.
Install circuits/feeders rated 100 amps and greater, in rigid or intermediate metal conduit (RMC/
IMC).
C.
Electric Metal Tubing and Fittings: Use for above-grade feeders, branch circuits, and signal and
control circuit, unless specifically noted otherwise on drawings. Install in suspended slabs
subject to local code requirements and fire rating considerations.
CONDUIT RACEWAYS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260110 – 2
p. 274
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
D.
3.3
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings: Use as whips for lighting fixtures, fixed equipment where
not exposed to weather of moisture, other devices where required by NEC, and as requested by
the Engineer. Maximum length not to exceed 6', unless specifically approved by the Electrical
Engineer.
METHODS:
A.
Maintain a minimum of 12" clearance between steam or hot water lines or other hot surfaces.
Where such clearance is impractical, insulate conduit with approved materials.
B.
Install conduits parallel with or at right angles to lines of the structure. Route conduits
symmetrically where possible.
C.
Field bends and offsets shall be made without flattening, kinking, rippling or destroying the
smooth internal bore or surface of the conduit and to not less than NEC minimum radius.
Conduit that shows signs of rippling or kinking shall not be installed. Conduits installed with
wrinkles or kinks or otherwise in an unworkmanlike manner shall be replaced at no additional
cost to owner.
D.
Precaution shall be exercised to prevent accumulation of water, dirt or concrete in the conduits
during the execution of the project. Conduits in which water or foreign matter has been
permitted to accumulate shall be thoroughly cleaned or the conduits runs replaced where such
accumulation cannot be removed by methods approved the engineer.
E.
Any conduit which pierces airtight spaces or plenums shall be sealed to prevent air leakage with
mastic acceptable to the Architect.
3.4
CONCEALING:
A.
3.5
All raceways shall be concealed within the ceilings, walls, and floors, except in locations where
exposed raceways are specifically permitted, such as equipment rooms and unfinished storage
areas. In equipment rooms, if lighting raceways are run exposed, installation shall not be done
until piping and duct work layout has been determined in order that lighting boxes may be
located so as to avoid being covered by overhead ducts and piping. If lighting raceways in
equipment rooms are concealed in the structural ceiling slab, after mechanical work is
complete, exposed conduit extensions shall be run to locate lighting fixtures where they are not
obscured by work of other trades.
ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY:
A.
3.6
Provide electrically continuous conduit systems throughout.
FIELD CUTS AND THREADS:
A.
Cut all conduits square. Remove all sharp or rough edges and ream all burrs, inside and
outside. Provide clean sharp threads on RMC and IMC.
B.
Engage at least five full threads on all RMC and IMC fittings. Before couplings or fittings are
attached, apply one coat of red lead or zinc chromate to male threads of RMC or IMC. Apply
coat of red lead, zinc chromate or special compound recommended by manufacture to conduit
where conduit protective coating is damaged.
3.7
CONDUIT ENDS:
A.
Cap all spare conduits. Cap or plug conduit ends during construction to prevent entrance of
CONDUIT RACEWAYS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260110 – 3
p. 275
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
foreign material.
3.8
CLEANING:
A.
Pull mandrel and swab through all conduits before installing conductors.
END OF SECTION 260110
CONDUIT RACEWAYS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260110 – 4
p. 276
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 260120 – CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
B.
This section is a Division 26 General Provisions section, and is part of each Division 26, 27, and
28 sections making reference to conductors and cables.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A.
This section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and
terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less.
B.
Types of conductors and cables in this section include the following:
1.
C.
Applications for conductors and cables required for project include:
1.
1.3
Copper Conductors.
Branch Circuits.
SUBMITTALS:
A.
Product Data: For each type of conductor and/or cable indicated.
B.
Field Quality-Control Test Reports: From Contractor. Refer to Section 260001 – General
Electrical Provisions.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL:
A.
Manufacturers: In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, provide
products by the manufacturer specified, subject to compliance with requirements.
B.
Ambient Conditions: Conductors used for branch circuits in areas where the ambient conditions
exceed 30 degree C. shall be provided with insulation approved for that temperature.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260120 – 1
p. 277
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
C.
2.2
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Wire Sizes: As indicated on electrical drawings or as specified herein, but in no case less than
No. 12 AWG.
COPPER CONDUCTORS:
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cerro Wire & Cable Company.
General Cable Technologies Corporation.
Encore Wire Corporation.
Southwire Incorporated.
B.
Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Cable Applications" Article for application requirements.
C.
References and Ratings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
ICEA S-95-658 / NEMA WC70.
ASTM.
UL Standard 83.
UL Standard 1063 (MTW).
Federal Specification J-C-30B.
NEC.
D.
Conductor Material: Copper.
E.
Stranding: Solid conductor for No. 12 AWG, stranded for No. 10 AWG and larger.
F.
Conductor Insulation Types: Thermoplastic-insulated, Type THHN / THWN-2.
2.3
CONNECTORS AND SPLICES:
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
AMP Incorporated/Tyco International.
Hubbell/Anderson.
O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.
3M Company; Electrical Products Division.
B.
Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated.
C.
Splices for wire sizes #10 and smaller shall be screw-on type similar to scotch or ideal wing nut
connectors. Crimp-on splices designed to be used without wire stripping are not acceptable.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL:
A.
Install conductors, cables, and accessories as indicated, in compliance with manufacturer's
written instruction, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA's "Standards of Installation", and in
accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260120 – 2
p. 278
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
3.2
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
CONDUCTOR APPLICATIONS:
A.
Feeders: As indicated on the electrical drawings.
B.
Branch Circuits:
1.
2.
3.3
Exposed, including in crawlspaces: Copper conductors in raceway.
Concealed in ceilings, walls, and partitions: Copper conductors in raceways.
INSTALLATION:
A.
Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C.
Use pulling means; including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will
not damage cables or raceway.
D.
When raceway is not required, install concealed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of
structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.
E.
Support cables according to other applicable specification sections.
F.
Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements to comply with applicable fire stop
specification sections.
G.
Color Coding: Color code secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors. Colors
shall remain consistent throughout the project and shall match existing coding system where
applicable.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Conductor sizes No. 6 AWG and smaller: Colored insulation.
Conductors sizes No. 4 AWG and larger: 2 inch (51 mm) band of Colored adhesive
marking tape applied at all terminations, junction boxes, and pull boxes.
Branch circuit switched-legs and travelers: Colored insulation (in colors other than those
indicated below).
Color-code 120/208V system conductors:
a.
Phase A: Black.
b.
Phase B: Red.
c.
Phase C: Blue.
d.
Neutral A: White with Black stripe.
e.
Neutral B: White with Red stripe.
f.
Neutral C: White with Blue stripe.
g.
Neutral (Shared when allowed): White
h.
Ground: Green.
i.
Isolated Ground: Green with yellow tracer.
Color-code 277/480V system conductors:
a.
Phase A: Brown.
b.
Phase B: Orange.
c.
Phase C: Yellow.
d.
Neutral A: Gray with Brown stripe.
e.
Neutral B: Gray with Orange stripe.
f.
Neutral C: Gray with Yellow stripe.
g.
Neutral (Shared when allowed): Gray.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260120 – 3
p. 279
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
h.
3.4
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Ground: Green.
HOMERUN CIRCUITS:
A.
Homerun circuits may be combined in common conduits at the option of the contractor in
compliance with the following:
1.
2.
3.5
Three-Phase Installations: Not more than three single-phase circuits in one conduit,
unless specifically noted otherwise, if each circuit is from a different phase (a, b, or c).
Single-Phase Installations: Not more than two single-phase circuits in one conduit,
unless specifically noted otherwise, if each circuit is from a different phase (a or b).
NEUTRAL CONDUCTORS:
A.
LINE-TO-NEUTRAL BRANCH CIRCUITS: Provide a dedicated neutral for each line-to-neutral
branch circuit. Size the neutral conductor the same as the phase conductor. In each outlet or
junction box containing multiple neutral conductors, tag each neutral to identify which circuit it
serves.
B.
The only allowable exception to providing a dedicated neutral for each line-to-neutral branch
circuit is for systems furniture when a multi-phase, oversized common neutral connection is
required; refer to systems furniture circuits paragraph below. In such cases, provide a common
neutral sized one size (AWG) larger than the largest phase conductor. Provide a multi-pole
circuit breaker in branch panelboard for multi-phase circuits sharing a common neutral.
3.6
SYSTEM FURNITURE CIRCUITS:
A.
Coordinate system furniture wiring requirements and termination locations with supplier/installer
prior to rough-in. Coordinate placement of connection junction boxes on/in walls and in floor
(poke-through), where applicable, to insure that adequate accessibility is maintained. Verify
furniture provided and the typical wiring requirements:
B.
4-Circuit, 3+D Wiring: Provide a total of 8 conductors to each system furniture connection
consisting of three circuits with shared equipment ground and shared oversized neutral; and
one dedicated circuit with dedicated isolated ground and dedicated neutral. Size the shared
neutral conductor one size (AWG) larger than the largest phase conductor.
C.
3-Circuit, Shared Neutral Wiring: Provide a total of 5 conductors to each system furniture
connection consisting of three circuits with shared equipment ground and shared oversized
neutral. Size the shared neutral conductor one size (AWG) larger than the largest phase
conductor.
D.
4-Circuit, 3I+1 Wiring: Provide a total of 8 conductors to each system furniture connection
consisting of three circuits with shared isolated ground and shared oversized neutral; and one
dedicated circuit with dedicated equipment ground and dedicated neutral. Size the shared
neutral conductor one size (AWG) larger than the largest phase conductor.
E.
3-Circuit, Separate Neutral Wiring: Provide a total of 8 conductors to each system furniture
connection consisting of two circuits with two dedicated neutrals and shared isolated ground;
and one dedicated circuit with dedicated equipment ground and dedicated neutral.
F.
4-Circuit, 2+2 Wiring: Provide a total of 8 conductors to each system furniture connection
consisting of two circuits with shared equipment ground and shared oversized neutral; and two
circuit with shared isolated ground and shared oversized neutral. Size the shared neutral
conductors one size (AWG) larger than the largest phase conductor.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260120 – 4
p. 280
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
3.7
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
VOLTAGE DROP:
A.
Provide branch circuit conductors in sizes such that voltage drop for branch circuits do not
exceed 3 percent at the farthest outlet. Provide service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors
so that the voltage drop on the entire electrical system does not exceed 5 percent at the farthest
outlet. This shall be strictly followed regardless of the conductor sizes indicated on the electrical
drawings. Increase conductor sizes (and conduits where necessary to comply with NEC
conduit fill requirements) as necessary to accommodate this requirement. Calculations shall be
based on the following:
1.
2.
3.
Lighting Branch Circuits: Connected load plus 25% spare.
Appliance and Equipment Branch Circuits: Nameplate or NEC required load.
120V Convenience Outlet Branch Circuits: 12 amps minimum, but in no case less than
NEC loading requirements. Use the following schedule:
Distance (feet)
0-80
81-125
126-200
201-320
4.
3.8
Wire Size (AWG)
#12
#10
#8
#6
Use the NEC method to calculate voltage drop.
CONNECTIONS:
A.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL
486A and UL 486B.
B.
Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent
or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
C.
Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack. Use
pig tails when wiring outlets.
3.9
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A.
Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a.
Inspect cables for physical damage and proper connection in accordance with
the electrical construction documents.
b.
Test cable mechanical connections to manufacturer’s recommended values with
a calibrated torque wrench.
c.
Check cable color coding for compliance with electrical specifications.
Electrical Tests:
a.
Perform insulation resistance test on each conductors for feeders 100 amps and
greater with respect to ground and adjacent conductors. Applied potential shall
be 1000 volts dc for 1 minute.
b.
Perform continuity test to insure proper cable connection.
Test Values:
a.
Minimum insulation resistance values shall not be less than two megaohms.
Test Reports: Prepare a written report and submit to the Electrical Engineer at the completion
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260120 – 5
p. 281
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
of the project. The report shall include the following:
1.
2.
3.
Test procedures used.
Test results that comply with requirements.
Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve
compliance with requirements.
END OF SECTION 260120
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260120 – 6
p. 282
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 260135 – ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
B.
This section is a Division 26 General Provisions section, and is part of each Division 26, 27, and
28 sections making reference to electrical boxes and fittings.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A.
Extent of electrical boxes and fittings work is indicated by drawings and schedules.
B.
Types of electrical boxes and fittings in this section include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.3
Outlet Boxes
Junction Boxes
Pull Boxes
Floor Boxes
Conduit Bodies
Bushings
Locknuts
Knockout Closures
Miscellaneous Boxes and Fittings
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Standards: Refer to Section 260001 – Electrical General Provisions as applicable.
B.
Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturer of boxes and fittings required,
whose products have been in satisfactory service for not less than three years.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings on floor boxes only where required.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
INTERIOR OUTLET BOXES:
A.
General: Provide one piece, galvanized or cadmium-plated, flat-rolled, sheet steel interior outlet
boxes of types, shapes, and sizes to suit respective location and installation. Construct with
stamped knockouts on back and sides and with threaded screw holes. Provide corrosionresistant screws for securing boxes, covers, and wiring devices. Size all junction boxes in
accordance with NEC Table 314.16(A), with a minimum box size of 4" x 4" x 1-1/2". Where
three raceway entries are made, provide outlet boxes with a minimum depth of 2-1/8". Where
four or more raceway entries are made, provide outlet boxes with a minimum depth of 4-11/16".
Gangable boxes shall not be used.
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260135 – 1
p. 283
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
B.
2.2
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Switch, Telephone, and Receptacle Outlets: Provide outlet boxes not less than 4" square, with
adapting tile or plaster covers where necessary to set flush with finished surfaces. Where three
raceway entries are made, provide outlet boxes with a minimum depth of 2-1/8". Gang boxes
shall be used where more than one switch or device is located at one point. Sectional Boxes
are not acceptable. In masonry walls where tile or plaster ring cannot be used, install a singlegang 3-1/2" deep box minimum, unless otherwise noted. Where four or more raceway entries
are made, provide outlet boxes with a minimum depth of 4-11/16".
JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES:
A.
2.3
Provide code-gauge sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with removable screw-on covers and
welded seams, of types, shapes, and sizes to suit each respective location and installation.
Size all junction and pull boxes in accordance with NEC 314.28. Provide stainless steel nuts,
bolts, screws, and washer.
FLOOR BOXES:
A.
Provide steel or PVC, weatherproof, concrete-tight floor boxes of types, shapes, and sizes to
suit each respective location and installation. Where multi-service floor boxes are indicated,
provide floor boxes sized to accommodate wiring devices and communication outlets shown on
drawings. Construct floor boxes with fully adjustable leveling screws, and knockouts as
required to accommodate specified conduits.
B.
Provide floor boxes from the following manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.4
Bell Electric
Crouse-Hinds
Hubbell
Steel City
Thomas&Betts
Wiremold
CONDUIT BODIES:
A.
Provide galvanized, cast-metal conduit bodies of type, shapes, and sizes to suit respective
locations and installation. Construct with threaded conduit entrance ends and removable
covers. Provide corrosion-resistant screws.
B.
Aluminum boxes and fitting shall not be permitted.
2.5
CONDUIT CONNECTIONS:
A.
Box connectors 3/4" and larger shall be insulated, throat-type or equal type plastic bushings.
Provide double locknuts and insulating plastic bushings for RMC and IMC terminating at panels
and boxes.
B.
Where RMC penetrates building, manholes, or vault walls and floors below grade, provide
sealing bushings with external membrane clamps as applicable. Provide segmented internal
sealing bushings in all raceways penetrating building walls and slabs below grade, and in all
above grade raceway penetrations susceptible to moisture migration into building through
raceway. Where RMC terminates in manhole, vault, or pull box, provide insulated grounding
bushings. Also see Section 260135 – Electrical Boxes and Fittings.
C.
Install OZ type "B" connectors for all conduits 1" and larger.
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260135 – 2
p. 284
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
D.
2.6
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Provide cable supports in all vertical risers in accordance with NEC 300-19.
EXPANSION FITTINGS:
A.
2.7
Provide expansion joint fittings in all conduit runs crossing structural expansion joints, whether
above-grade, in slab-on-grade, or in suspended slabs. Provide OZ type "AX" or approved
equivalent, size to the raceway.
ACCESSORIES:
A.
Provide all accessories including, but not necessarily limited to, bushings, knockout closures,
locknuts, offset connectors, etc. of types, shapes, and sizes to suit respective locations and
installation. Construct of corrosion-resistant steel.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL:
A.
3.2
Install electrical boxes and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's written instruction,
applicable requirements of the NEC, NEMA Standards, and NECA's "Standards of Installation",
and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill
requirements.
METHODS:
A.
Where outlet boxes are subject to weather or moisture, install weatherproof outlet boxes.
B.
Remove knockouts only for entering conduits. Provide knockout closures to cap unused
knockout holes where blanks are mistakenly removed.
C.
Do not use condulets in place of elbows or junction boxes. Condulets in sizes 2" or larger shall
not be used, unless specifically approved by the electrical engineer.
D.
Install boxes and conduit bodies in readily accessible locations. Install recessed boxes with
faces of boxes or rings flush with finished surfaces. Seal all openings between outlet box and
adjacent surfaces with plaster, grout, or similar suitable material.
E.
For stud construction, install boxes with rigid supports using metal bar hangers, or 2" X 4", 1" X
6" wood bridging between studs with screws. Welding or nailing boxes directly to metal joist
and studs is not acceptable. Boxes set opposite in common wall shall have at least 10" of
conduit between them. Securely fasten outlet boxes to structural surfaces to which attached.
F.
For concrete or masonry construction, solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete and masonry.
Provide box supports as required to keep outlet boxes flush with finished surfaces.
G.
Coordinate location of all outlet boxes with millwork, back splashes, tackboards, etc.
H.
Install junction boxes or condulets in conduit runs as required at 100 foot maximum intervals on
long runs. This shall apply to concrete junction boxes in grade and junction boxes within the
building.
I.
Provide electrical connections for installed boxes.
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260135 – 3
p. 285
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
3.3
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
IDENTIFICATION:
A.
Mark circuit number on exterior side of junction boxes located in ceilings such that circuits
numbers are readily identifiable. For outlet boxes in wall, mark circuit numbers on interior sides
of outlet boxes. Mark all device coverplates with source panel and circuit number.
B.
Identification labels shall be as follows:
Normal Power
Emergency Power
UPS
Black with White letters
Red with White Letters
Orange with White Letters
C.
Boxes that exceed 4 x 4 x ½ inches shall be labeled with plastic engraved labels containing
panelboard and circuit information.
D.
Label and paint the covers of the systems junction boxes as follows:
System
Color (All Colors are Kwal Howells)
Fire Alarm
Red Alert AC118R
END OF SECTION 260135
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260135 – 4
p. 286
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 260140 – WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
B.
This section is a Division 26 General Provisions section, and is part of each Division 26, 27, and
28 sections making reference to wiring devices.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A.
Extent of wiring device work is indicated by drawings and schedules.
B.
Types of electrical wiring devices in this section include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Toggle Switches
Receptacles
Poke-Through Assemblies
Dimmers
Occupancy Sensors
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
STANDARDS: Refer to Section 260001 – Electrical General Provisions as applicable.
B.
SHOP DRAWINGS:
1.
2.
Submit manufacturer's data on all electrical wiring devices.
Where occupancy sensors are required, provide scaled drawing showing manufacturer’s
recommended locations.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL:
A.
Provide factory-fabricated wiring devices, in types, and electrical ratings for applications
indicated and complying with NEMA standards Pub No. WD 1. nylon construction, 20 amp
rating minimum.
B.
Provide wiring devices in colors selected by Architect/Engineer. Provide red receptacle outlets
and toggle switches where devices are circuited to emergency power. Provide orange
receptacle outlets where devices are circuited to UPS power.
2.2
TOGGLE SWITCHES:
A.
Provide toggle switches from one of the following manufacturers (Fed-Spec):
WIRING DEVICES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260140 – 1
p. 287
DFCM
Bid MW13039
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
B.
Manufacturer
1-Pole
3-Way
4-Way
W/Pilot
Hubbell
Pass & Seymour
Leviton
Cooper
Bryant
HBL1221
20AC1
1221
2221
4901
1223
20AC3
1222
2223
4903
1224
20AC4
1223
2224
4904
1221-PL
20AC1-RPL
1221-PLR
2221-PL
4901-PL
Abbreviations are defined as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
2.3
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
1-Pole - Single-Pole Toggle Switch
3-Way - Three-Way Toggle Switch
4-Way - Four-Way Toggle Switch
W/Pilo - Single-Pole Toggle Switch with Pilot Light
Must be back and side wired, and have color-coded covers, Brass terminal screws, back wire
ground clamp, and self-grounding clip.
RECEPTACLES:
A.
B.
Provide duplex receptacles from one of the following manufacturers:
Manufacturer
CO
GFCI
IG
Hubbell
Pass & Seymour
Leviton
Cooper
Bryant
5362
5362
5362
5362
5362
GF5362
2091-S
8899
VGF20
GFR53FT
5362IG
IG6300
5362-IG
IG5362
5362IG
Abbreviations are defined as follows:
1.
2.
3.
C.
2.4
CO- Convenience Outlet Duplex Receptacle
GFCI- Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter duplex Receptacle
IG- Isolated Ground Duplex Receptacle
Must have one-piece Brass back strap and back wire grounding clamp (Does not apply to GCFI
or isolated ground).
SWITCHES (COMMERCIAL DECORA):
A.
2.5
Provide rocker switches from one of the following manufacturers (Commercial Decora):
Manufacturer
1-Pole
3-Way
4-Way
Hubbell
Pass & Seymour
Leviton
Cooper
HBL2121
2621
5621-2
7621
HBL2123
2623
5623-2
7623
HBL2124
2624
5624-2
7624
POKE–THROUGH ASSEMBLIES:
A.
Provide factory-assembled, poke-through assemblies equipped with wiring devices as specified
herein. Construct of materials to maintain fire rating of suspended slab with pre-wired conduit,
fire barriers, toggle arm assemblies, service fittings, integral junction box, etc. Provide
WIRING DEVICES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260140 – 2
p. 288
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
coverplates, carpet flanges, etc. in finishes or colors selected by Architect/Engineer. Provide
Poke-through assemblies of one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
2.6
Hubbell
Thomas&Betts
Wiremold
DIMMERS:
A.
Incandescent: Provide solid state, linear slide preset dimmers of voltage and wattage ratings to
suit respective application. Provide occupancy sensor dimmers that are UL listed for required
loads (i.e., incandescent, magnetic low voltage transformer, electronic low voltage transformer).
Where applicable, insure that dimmers are compatible with lamps and ballasts provided.
Provide dimmers from one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Fluorescent: Provide single-pole, AC dimmers for fluorescent fixtures, 60 hertz, 120 or 277 volt
as applicable, with slide-to-off continuously adjustable slider control. Construct with
continuously adjustable trim potentiometer for adjustment of low end dimming. Dimmers to be
an integral part of a fluorescent dimming system consisting of dimming ballast and lighting
controls made by the same manufacturer. Refer to Section 260510 – Interior and Exterior
Building Lighting. Provide dimmers from one of the following:
1.
2.
2.7
Lutron (Nova T Series)
Prescolite (Horizon Series)
Lightolier (Neptune Momentum Series)
Leviton (IllumaTech Series)
Wattstopper
Lutron (Nova T Series)
Leviton (IllumaTech Series)
SPECIAL PURPOSE OUTLETS:
A.
2.8
Provide special purpose outlets of voltage and ampere ratings, and NEMA configurations to suit
respective application. Refer to drawings for NEMA configuration. Provide special purpose
outlets in amperages at least as large as the overcurrent protective device from which they are
served.
COVERPLATES:
A.
2.9
Wall Plates: Provide coverplates for all wiring devices. In all finished areas, provide nylon or
high impact resistant thermoplastic coverplates in colors as selected by Architect. Provide red
coverplates for all receptacle outlets and toggle switches that are circuited to emergency power.
Alternate for Remodel or Expansion Projects - Provide stainless steel coverplates in all areas to
match existing conditions, unless otherwise directed by the architect. Provide ganged
coverplates for all switches and/or dimmers. Provide pre-marked coverplates for special
purpose outlet indicating voltage, amperages, and phase. Provide raised stamped, galvanized,
steel plates in all unfinished areas.
OCCUPANCY SENSORS:
A.
General: Provide self-contained, dual technology motion detectors providing volumetric
coverage without gaps within the detection area. Provide sensors in voltage and wattage
ratings required to suit application. Provide sensors from one of the following manufacturers:
WIRING DEVICES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260140 – 3
p. 289
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Lithonia
Cooper Controls
The Watt Stopper
Hubbell
Leviton
Lutron (ceiling mounted)
Occupancy sensors specified on drawings are manufactured by the Watt Stopper. The
manufacturers indicated above are acceptable provided that they meet the functional
performance of those specified. Prior approval for these manufacturers is not required;
however, if it is determined that the proposed occupancy sensors do not meet functional
performance of the specified occupancy sensors, the Contractor shall provide the specified
occupancy sensors at no additional cost to Owner.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL:
A.
3.2
METHODS:
A.
Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean and free from excess building
materials, dirt, and debris. Do not install wiring devices until painting work is completed.
B.
Replace receptacles and/or coverplates which are damaged, stained, or burned.
3.3
GFCI RECEPTACLES:
A.
Provide separate neutral conductor from panel to each GFCI receptacle circuits.
B.
Install GFCI receptacles for all receptacles installed in restrooms, outdoors, or within six feet of
any sink. All receptacles in kitchens shall be GCFI protected.
C.
Do not wire standard receptacles on the load side of GFCI receptacle - Install GFCI receptacles.
3.4
DIMMERS:
A.
Provide separate neutral conductor for each phase of the branch circuit on which dimmers are
installed.
B.
Provide dimmers in wattage ratings that will support the maximum potential wattage of the
fixtures that are being dimmed. Do not size dimmers based on actual lamps installed in light
fixtures, but on maximum lamp wattage ratings of light fixtures on that particular circuit.
3.5
SURFACE RACEWAYS:
A.
3.6
Install wiring devices and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's written instruction,
applicable requirements of the NEC, NEMA Standards, and NECA's "Standards of Installation",
and in compliance with recognized industry practices to insure that products fulfill requirements.
Provide all receptacles and special purpose outlets required in surface raceways. See Section
260110 – Conduit Raceways, and Section 260135 – Electrical Boxes and Fittings.
OCCUPANCY SENSORS:
WIRING DEVICES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260140 – 4
p. 290
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
A.
3.7
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Do not locate immediately adjacent to air diffusers. Coordinate exact placement with Divisions
21, 22, and 23.
GROUNDING:
A.
3.8
Provide electrical continuous, tight, grounding connections for wiring devices.
TESTING:
A.
3.9
Prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring devices for electrical continuity and proper polarity
connections. After energizing circuitry, test wiring devices to demonstrate compliance with
requirements.
IDENTIFICATION:
A.
All devices shall be identified on the coverplate with panelboard name and circuit number.
B.
In each outlet, tag each wire to identify the circuit it serves.
C.
Identification labels shall be as follows:
Normal Power
Black with White letters
END OF SECTION 260140
WIRING DEVICES
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260140 – 5
p. 291
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 260510 – INTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.
B.
This section is a Division 26 General Provisions section, and is part of each Division 26, 27, and
28 sections making reference to interior and exterior building lighting.
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A.
Extent of interior and exterior building lighting work is indicated by drawings and schedules and
is specified herein.
B.
Type of lighting fixtures in this section include the following:
1.
1.3
Fluorescent
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
STANDARDS: Refer to Section 260001 - Electrical General Provisions as applicable. Provide
fluorescent-lamp ballasts which comply with Certified Ballast Manufacturer's Association
standards and carry the CBM label.
B.
SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit manufacturer's data on interior and exterior building lighting
fixtures. Submit dimensioned drawings of all lighting fixtures. Identify light fixtures by type and
submit in alphabetical order.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL:
A.
Provide light fixtures of types as indicated on drawings or as approved by addenda. Provide
light fixtures complete with, but not necessarily limited to, housings, lamps, lamp holders,
reflectors, ballasts, starters, wiring, etc. Provide all light fixtures with safety latches where
applicable.
B.
Provide all detachable fixture parts, luminous ceiling accessories, louvers, diffusers, lenses, and
reflectors with locking catches, screws, safety chains, or safety cables.
C.
Provide all light fixtures and support accessories as required for a complete system.
2.2
FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES:
A.
FLUORESCENT BALLASTS:
1.
Electronic:
a.
Manufacturers: Provide electronic ballasts from manufacturers specified as an
INTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260510 – 1
p. 292
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
integral part of light fixtures on the light fixture schedule. Where "generic"
electronic ballasts are specified, provide products of one of the following for each
fixture type:
1)
Advance
2)
Lutron
3)
GE
4)
Magnetek
5)
Osram Sylvania
b.
2.
Electronic Ballasts: Whether specified specifically or generically, provide
electronic, fluorescent lamp ballasts for each type of fluorescent fixture capable
of operating lamps indicated. Provide high power factor (97% or greater), Class
P, sound-rated A, and internally thermally protected ballasts. Provide ballasts
with input third harmonic content not exceeding 10% for 120V ballasts and less
than 15% for 277V ballasts, average lamp current crest factor of 1.7, frequency
of operation 20 KHz or greater, and non-PCB capacitors. Unless specifically
noted otherwise, provide all interior light fixtures, with full light output electronic
ballasts. Equip all exterior light fixtures with low temperature starting ballasts.
Comply with all manufacturer's written recommendations for all lamp-ballast
combinations.
c.
Programmed Start Electronic Ballasts: Electronic ballasts shall be programmed
start for maximum lamp life on shorter start cycles. Filament voltage shall be
applied prior to the application of open circuit voltage to allow adequate heating
of the filaments and then open circuit voltage is applied to start the lamps.
Ballasts shall provide for a minimum lamp starting temperature of 0 Degrees F.
Dimming:
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with all requirements, provide products of
one of the following for each fixture type:
1)
Lutron
2)
Advance
3)
GE
4)
Magnetek
5)
Osram Sylvania
b.
3.
Dimming ballasts shall be provided as part of a fluorescent dimming system
where ballasts and controls are made by the same manufacturer. Refer to
Fluorescent Lamp Dimmers Section 140 - Wiring Devices.
c.
Ballasts shall be UL listed, Class P thermally protected and meet ANSI C62.41
(IEEE Publication 587, category A for surge protection.
d.
Dimming shall be smooth and continuous without flicker down to 1% light levels
for T-12, and T-8 lamps (5% for T-5 lamps).
e.
Ballasts shall have a power factor greater than .95. ballast factor equal to .93,
total harmonic distortion less than 10%, and lamp current crest factor less than or
equal to 1.6.
f.
Ballasts shall be inaudible in a 27dB ambient throughout the dimming range.
g.
Ballasts shall be capable of striking lamps at any light level without first flashing
to full light.
h.
Ballasts shall comply with FCC Part 18 regulations and shall not interfere with
other properly installed electrical equipment,
i.
Ballasts shall have a minimum starting temperature of 10 Degrees C.
j.
Ballasts shall be free of Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB's).
Ballast Disconnect:
a.
Fluorescent fixtures that can be serviced-in-place shall come equipped with a
disconnecting means that allows the ballast to be disconnected simultaneously
from all conductors during maintenance and repair. The means of disconnect
shall be placed so that it is accessible to all individuals before service of the
INTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260510 – 2
p. 293
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
b.
c.
B.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
fixture or ballast is initiated.
The line-side terminals of the ballast disconnect shall also be guarded.
The ballast disconnect shall adhere to the requirements outlined in the code,
NEC 2005 410.73(G).
FLUORESCENT LAMPS:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Bid MW13039
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with all requirements, provide products of one of
the following for each fixture type:
a.
General Electric
b.
Phillips
c.
Osram Sylvania
Lamps: Provide fluorescent lamps in types, wattages, and sizes as indicated on fixture
schedule. Unless specifically noted otherwise, equip interior light fixtures with full light
output, energy-conserving, fluorescent lamps.
T-8 Lamps: Where T-8 lamps are specified, provide General Electric "Trimline",
Sylvania "Octron", or Phillips only with initial lumens outputs of 2950 minimum.
Provide TCLP-compliant lamps where available from the manufacturer.
DIFFUSERS: Where acrylic diffusers are specified, provide 100 percent virgin acrylic
compound with minimum thickness of .125 inches.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL:
A.
3.2
Install interior and exterior light fixtures in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,
applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA standards, and NECA's "Standards of Installation", and
in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.
SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS:
A.
RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURES:
1.
2.
3.
B.
3.3
Lay-in Ceilings: Support all light fixtures in lay-in ceilings independent from the ceiling
system. Support each recessed light fixture from the building structure with #12 gauge
steel wire attached to each corner. Provide clips to securely fasten lay-in light fixtures to
Tee-Bars. Provide suspension bars for downlight fixtures in lay-in ceilings.
Gypsum Board, Plaster, or Similar Ceilings: Support all light fixtures in hard ceilings
independent from the ceiling system. Support each recessed light fixture from the
building structure with #12 gauge steel wire attached to each corner. Provide backing
supports and all mounting accessories as required.
Fire Ratings: Provide gypsum board protection for each light fixture recessed in firerated ceiling as required to maintain fire rating of penetrated ceiling.
SURFACE MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES: Support all surface mounted fixtures from a 4"
square octagonal outlet box connected to a standard 3/8" stud or box hangar where applicable.
Include backing and supports as required to support weight of light fixture.
PROTECTION AND CLEANING:
A.
Protect installed and non-installed fixtures from damage during construction period.
INTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260510 – 3
p. 294
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
B.
3.4
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Thoroughly clean all interior and exterior light fixtures. Do not mar or scar reflectors or
diffusers. Repair all nicks and scratches to appearance of original finish. Remove protective
plastic coverings on light fixtures at completion of project.
WIRING METHODS:
A.
Route a minimum of 36" of 3/8" flexible conduit to each lay-in light fixture directly from an outlet
box. Unless specified otherwise, flexible conduit shall not exceed 72" in length. Do not loop
flexible conduit from fixture to fixture.
B.
Grounding: Provide equipment grounding connections for each lighting fixture.
3.5
COORDINATION:
A.
3.6
Refer to architectural reflected ceiling drawings for exact location and quantities of light fixtures,
and ceiling types. Where conflicts occur between the architectural and electrical drawings, or
where fixtures types do not coordinate with ceiling systems, notify architect/engineer prior to bid.
After bid and award of contract, provide all light fixtures as required to meet the intent of the
construction documents. Coordinate fixture layouts and installations with ceiling installer prior
to submitting shop drawings and during construction. Fluorescent light fixtures shall be not less
than 1/2" from combustible materials.
WARRANTY:
A.
LAMPS: Warranty incandescent and fluorescent lamps for a period of two months from
substantial completion.
B.
ELECTRONIC BALLASTS: Warranty electronic ballasts for parts and labor for complete
replacement for a period of five years. Warranty shall include an allowance for nominal
replacement labor and replacement of defective product.
END OF SECTION 260510
INTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
260510 – 4
p. 295
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
SECTION 280721 – DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM, EXISTING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B.
This section is a Division 26 General Provisions section, and is part of each Division 26 sections
making reference to fire alarm system.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.3
Notification appliances.
DEFINITIONS
A.
LED: Light-emitting diode.
B.
NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.
1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Match Existing System.
B.
System shall be UL-listed and factory mutual-approved.
1.5
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Seismic Performance: Fire-alarm control unit and raceways shall withstand the effects of
earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.
1.
1.6
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully
operational after the seismic event."
SUBMITTALS
A.
General Submittal Requirements:
1.
2.
B.
Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to
Architect.
Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:
a.
Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design.
b.
NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level III minimum.
c.
Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM, EXISTING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
280721 – 1
p. 296
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
C.
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of
Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72.
Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits.
Include battery-size calculations.
Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that
each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity
possible when air-handling system is operating.
Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts,
drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them.
Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector
housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to
manufacturer's written recommendations.
Include voice/alarm signaling-service equipment rack or console layout, grounding
schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram.
Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable
device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.
D.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
E.
Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire-alarm control unit, accessories, and components,
from manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
F.
Field quality-control reports.
G.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 –
Operation and Maintenance Data, include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.7
Bid MW13039
Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter
in NFPA 72.
Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent
Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter.
Record copy of site-specific software.
Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article of
the same name and include the following:
a.
Frequency of testing of installed components.
b.
Frequency of inspection of installed components.
c.
Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.
d.
Manufacturer's user training manuals.
Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.
Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit.
Copy of NFPA 25.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM, EXISTING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
280721 – 2
p. 297
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
A.
Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation
of units required for this Project. Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as firealarm Level II technician
B.
Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system from
single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and operate as,
an extension of existing system.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after
arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
1.9
Notify Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of proposed interruption of fire-alarm
service.
Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without Owner's written permission.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Existing Fire-Alarm Equipment: Maintain existing equipment fully operational until new
equipment has been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN
SERVICE" until it is accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put into service and
label existing fire-alarm equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from the building.
B.
Equipment Removal: After acceptance of new fire-alarm system, remove existing disconnected
fire-alarm equipment and wiring.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Manufacturers / Installers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
Manufacturer
Installer / Telephone
FCI/Gamewell
Nelson Fire Systems / (801) 468-8300
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A.
General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Individually addressed, connected to a
signaling line circuit, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system
connections. Match existing devices and fire alarm control panel, confirm compatibility prior to
ordering.
1.
Combination Devices: Match existing horn/strobe devices that are compatible with
existing fire alarm system.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM, EXISTING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
280721 – 3
p. 298
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
B.
2.3
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
Notification Appliance Circuit: Operation shall sound in Temporal Pattern 3 where applicable.
CIRCUITS:
1.
Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A.
a.
Initiating Device Circuits: Style D.
b.
Notification Appliance Circuits: Style Z.
c.
Signaling Line Circuits: Style 6.
d.
Install no more than 100 addressable devices on each signaling line circuit.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.
B.
Raceway: Install fire alarm conductors in raceway. Fire alarm system conductors from different
zones may be combined in common conduit. Make certain that raceway and wire quantity, size,
and type are suitable for equipment supplied and is within NEC standards. No wiring other than
that directly associated with the fire alarm and detection systems shall be permitted inside the
fire alarm conduits. All conduit, mounting boxes, junction boxes, panels, detectors, alarm
devices, etc., shall be mounted and fastened with appropriate fittings to insure positive
grounding throughout the system.
C.
Loop wires through each device in zone for proper supervision. Tee-taps are not permitted.
Wiring splices are to be avoided to the maximum extent possible; if needed, they must be made
only in junction boxes. Transposing or changing color-coding of the wires shall not be permitted.
D.
Protect conductors from cuts, abrasion, and other damage during construction.
E.
Minimum conductor size shall be 14 AWG, unless otherwise specified. Shielded and/or
stranded conductors shall be provided where recommended by the manufacturer.
F.
Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before
making changes or connections.
1.
2.
3.
Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building.
Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the supervising station.
Expand, modify, and supplement existing control equipment as necessary to extend
existing control functions to the new points. New components shall be capable of
merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance of either system.
G.
Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install at +80 inches (2032 mm) above finished floor, but not
less than 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back
boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille.
H.
Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn at +80 inches
(2032 mm) above finished floor, but at least 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling.
I.
All fire alarm junction boxes shall be identified with zone number and red paint for easy
identification.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM, EXISTING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
280721 – 4
p. 299
DFCM
eLearning Remodel
SLCC PROJECT # F13011
3.2
Bid MW13039
18 March 2013
DFCM PROJECT # 13037660
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.3
Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals as required by Owner.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field tests shall be witnessed by Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction .
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C.
Perform tests and inspections.
1.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.
Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written
instructions and Authority Having Jurisdiction. Perform the test using a portable soundlevel meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4.
Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's
written instructions and Authority Having Jurisdiction.
Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written
instructions and Authority Having Jursidiction.
E.
Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or
replaced devices and appliances.
F.
Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
G.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 280721
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM, EXISTING
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
280721 – 5
p. 300
DFCM
Bid MW13039
Question and Answers for Bid #MW13039 - SLCC RRC Rampton Tech Bldg
eLearning Ctr Remodel / 13037660
OVERALL BID QUESTIONS
There are no questions associated with this bid. If you would like to submit a question,
please click on the "Create New Question" button below.
Question Deadline: Apr 24, 2013 3:00:00 PM MDT
Apr 16, 2013 7:31:06 AM MDT
p. 301